Home

User Manual - Ume Audio System AB

1. DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Record the next free preset in a Channel View RECORD Record the preset in a Channel View RECORD Record current channel selection to a Master RECORD amp Record current Master Page content to a different Tal RECORD amp Master Page PAGE Record all attributes in this Preset for the selected RECORD amp ATTRIB channel s Record attributes for selected channels to Preset Tel RECORD amp Record current channel selection as the next RECORD amp GROUP free Group Record current channel selection as Group sl RECORD amp Shortcuts Update Functions 4 1 These are shortcuts for updating Presets DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Update changes in the Preset loaded to this UPDATE Channel View Update Palette in a Direct Select UPDATE amp Direct Select Key Shortcuts Channel Text Wizard 4 1 This is the shortcut for opening the Channel Text Wizard that sets texts to the Channel Database directly from a Channel View DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Open the Channel Text Wizard for the current channel CHID amp selection 553 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Main Playback 4 1 These are shortcuts for the Sequence in the Main Playback
2. 163 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Layouts Introduction You can have up to 999 custom Channel Layouts in addition to the normal channel views This is an example of some instrument symbols in a Channel Layout SEKEEELELEEK General Facts Auto select function by channel content The same channel can exist in several Channel Layouts There are USITT plot symbols for different light sources They can contain any type of data besides channels FORMAT is used to open a Channel Layout Channel Layouts can be assigned to Master Playbacks 164 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Layouts List You can insert and delete Channel Layouts in the Channel layout list Browser gt Setup gt Channel Layout 3 Channel Layouts Channel Layout ext Auto Selectable ESC Oskar No No Channel Layout List Columns amp Functions 4 2 Function Key Feedback Channel layout The ID of each Layout Cannot be changed Text Press MODIFY to activate and end text input This text is shown in the lower right corner of the channel views Auto Selectable Enables Auto Select Delete Layout Deletes the currently selected Channel Layout Cannot be undone Insert a new Inserts a new Channel Layout Channel Layout Copy a Layout Copies the selected layout 4 2 Paste a Layout Pastes a copied layout 4 2 If you select a channel that is included
3. NOTE Function Key Feedback Select left BROWSER The left are is default set up as the browser and will be selected by pressing Browser Select right BROWSER amp Right area is opened Right arrow Select top BROWSER amp Top area is opened Up arrow Select bottom BROWSER amp Bottom area is opened Down arrow Close selected BROWSER The selected area is closed Resize selected BROWSER amp Wheel The selected area is resized There are four dock areas per screen Content may be repeated 480 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 MACROS 4 2 Macros allow you to store a series of key presses and play back witha single number This chapter contains the following sections e Macros Introduction e Macros Record amp Playback e Macros List 481 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Macros Introduction 4 2 A Macro is basically a series of key presses and actions that are stored under a number for random playback Macros can be recorded and played back in real time or fast Macros can be linked to a sequence or chase step Each Macro can have a text label Macros can not be edited There is an indication in the top right corner when a Macro is being played back 482 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Macros Record amp Playback 4 2 Macros are recorded with the LEARN MACRO soft key of the Misc Soft key page in the con
4. Column Input Function Master The number of this Master cannot be edited Content Type MODIFY Press MODIFY to open a dropdown with choices of content Content Sets the number for the content type In Used by START Flash on time Use Master Times and Master links lf only an In time is set it will function as an Out time as well Wait Used by START and Master links It is how long the master will stay up before the Out time fades out Qut MODIFY Used by START and Master links It is how fast the master fade out after a Wait time Flash mode Toggles Flash mode on off Flash level Sets flash level Solo Fade Toggles Solo mode on off See Solo Mode Page Time Shows the Master Page time that affects all In Wait Out times set in See Master Page Times Page Time NOTE Times can be set in or in seconds This is selected in the Settings Attributes you can always toggle this by holding C before pressing MODIFY in the In Wait Out columns 99 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Load Clear Modify 4 1 Function Keys Feedback Clear a Master Playback C amp Master Key The content of the Master Playback is cleared Clear all Master C amp PAGE The Master Playbacks are Playbacks cleared Load an item from the LOAD amp Item is loaded to the Browser Master Key
5. The paste popup has options for pasting a range of channels or mirroring the selected object 166 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Paste options Select the paste options Mirror horizontally or vertically will mirror through the middie point of the layout Paste starting at Mirror through the horizontal axis Mirror through the vertical axis Channel Layout Editor Wheels 4 2 The wheels are used to spread the selected objects horizontally or vertically and to change size or rotation Stretch H Stretch V 1 Select objects Cursor mode 2 Use wheel to edit Function Feedback Stretch H Objects are spread horisontally Stretch V Objects are spread vertically Size Object size is changed Rotate Object is rotated Hold C to rotate individual objects within selection 167 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Layout Editor Colors 4 2 It is possible to set Foreground and Background color for all objects Foreground EE Background 1 Select object 2 Select Foreground or Background color deselect object to view colors Channel Layout Editor Align 4 2 There are different align options for a selection of objects 1 Select objects 2 Click on ALIGN to get the Align popup Align options Select which data types that should be aligned Values will be copied from the first object in the selection to the others Align horizontall
6. DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Set an In Out Time Tel TIME Set an InTime ONJ Set an Out Time Tel out Shortcuts Direct Selects 4 1 DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Select Type of content hold key TYPE amp Direct Key Select Bank of content hold key BANK amp Direct Key Record a Palette directly RECORD amp Direct Key Update a Palette directly UPDATE Ia Direct Key Change User Setup User Setup key 1 5 Record a Screen Setting TAB amp Direct Key Activate a Palette in time Select all channels in a Palette CHAD amp Direct Key Select all channels with a level in a Palette ALL amp Direct Key Shortcuts Notes 4 1 You can set a Note directly to the current Sequence Step or the focused step in a spreadsheet DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Create a Note for the current sequence step when in the NOTE Main Playback or Live tab Create a Note for a focused item in a spreadsheet NOTE Open the NOTE Editor directly MODIFY amp NOTE 555 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Capture amp Release 4 2 Functions for capturing amp releasing channels Capture functions DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Activate
7. Function Key Feedback Partition The ID of each Partition Cannot be changed Text Press MODIFY to activate and end text input This text is shown in the top bar of the channel views Active Toggles the Partition on off Apply to Opens a popup where it is possible to select if the Partition applies to IFCB Intensity Color or Focus amp Beam If a User is logged in that does not have permission to activate a Partition the Active cell will show See User Login NOTE The default Partition All is always defined to allow access to the full system 502 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Partitions Create 4 3 Partitions are created in the Partition List 1 Open the Partition List BROWSER gt Setup gt Partition List 5 Partition List Partition List Te e Apply to IFCB Moving Focus Bea Press INSERT Select channels they will show up in the Channel View part Press RECORD or UPDATE to store the channel selection Press MODIFY in the TEXT cell to give a name to this Partition Press MODIFY in the APPLY TO cell to choose permission level DPPN 503 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Partitions Add Partition Wizard 4 3 There is a Wizard to assist you in creating Partitions using Play information that already has been generated 1 Open the Partition List BROWSER gt Setup gt Partition List 2 Press WIZARD Add Partition Wizard
8. Refresh intensities AND attributes for the REFRESH amp selected device s 4 3 NOTE The changed flags are cleared for what you refresh 4 3 The Refresh function will take the currently focused channel into account if you are using NEXT LAST In early Consoles the REFRESH key was labelled UPDATE PB Contact your ETC representative for a new key cap if it s the old kind 92 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks There are 40 Master Playback faders Each of them can play back anything from a single channel to a complete sequence This chapter contains the following sections Master Playbacks Introduction Master Playbacks Playback Keys Master Playbacks Fader Mode Switch Master Playbacks Master Editor Master Playbacks Load Clear Modify Master Playbacks Start Fades Master Playbacks Channel Selection Master Playbacks Channels Master Playbacks Presets Master Playbacks Sequences Master Playbacks Chase Master Playbacks Groups Master Playbacks Flash Mode Master Playbacks Solo Mode Master Playbacks Macros Master Playbacks Dynamics Master Playbacks Channel Layouts Master Playbacks Palettes Master Playbacks Rate Master Playbacks Times Master Playbacks Master View 93 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Introduction Each fader has the following controls
9. Record a Move Fade amp RECORD When a movefade m is followed by another movefade only channels with new levels will be affected Record a LockFade amp RECORD When a lockfade I is started the channels involved will not be affected by anything until they have finished the fade they started Stepping in the sequence will stop ongoing lock fades HINTS e When you jump in the sequence with GOTO the history of all fades will be executed to recreate the correct state after the jump e GOTO amp B updates the current state scanning backwards in the sequence accumulating Move Lock fades e Fora Lock fade it is not possible to press PAUSE or GO BACK since the nature is to lock the fade regardless of other playback controls Stepping through the sequence with SEQ SEQ or using GOTO will stop current Lock fades If you start a move or lock fade on top of a crossfade the crossfade now continues to run in the background and is also available for speed control on the display e Move and Lock fades are indicated with M and L in the Channel Views 237 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Times 4 3 You can set times to a sequence step and all channels and moving device parameters will follow that time You can also set individual times in seconds or as a percentage of the in and delay times for each channel and moving device parameter
10. Every dimmer or device controlled from Congo is selected and controlled by its channel number This chapter contains the following sections Channels Introduction Channels Ch Only Mode Channels Views Channels Command Syntax Channels 255 Bit Levels Channels Capture Mode Channels Clear All Channels Check Mode Channels Balance Mode Channels Random Selection Channels Constant Level Channels Scale Level Channels Used amp Unused Channels Group Wheel Mode Channels Rem Dim 178 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels Introduction A channel is the handle you call upon to control any dimmer or moving device connected to the system Channels are selected in the Channel Control which is the channel functionality of the programming section The Channel Control functions are mapped to any section of the console at any time for example pressing LIVE connects to the A field of the Main Playback pressing BLIND connects to the Blind field NOTE Channel Control is not the same thing as a programmer where channels are stolen into the programmer and have to be released instead the Channel Control is mapped to any Playback A B Live Blind Masters and controls the channels directly in that playback General Facts Channel levels can be set with the faders in Channels Only Mode Channels can be selected and set with a Command Syntax from th
11. CON GO CONGO 7 User Manual v4 3 Copyright Electronic Theatre Controls Inc All Rights reserved Product information and specifications subject to change Part Number 7310M1200 4 3 0 Rev A Released March 2007 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Congo Manual This is the manual for Congo amp Congo Jr Rev 4 3 2007 03 28 A theatre and moving light control system for over 3000 control ch s and 6000 moving light attributes Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Table Of Contents Congo EE E EE E 1 Table Of EE 2 This Manual Using the Help system GI 20 Help System Navigating OI 20 Help Search Function 3 1 21 Help System Favourites 4 1 c cssccssesssssessessssscsoneeesecsorsncesevssesensesssenenescuseroseseevesenvenes 22 Help System Change Language 7 22 This Manual Terminale yes vics 3 des acvewssosacs yrenhag faeeetaydvaonadensaeeant Eege 23 Disclaimer AA Jrd iaaa a cients ona se slaa dete sbbadsunieades 24 POWEr Up Procedure DEE 25 Save And Load Information 321 26 Load a New empty Play GL 21 27 Open A Play 4 2 iscecscdnactscscueteed ei e Weis A schegs Euse ue aihen SEEE hiesa aie a EESE EE Sie 28 TE ME 43 EE 28 Demo Plays 4 3 ssccisisases arna ase een teas spaavasedunctesnncasetsogendeaspenaedebateeeennens 30 Exitand Sh tdo EE 31 Power oss Kr eet Ee S EE eet 31 Systemi Info Bee Daer ere eegen eet tase eegene ab oe 32 System Info Ins
12. Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Create a Scroller Roll 4 3 1 Open the Scroller Rolls List from the Browser Browser gt Patching gt Scroller Rolls 2 Press INSERT to create a new Roll NOTE 4 3 A number of standard Rolls are created by default when you open a new Play 3 Set Fan Intensity Default Time and TEXT for this roll 4 Press MODIFY in the Scroller Roll cell to open the Scroller Roll Editor A Wizard is opened where you can define the number of frames and the default Fan value can be edited later Scroller Item Wizard Number of frames f Fan 100 5 This it what the scroller roll editor looks like with five frames defined 4 Scroller Roll Editor Standard Roll Position Text Fan AutoMove Value You can define the following functions Function Value Feedback Position 1 999 The ID of each Position Cannot be changed Text Press MODIFY to activate and end text input Fan 0 100 It is possible to set a Fan value for each color to keep noise down AutoMove 0 10bits The scroller will move slowly forth and back when the corresponding color is selected It will not take individual calibration into account Value 0 255 This is the 8 bit value 0 255 that will be output when this frame is selected 6 Exit with ESC 358 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Assign A Scroller Roll Scroller Rolls can be assigned from the Device Setti
13. Distance specifies the time in percent between the starting point of each channel when the Delay Relation is used 384 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Delay Relation amp Distance Dynamics Display 4 1 In the Dynamics Display the Delay Relation is mapped to wheel 4 There is a soft key for setting the Distance parameter directly with a numeric value Activate the Dynamics Soft Key Page in the Main Display of the console facepanel by pressing DYNAMICS in the top menu Congo Live Dynamic Effects Delete Dynam Congo Jr Delete Delete Keep All Dynam Dynam lt ed 1 Hold wheel key 4 to get a list of Delay Relations in the display 2 Select a relation using the wheel 3 Let go of the wheel to activate the current selection Enter a number and press DISTANCE to set the Distance value 0 100 385 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Loop Count A Dynamic Effect can be set to run a specific number of loops and then stop automatically If set to 0 it will run forever This is done in the Loop Count column of the Dynamic Effects tabs Loop Count 0 See Dynamics Live Dynamic Effects and Dynamics Preset Dynamic Effects 386 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Fade A Dynamic Effect can fade in size rate or both when played back in a Sequence When faded manually in a Master Playback size will follow the fader 0 100 The Fade parameter is set in t
14. Select all Devices in Master 1 by pressing the master key for that Playback The LED in the Master key will light up All Devices of the first type are select Select COLOR parameters for the Main Display of the console Use the wheels and wheel keys to set Color parameters Hold UPDATE and press a Master key to store There will be a popup where you can enter a Text Press MODIFY to confirm D Froha J am Mode Option Create Beam Palettes 4 1 Direct Selects in the fourth lower right section are used for Beam Palettes 1 10 Beam Palettes are not generated automatically If there are Beam Palettes 1 10 they are displayed If not it is easy to update record them a ELE Record Beam Palettes 1 Select all Devices in Master 1 by pressing the master key for that Playback The LED in the Master key will light up All Devices of the first type are select Select BEAM parameters for the Main Display of the console Use the wheels and wheel keys to set Beam parameters Hold RECORD and press a Direct Select key to store There will be a popup where you can enter a Text 5 Press MODIFY to confirm PON J am Mode Leaving 4 1 When Jam Mode is left by moving the mode switch back to Masters or Channels Only the console will return to the state of the Master Playbacks previous to entering Jam Mode To avoid sudden changes all Masters over 1 will be set to pending which means they will refresh their content when moved to
15. Yellow level for master playback white for main playback Exclusive level Exclusive level is indicated in blue Scale Factor A scaled channel level has a sign after 112 5 Inhibit Red level indicates an 52 inhibit master aeee 183 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Information Running Fades Function Screen Explanation Channel Times Channel Time T and Delay D are indicated under the level Move Fade Channel Time T and Delay D are indicated under the level Lock Fade An L after the time indicates Lock Fade Running Dynamics A D over the channel symbol Running moving device parameters FCB and Dynamics running for this device 184 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Information Info Box 4 1 Under the Browser there is an INFO box which will show information for the currently selected channel s It iS possible to use NEXT LAST to focus a single channel within a selection and get the channel info Info Channel 2 The following information is shown Text A D for the channel Template name If a dimmer curve is assigned The Dimmer Device Addresses Park status More than one channel select is shown as x channels selected If there are dimmer errors reported for a channel 185 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels Command Syntax The default m
16. 207 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Groups Load To Playbacks 4 1 You can load Groups directly to any Playback Action Key s Feedback Load Group to a Master GROUP amp Group is loaded to the Playback Master Key Master Playback Add Group to Live 4 1 Tel GROUP amp Group is added to Live LIVE Add Group to Blind 4 1 GROUP amp Group is added to Blind BLIND 208 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 PRESETS A Preset is used to store intensities attributes or attribute times for playback in a Sequence Main or Master Playback This chapter contains the following sections Presets Introduction Presets Record Presets Update Presets List Presets Load To Playbacks Presets Copy Presets Select Channels Presets Fetch Intensities Presets Display List Presets Channel Editor Wizard Presets Auto Save Presets Times Presets Compare Mode 209 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Presets Introduction The basic building block in Congo is a Preset General Facts Channels levels attributes and Dynamic Effects are stored into Presets Presets can be played back from the Master Playbacks and the Main Playback one by one or as part of a Sequence or Chase You can store 9999 individual Presets using Preset numbers 0 1 999 9 Presets can be ar
17. 545 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Device Palette Recording Keys and shortcuts for handling Device Palettes DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Record selected Devices to the first free Focus RECORD amp FOCUS Palette Record selected Devices to the first free Color RECORD amp COLOR Palette Record selected Devices to the first free Beam RECORD amp BEAM Palette Record selected Devices to the first free All RECORD amp PALETTE Palette Record selected Devices to Focus Palette RECORD A FOCUS Record selected Devices to Color Palette RECORD A COLOR Record selected Devices to Beam Palette L CRECORD amp BEAM Record selected Devices to All Palette Le RECORD amp PALETTE Shortcuts Device Palette Activating Keys and shortcuts for activting values in Device Palettes DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Activate values from a Focus palette Focus Activate values from a Color palette Tel COLOR Activate values from a Beam palette Tel BEAM Activate values from an All palette PALETTE Activate a single parameter from a Focus Tel Focus amp Wheel Key palette Activate a single parameter from a Color Tal COLOR amp Wheel Key palette Activate a singl
18. A ii Meal Meet Mes G IE GIELI Rer 338 Meat Mend COEK CAES Wei LK CLER Cyt i i i i f i macas A CH Macis MectS E CEEL macas f maezs i Emec s i fracas h fracas Leen masi f 8 alo x Leite brary Status Channels Size Size Channel Rate Rate Channel Rete Relation Delay Relz 1 stopi Running 100 100 All All Function Key Feedback Open Preset Dynamics GJ amp Dynamic Editor for Preset Editor for Preset DYN EFFECT is opened Open Preset Dynamics PRESET amp Dynamic Editor for the Editor for the Presetin A DYNEFFECT Preset in A is opened 4 2 Open Preset Dynamics DYN EFFECT amp A Dynamic Editor for the Editor for the Preset in A Preset in A is opened 4 2 Open Preset Dynamics DYN EFFECT TI amp B Dynamic Editor for the Editor for the Preset in B Preset in B is opened 4 2 NOTE You can open this editor in two more ways e Double click on Dyn in the Sequence Playback View e Press MODIFY in the Dynamics Column of a Preset List 378 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Base Value When a Dynamic Effect is activated it will run with the current position of the corresponding attribute or intensity as a Base Value If you change this Base Value the Dynamic Effect will follow If you run a Preset with a Dynamic Effect and then run another Preset with a new base value the default action is for the Dyna
19. Channel downgrade Time settings International settings Software upgrade code How to update the software is described step by step in System Info Software amp Update 419 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Login Settings Software Upgrade You can upgrade the outputs of a system with a code that you buy from your dealer Selecting Software Upgrade and pressing MODIFY or click opens a software upgrade dialog a en System settings te General System name Congo Preferred language english Preferred help lanquage File Server path Inverse LCD Channel downgrade Time settings Enter the code and press MODIFY to confirm 420 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Login Settings Networking 4 3 There are ten logical Networks 0 9 that can work with different systems within the same physical network In other words if more than one Congo system controlling different equipments are to be on the same physical network they should be set to different logical networks The Networking features set i the Login Settings are these Networking Preferred IP address Anslutning till lokalt n tverk 192 168 0 199 ETCNet2 ETCNet2 System priority 10 ETCNet2 EDMX Start 1 Avab IPX Arthet Streaming ACN Logical network Advanced settings Backup setup 421 Functions Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Function Feedback Preferred IP address C
20. Dynamic Effects are created in the Effect library Browser Size and Rate can be set in the Dynamics Soft Key page Offset and Delay Relation can be set in the Live Dynamic Effects list and the Dynamics Soft Key page e Distance can be set in the Live Dynamic Effects list Loop Count can be set in the Live Dynamic Effects list Dynamic effects can be stored and played back from all Playbacks Effect Library e A number of common Dynamic Effects are included in the Effect Library of the Browser It is possible to create new ones as well Intensity and Attributes e Intensity Dynamics require a Stop Dynamic e Al Dynamics in a Master Playback will stop when a Master is faded to zero e Attribute Dynamics will stop when new attribute values are played back Dynamic Views e There is a Live Dynamics Editor e There is a Preset Dynamics Editor NOTE To create a movement like a Circle for a moving Device two sinus waves are applied to pan and tilt and one of them is offset 25 364 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Start Dynamics are activated for the currently selected channel s The current attribute and intensity values are used as the Base Value for the Dynamic Effect A D will appear in the top right corner of the channel symbol NOTE Activating a Dynamic Effect will lock the attributes and intensities of the selected channels to the Dynamic Effect See Dynamics Stop
21. In Congo there are two important settings IPX and WYSIWY Sandnet Capture Link e PX is a protocol being used for communicating light information over Ethernet e The WYSIWY Sandnet Capture Link enables these softwares to communicate specific features back to Congo such as focusing lights Preparations in Congo 1 Set Avab IPX to ON in the Login Settings See Login Settings Editing 2 Set the WYSIWY Sandnet Capture Link to ON in the System Settings See System Settings Output Preparations in the Computer running Visualisation Software Make sure IPX drivers are installed under Windows normally only TCP IP is installed by default 1 Go to Network Properties in your PC right click and select properties on the Network symbol in the Control Panel 2 Ifthe IPX SPX protocol isn t installed click on Install select Protocol and find the IPX SPX protocol in the list 3 When the IPX SPX protocol is installed select Properties and verify that frame type is set to 802 3 Otherwise the utility will not be able to find your console on the network Visualisation WYSIWYG 4 1 In the computer hosting WYSIWYG There is an Avab Driver for WYSIWYG that needs to be installed Also you need to make sure IPX is active and that the frame type is set to 802 3 1 Make sure that you have WYSIWYG Rel 7 or later installed on your PC Avab Vista dongles need the Console Edition CE version 2 Download the setup exe file from
22. NOTE In Congo Jr Save Screens and Auto Groups cannot be selected from Direct Selects They will arrive in 4 3 when the functionality of the TYPE keys is completed Set Channel Texts For The Database There are three ways of setting text to channels in the Channel Database Browser gt Patching gt Channel Database Method 1 In the Channel Database cells directly Action Key Feedback Set a text in a cell s Select any cell s in Press MODIFY enter a the ABCD columns text and press MODIFY again to confirm Method 2 In the Channel Database with a Wizard Action Key Feedback 1 Select text column Select any cell s in Cell is highlighted the ABCD columns 2 Open the Wizard Text Wizard is opened 3 Select channels Channel functions Channels appear in Text Wizard 149 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Set Text Wizard B 122 0 Mallanspel Strak Selected channals Step 1 Select the channels levels to operate on in the Channel View Step 2 Select options and Execute Text Action Key Feedback 4 Enter Text Text cell Press MODIFY enter a text and press MODIFY again to confirm 150 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Method 3 In any channel view Action Key Feedback 1 Select channels Channel functions Channels are highlighted in yellow 2 Open Text Wizard amp Text Wizard is opened You can set text ABCD and E
23. Sequences List Insert Delete Load NOTE Connect a Master to the Master Playback controls to get more control over the Sequence See Master Playback 105 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Chase Hold MODIFY and press the Master Key to open the editor for that Chase The Chase will start from the first step every time the fader is brought over 0 No levels are visible until the Master is over 0 Function Keys Feedback Load Chase to a Master Cl SEQ amp Chase is loaded to the Playback Master Ke Master Playback The number and name are shown in the master display Load all recorded Chases Ce SEQ amp Hold SEQ and keep and Sequences from Master Keys pressing new Master keys to the Master Playbacks to load the next stored Sequence Chase Start Chase Master Key The Master Key is aGO key NOTE You can load a Chase directly from the Sequences List as well See Sequences List Insert Delete Load NOTE Connect a Master to the Master Playback controls to get more control over the Chase See Master Playback 106 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Groups A Group is played back with intensities Press the Master Key to select all channels in the Group Function Keys Feedback Load Group to a Master GROUP amp Gro
24. can be opened from the Browser as well Browser gt Live Attributes NOTE PARK works against selected cells when an Attribute View is open Live Attributes Scroller Color O W O W 07W O W Focus Sp Tracking 29 3 Tracking 17 62 Tracking 29 3 Tracking 17 62 Magenta Yellow Hold FORMAT and press Right Arrow to show all parameters listed over each other blanking out the ones not relevant Hold FORMAT and press Left Arrow to change back 4 2 Live Attributes Scroller Color 33 aa Mac 300 M4 Magenta Yellow Color O W O W o W O W Focus Sp Magenta Yellow Tracking 29 3 Trading 17 62 Tracking 29 3 Tracking 17 62 Magenta Yellow 43 43 43 43 NOTE Select format by pressing FORMAT Hold FORMAT and press Down Arrow to open up Time and Delay rows See Device Times Attribute Time Editor 299 Color Sp Color Sp Color Sp Strobe OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN Strobe Strobe OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN Frost D o D D Frost Frost al H a Selected devices Beam Sp Tracking Tracking Tracking Tracking Selected devices Beam Sp Beam Sp Tracking Tracking Tracking Tracking Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Live Attributes Columns 4 2 These are the different Moving Device parameters that are displayed for each with their current values For editing see Device Views Editing Function g
25. e A Master key to load content and select channels e Masters 1 20 have a Flash Option key e Master content and modes are shown in the master displays between the master rows Upper row has one Master key P masters 1 20 Lower masters have two Master keys 94 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Content You can play back almost any kind of content from a Master Playback The content can be loaded directly or from the Master List See Load Clear Content Function Channel s Single channels or several channels as an unrecorded Grp Preset Play back Preset from fader select channels with Master key Flash with Flash key Group Play back Groups from fader select channels with Master key Flash with Flash key Sequence Play back Sequences The Master key is Go The fader is a Grand Master for that Sequence Connect to the Master Playback for more functions Chase Play back Chases The Master key is Go The fader is a Grand Master for that Sequence Connect to the Master Playback for more functions Dynamic Effect Activate a Dynamic Effect for the selected channels Palette Activate any kind of Palette F C B All for the selected channels Moving Device Parameter Any parameter of a moving device can be assigned to a Master Playback Channel Layout Any Channel Layout can be assigned to a Master Playback Can be assigned by holding a Par
26. 448 1 Focus Speed 2 Pan Y so 3 Iris Rnd CP 4 Ins Normal Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Track Channels 4 1 The current channel selection can be tracked in Sequences Chases Presets Groups and all kinds of Palettes Focus Color Beam amp All Once the channel s are selected there is a key combination of TRACK and some other key to activate the corresponding tracking tab Track Channels In Sequences 4 1 Track the current channel selection in a Sequence or Chase Function Key Feedback Track in the Sequence of Track List for Sequence in the Main Playback Main Playback is opened Track in all Sequences amp SEQ Track List for all Sequences is opened Track in the Sequence of amp Track List for Sequence in a Master Playback Master Playback is opened Track list for the Sequence of the Main Playback Mode Devices Track list for all Sequences Sequence Step Text si 66 81 96 1 2 3 a s 6 7 Je 9 10 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 9 9 70 70 91 91 91 91 Track list for the Sequence of a Master Playback Step Preset Text Mode Devices 1 F See Track Channels Show Levels amp Attributes 4 1 449 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Track To Wizard If you press WIZARD on a level in a sequence step you will get a popup where you can select up to which Sequence Step the same level should be chang
27. All Parameters All attributes are recorded Active All attributes are recorded devices with an intensity over zero 4 3 This means that it is necessary to record all attributes for the first step in a Sequence manually See Record All Attributes for selected channels Only Changed are recorded Attributes are tagged as Changed when they have been altered since they were last recorded This indication is a purple background in Channel and Attribute views You can force this flag manually with the soft key SET CHNGED in the Devices soft key page of the console Main Display Congo Live Dynamic Effects 338 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Congo Jr Flip Update Focus Set Clear ui U2 U3 Palett Mode Chnged Chnged rss C W a i WEE All commands are executed to the currently selected Devices Function Key Feedback Set all parameters to Set Chnged amp All parameters are changed PALETTE flagged as changed purple background Set Focus parameters to Set Chnged amp Focus parameters are changed Focus flagged as changed purple background Set Color parameters to Set Chnged amp Color parameters are changed COLOR flagged as changed purple background Set Beam parameters to Set Chnged amp Beam parameters are changed BEAM flagged as changed purple background Set a specific parameter SetChnged amp Specific parameters are to changed Wheel
28. Congo Live Dynamic Effects Congo Jr Flip Update Focus Set Clear U2 Palett Mode Chnged Chnged Zen C T C TTO 3 Select the device s you wish to flip and press FLIP To undo press FLIP again 294 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Control Moving Light Dock Area 4 2 A Moving Light control panel can be assigned to a dock area See Dock Areas Configure Moving Light Control All features are the same as in the console and controlled by mouse The color picker is unique here Click to select a color for the selected Moving Device s NOTE You cannot click to hold a key and press another at the same time like FAN and PAN To achieve this from an offline editor use a keyboard shortcut in combination with this view For example Ctrl F FAN and click on the Pan wheel to fan Pan 295 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Control Color Mix Modes 4 2 Any Device with color mixing can be controlled in three different ways from the wheels in the console or the wheels in the Moving Light Dock Area See Dock Areas Configure Hold SETUP and press COLOR to toggle between these three modes e CMY Cyan Magenta amp Yellow e RGB Red Green and Blue e HSV Hue amp Saturation amp Value NOTE The system still works with CMY values internally so everything will be translated between CMY and the other color model This may lead to some rounding or accuracy d
29. D D D D H Direct Select keys 1 4 Soft menu key Z info area Soft menu Direct Select and Text keyboard keys Parameter wheels with wheel keys 43 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Main Display Functions The Soft Menu exit key lt moves one step back up to the top menu level each time it is pressed These are the soft menu keys in the top menu 4 2 Congo Select zech Congo Jr TEE CT M e KSE Summary of soft key menus Soft Key Menus Explanation Times Shortcuts for setting times See The Times Soft Key Page Dynamics Controls for running Dynamics See Dynamics Control Channels Channel functions See Channels Balance Mode See Channels Group Wheel Mode See Presets Compare Mode Device Device control and special functions See Device Control Flip See Device Palettes Focusing Mode See Only Changed are recorded See Device Palettes Update Select Select functions See Device Control Select Misc Miscellaneous functions See Navigating Misc Soft Key Page 44 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Facepanel Output Mode Switch Output Mode is a three position switch in the top right corner of the console facepanel Action Feedback B O A Black Out of all outputs except those controlled by the Independents in Exclusive mode A red B O Indication will appear on the top of all screens ON The mode fo
30. Enter Next Last mode for the next channel within the channel selection SS rad ati ey gt m I S a x De 4 d Ci 4 Enter Next Last mode for the previous channel within the channel selection Leaves Next Last mode and focuses all selected channels Open the Channel Select wizard amp 537 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Channel Levels These are keys and shortcuts for setting levels to the currently selected channels Some of them assume the Command Syntax is set to RPN see Channels Command Syntax DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Set the selected channels to 70 second press sets 100 Set a level to the selected channels Clear and deselect the selected channels amp Set 100 amp GA Set 0 ENSCH Increase the level of selected channels 5 Decrease the level of selected channels 5 Increase the level of channel with 5 Decrease the level of channel with 5 Increase the level of selected channels CJ Decrease the level of selected channels CJ E Set level in internal resolution 0 255 CJ amp LEVEL Fetch values to the selected channels from a preset CON FETCH Increase level in 1 bit steps J amp Decrease level in 1 bit steps CJ amp E Set the last recorded level for the selected channel s Shortcuts Channel Modes Functions for checking balancing amp com
31. FLASH MODE F FORMAT F4 GO Ctrl G GO BACK Ctrl B GOTO G GROUP Alt G HELP F1 HIGHLIGHT Alt H HOME ATTR softkey F5 IN Ctrl IND 7 Ctrl F7 IND 8 Ctrl F8 534 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 IND 9 Ctrl F9 INSERT INSERT JUMP TO B N A LAST L LIVE F2 LOAD F6 MACRO Q MASK K Master Keys 1 10 1 0 MODIFY Enter NEXT N OUT Ctrl O OUTPUT O PAGE lower M PAGE upper Ctrl M PALETTE Alt P PASTE Ctrl V PAUSE Ctrl P PLAYBACK X PRESET P RECORD R RELEASE Ctrl R SELECT Shift SELECT ALL F7 Ctrl N or Ctrl L SEQ S SEQ X amp Down SEQ X amp Up SETUP F11 START N A TAB TAB TEXT Alt T THRU Keypad TIME T TRACK F12 U1 N A U2 N A U3 N A UPDATE U UPDATE PB N A UPDATE PALETTE softkey N A WIZARD W 535 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Appendix Shortcuts By Function This is a summary of all keys and shortcuts organised by the type of function This chapter contains the following sections Shortcuts Select Channels Shortcuts Channel Levels Shortcuts Channel Modes Shortcuts Select Nth Functions Shortcuts Channel Views Shortcuts Dynamics Shortcuts HELP Shortcuts Channels Only Mode Shortcuts General Editing Keys Shortcuts Navigation Keys Shortcuts Master Playbacks Shortcuts Masters amp Channels Sh
32. NOTE The Attribute times for a Device can be viewed edited in the Preset Attribute Time Editor 309 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Times Attribute Editor Times 4 3 Times can be set and edited in the Live Attributes and Preset Attribute Editors e Press ATTRIB to open the Live Attribute Editor e Enter a Preset number hold PRESET and press ATTRIB to open the Preset Attribute Editor 4 Preset Attribute Editor 16 0 Preset 16 0 Selected devices Mac 300 M4 Device GoOnGo Pan FocusSp Cyan Magenta Yellow Color Color Sp Strobe On Go Ca Tracking 27 29 3 Welt Tracking OPEN Tracking 79 Walt Tracking OPEN Hold FORMAT and press the down arrow to open Time and Delay rows Hold FORMAT and press the up arrow to close these rows In this editor press FORMAT to toggle between Selected devices Non zero devices Changed devices All devices Devices with attributes 4 3 The current format is indicated in the upper right corner Selected devices in the example above NOTE Times can be set default as or in seconds See Device Times Percent Or Seconds Attribute Times 4 2 These functions will work in the Live Attribute Editor and the Preset Attribute Editor Action Key Feedback 1 Open the Time row amp The Time row is opened under each cell 2 Select Attribute time Arrow keys The cell s is highlighted cell s 3 Set time The time is set
33. in most window lists INSERT Will delete the focused entry in most window lists DELETE Selects all items down in the column of a COLUMN Scrolls the size of a column COLUMN amp Wheel Sorts by the content of a column COLUMN amp Up Down Arrow Moves a column COLUMN amp Left Right Arrow Select cells to the right of the current cell SELECT amp Left_Arrow Select cells below the current cell s SELECT amp Down Arrow 541 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Navigation Keys The top four Navigation keys are central in the Navigating functions of the console They are mostly used in combination with the General Editing keys DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Focuses the Browser If the Browser is already focused BROWSER it will be closed Scrolls the size of the Browser BROWSER amp Wheel Toggles through all open tabs TAB Focuses Tab sl Trap Scrolls the split in a spreadsheet tab TAB amp Wheel Splits the tab view in horisontal or vertical TAB amp Down Arrow Removes a split tab view TAB amp Up Arrow Moves the focused tab to the next screen TAB amp Right Arrow Moves the focused tab to the next screen TAB amp Left Arrow Shortcuts Master Playbacks These are the main keys and shortcuts for managing content in the Master Playbacks See also Shortcuts Recording
34. 2 for DMX512 RDM ready Ethernet RJ 45 Twisted Pair MIDI In Out Thru 2 connectors APN For external panels or Lynx fader wing Radio remote control Radio control able to penetrate an iron curtain External trigger inputs D sub 15 pins Console lighting Connections for 2 goose neck lamps Phone Remote RJ 11 Phone Connector Audio In amp Out Mini stereo plug 38 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Quick Tour This chapter describes the console facepanel and basic software terminology This chapter contains the following sections Quick Tour Congo Facepanel Quick Tour Key Syntaxes Quick Tour Software Terminology Quick Tour Control Hierarchy 39 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Quick Tour Console Facepanel The facepanel of a Congo Console is divided into different sections In Congo and Congo Jr these sections are more or less identical there are some small differences Congo Console In the Congo console everything is integrated There is an integrated trackball and a Master Playback section The main display has a display list section Congo Jr Console In the Congo Jr console there is an external mouse The Main Display does not have a display list section The Master Playbacks is an optional wing The Master Playback functionality is integrated into the Main Playback These sections are described in this chapter Facep
35. BEAM opened in the Main Display All Palette List Display List amp The All Palette list is PALETTE opened in the Main Display This is an example of the Color Palette list in the main display Display Lists are currently only available in Congo not in Congo Jr HCTB C6 FCTB Cc Lig Cy C8 L Pink Cyan C9 Magent Light Cio Mauve 330 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Palettes Focusing Mode Focusing mode is designed for quickly focusing and updating palettes It works together with the List section of the LCD Display It is activated from the FOCUS MODE soft key in the DEVICE Soft page Action Key Feedback 1 Select the DEVICE soft DEVICE The Device soft functions page Softkey are selected in the Main Display of the console 2 Activate Focus Mode FOCUS MODE Focusing mode is Softkey shown on the Main Display The Focus Palette list is automatically activated 3 Select Palette from the Use the Trackball The corresponding list Disp List function to select a Palette channels are selected and displayed in the Channel Display list The palette is activated and Highlight mode is turned on 4 Focus one by one with NEXT LAST NEXT amp Each focused channel is mapped to the channel controls 5 Update the Palette UPDATE PALETTE The Palette is updated Softkey and you are returned to the Focus Pa
36. DISP MODE N A e Function Step up one level in the menu system of the console Main Display See Main Display Functions e Location Under the Main Display to the right See Facepanel Console Main Display Console Key LEVEL Num Lock Function Set Level See Set Channel levels More Press without and get Step Level 70 See System Settings Channel More Press twice to get 100 Location Programming Section bottom See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key A A e Function Open the A tab and connect A to the Channel Control See Main Playback Edit Keys e Location Main Playback section See Main Playback Introduction Console Key ALIGN Alt A e Function Align device parameters to the first selected device See Device Control Align e Location To the right of the Main Display section See Facepanel Console Main Display Console Key ALL Num Lock Shift e Function Select all channels with a level in the Channel Control See Select Channels e Location Programming Section bottom See Facepanel Programming Section Console Keys Arrow Keys arrow keys e Function Move around in Browser Lists and Popups See Navigating The Arrow Keys e More Arrow keys are used in combination with TAB and FORMAT e Location Navigation Pad right See Facepanel Programming Section 520 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Key ATTRIB I
37. Delete attributes for selected channels 5 Press MODIFY to confirm 341 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Devices Templates A Template maps the functions of a Moving Device to the moving light controls of Congo This chapter is about creating and editing Templates This chapter contains the following sections Device Templates Introduction Device Templates List Device Templates Editor Device Templates Create Device Templates Parameter Device Templates Type LTP or HTP Device Templates Type 8 16 Bit Control Device Templates Snap Or Fade Device Templates Ranges Device Templates Mode Tables Device Templates Fade With Intensity Device Templates Scroller Rolls Device Templates Import Template Wizard 4 2 342 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Templates Introduction 4 2 A template maps the attributes of a moving Device to the controls and functions of Congo Most common devices and scrollers already have templates in the library ready to use General Facts Templates can be edited or created at any time Templates are stored to and imported from Plays Change a Template during a show and all similar parameters will continue functioning Table ranges can be set to control modes in devices such as the X Spot from High End Color mix can follow intensity to dim mixing devices such as the Nesys Quadra Trim the 16bit resolution to finetune control of 16
38. Direct Select keys The channels in each range from the Direct range are indicated in the Select keys displays The levels will remain when you exit Channel Only mode and can be used in the normal mode To exit Channels Only Mode move the switch back to Masters 180 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels Views Channels are displayed graphically in channel views The main channel view is the LIVE tab Channel views are zoomable hold FORMAT and move the LEVEL wheel from 20 to over 500 channels in a full screen view ES Uve 1 Main Playback Preset 1 0 First step All channels AB Toggle Channel viewing format 4 2 The currently selected format is indicated in the top right corner of each Channel View 4 2 You can toggle between these formats by pressing FORMAT All channels Selected channels Selected and non zero channels Selected and captured channels Selected and used in play channels see NOTE Channel Layout if there is one defined Channel Layout You can also activate the following formats by holding FORMAT and pressing a key e Al channels FORMAT amp CH e Al non zero channels FORMAT amp ALL e Captured channels FORMAT amp CAPTURE e Parked channels FORMAT amp PARK NOTE New format 4 1 Selected and used in Play Shows channels that are recorded in presets and Groups 4 2 If you select previously not recorded channels they will be shown in this vi
39. Direct Select mode for Focus Palettes FOCUS as long as the key is held Direct Select mode for Color Palettes COLOR as long as the key is held Direct Select mode for Beam Palettes BEAM as long as the key is held Direct Select mode for All Palettes PALETTE as long as the key is held Shortcuts Device Palette Views Keys and shortcuts for Device Palettes views and lists DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Open the Focus Palette Editor MODIFY amp FOCUS Open the Color Palette Editor MODIFY amp COLOR Open the Beam Palette Editor MODIFY amp BEAM Open the All Palette Editor MODIFY amp PALETTE Activate the Focus Palette Display List DISPLAY LIST amp FOCUS console main display Activate the Color Palette Display List DISPLAY LIST amp COLOR console main display Activate the Beam Palette Display List DISPLAY LIST amp BEAM console main display Activate the All Palette Display List DISPLAY LIST amp PALETTE console main display 547 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Device Palettes In Masters Keys and shortcuts for handling Device Palettes in Master Playbacks DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Load a Focus palette to a master FOCUS amp Master Key Load a Color palette to a master COLOR amp
40. Focus Color Beam All Browser and opened 3 Select a Palette See Navigating A Palette is highlighted Browser 4 Track this Palette Track List for Palette is opened Track list for tracking Color Palette 3 0 from the Browser 3 Tracking for Color Palettes 3 Preset Text 454 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Track Track Editing 4 2 Track editing is a very powerful way to edit in a Sequence They are used to save time when the same type of change is wanted in a series of Presets Track Editing Intensities 4 2 Intensity changes in a Preset for all channels can be tracked forward and or backward When an Intensity Block is set they will stop This can be set in the Sequence List See Sequences Block Values 1 Make level changes in a Preset 2 Hold UPDATE and press LEVEL A track popup will open e e WEE een T Intensity tracking r The changed channels will be updated in ai presets before and or after the current step where they have the same original level Changed channels 1 Track direction Forward only Backward only Forward only B oth Wa H 5 3 Select forward backward or both 4 Confirm NOTE Each channel will be tracked individually until the position where the level changes value Dialog shows the number of channels that will be affected A step in the sequence set to Block Tracking will prevent levels from tracking through To set a block on indi
41. Hold FORMAT and press CAPTURE to select this format directly 4 2 Channel View Format Layout The last selected Channel Layout is shown FORMAT selects Layout If there are no Layouts stored in the show this screen will not appear Layout 1 ESC Oskar 73 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Navigating Lists All editors are lists They behave very similar to a standard spreadsheet You can edit all cells which are not dimmed You can edit multiple cells You can sort information by column You can move columns You can resize a list by holding TAB and using the wheel Channels Attributes Dynamics Mask rubbert rubber2 rubbers attr dynam attr dynam Navigating In Lists Function Key Feedback Step or scroll around Arrows and wheel Use arrow keys or hold an arrow key and use the level wheel to speed scroll in any direction Jump to first cell HOME keyboard Jumps to the first cell in the selected column Jump to last cell END keyboard Jumps to the last cell in the selected column Scroll one page up PAGE UP keyboard Scrolls one page up Scroll one page down PAGE DOWN Scrolls one page down keyboard 74 100 100 e Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Editing In Lists Function Key Feedback Edit the selected cells MODIFY Entering a value and press MODIFY If it is a dropdown just press MODIFY If it is a text ce
42. Lagerbielke 570 Corporate Headquarters 3031 Pleasant View Road P O Box 620979 Middleton Wisconsin 53562 0979 USA m Tel 608 831 4116 Fax 608 836 1736 London UK e Unit 26 28 Victoria Industrial Estate Victoria Road London W3 6UU UK e Tel 44 0 20 8896 1000 e Fax 44 0 20 8896 2000 Rome IT e Via Ennio Quirino Visconti 11 00193 Rome Italy Tel 39 06 32 111 683 Fax 39 06 32 656 990 Holzkirchen DE Ohmstrasse 3 83607 Holzkirchen Germany e Tel 49 80 24 47 00 0 Fax 49 80 24 47 00 3 00 Hong Kong Rm 1801 18 F Tower 1 Phase 1 Enterprise Square 9 Sheung Yuet Road Kowloon Bay Kowloon Hong Kong e Tel 852 2799 1220 e Fax 852 2799 9325 Service Americas service etcconnect com m UK service etceurope com e DE techserv hoki etcconnect com e Asia service etcasia com Web www etcconnect com m Copyright 2007 ETC All Rights Reserved m Product information and specifications subject to change 7310M1200 4 3 0 m Rev A m Released 03 2007
43. Num Lock Function This is where numbers are input This is also where you have the decimal point and the C ALT key clear numerical entry Xtra The C ALT key is also a prefix key for clearing Playbacks and for some console Macros Location Programming Section bottom See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key ON FETCH Num Lock Ctrl Function Sets the last stored level for the selected channel s See Presets Fetch Intensities Xtra Fetch levels from Preset See Presets Fetch Intensities Xtra Fetch attributes from Preset See Device Control Fetch Copy Location Programming Section bottom See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key OUT Ctrl U Function Set an Out Time in the Sequence of the Main Playback See Sequences Times Location Programming Section left See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key OUTPUT 0 Function Enter a number and press to control an Output directly on the level wheel Enter a number and press CH or move the level wheel to exit Location Programming Section next to LOAD See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key PAGE N A Function Load a page to this row of Master Playbacks See Master Pages Location In the middle of each row of master faders See Master Playbacks Introduction Console Key Page N A Function Load the next page to this row of Master Playbacks See Master Pages Location In the middle o
44. Open any editor directly by pressing MODIFY in that column Track List Functions 4 1 Column Action Feedback Step MODIFY Opens the Sequence List focused at this Step Preset MODIFY Opens the Preset List focused at this Preset Text 4 1 No Input Shows the Step Text Mode MODIFY Opens the Sequence List focused at this Preset Devices 4 1 MODIFY Opens the Preset Attribute List for this Preset Channels MODIFY Sets a level for the selected cells 447 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Track List Show Levels amp Attributes 4 1 In all Track Lists with attributes the attributes and levels can be toggled on off with the following functions Function Column Feedback Toggle Levels FORMAT IA The intensity column is LEVEL toggled Toggle Focus attributes FORMAT amp Focus The Focus parameter columns are toggled Toggle Color attributes FORMAT The Color parameter COLOR columns are toggled Toggle Beam attributes FORMAT amp BEAM The Beam parameter columns are toggled Toggle single parameters FORMAT amp Specific parameter Parameter Key columns are toggled Example show Focus Attributes only 3 Track List Main Playback Mode Devices 1 Pan 50 Example show a single parameter Iris for example 3 Track List Main Playback Step Preset Text Normal
45. RANDOM amp SELECT 2nd J Every random 2nd is selected Select every random 3rd _ RANDOM amp SELECT 3rd J Every random 3rd is selected Select every random Nth RANDOM amp SELECT Nth Every random Nth is selected 194 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels Constant Level You can set a channel at a constant level It will not be affected by any other controls including the Grand Master See Park 195 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels Scale Level You can scale the output of each channel individually from 0 200 Scaling is mainly used in these situations e When the light source is too bright due to temporary change of hanging position 100 0 e When you need to brighten part of a rig temporarily to adapt it for camera footage 100 200 Action Key Feedback 1 Enter the ch number 1 9999 2 Open the Channel List MODIFY amp CH The Channel List is opened and focused at the channel with that number 3 Move to the Scale Arrow keys column 4 Set a Scale level MODIFY All levels of this channel will be multiplied by the Scale factor A symbol will be shown next to the level Set 100 to remove the Scale factor 196 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels Used amp Unused You can create a selection of channels based on if they are used or not in the sequence loaded to the
46. Start Dynamics By Number Function Key Feedback Start Dynamic Effect DYN EFFECT Dynamic Effect is activated for the currently selected channel s Start Dynamics From The Effect Library Tab Action Key Feedback 1 Open Effect Library MODIFY amp The Effect Library tab is 4 1 DYN EFFECT opened 2 Select Effect Arrow Keys Up Down The selected Effect is highlighted 3 Start Effect MODIFY The selected Effect is activated for the currently selected channel s 4 Exit Effect Library ESC The Effect Library tab is closed Start Dynamics From The Effect Library Node In The Browser Action Key Feedback 1 Select the Browser The Browser is selected and highlighted If it was already selected it is closed Press again to open 2 Go to the Effect Library Arrow keys Up Down The Effect Library node is node highlighted 3 Open the Effect Library Right arrow The Effect Library node is node opened 4 Select an Effect Down arrow The selected Effect is highlighted 365 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 5 Start the Effect The selected Effect is activated for the currently selected channel s Start Dynamics From The Direct Selects Action Key Feedback 1 Select Dynamics fora TYPE amp Dynamics When TYPE is held you section can select Dynamics for a section The firs
47. amp ATTRIB 558 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Appendix Connectors These are the connectors in the back of the console This chapter contains the following sections Connector DMX512 Connector VGA Monitor Connector Phone remote Connector Remote Radio Connector MIDI Connector APN Connector External 1 9 Connector Ethernet Connector Keyboard Printer amp Mouse Connector Desk Light Connector Congo Jr Backpanel Connector DMX512 Pin 1 Gnd Pin 2 Data Pin 3 Data DMX512 pinout for five pin XLR female not connected 559 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Connector VGA Monitor Pin 1 Red Pin 2 Green Pin 3 Blue Pin 5 Gnd Pin 6 Red Gnd Pin 7 Green Gnd Pin 8 Blue Gnd Pin 10 Sync Gnd Pin 13 Horizontal Pin 14 Vertical VGA Monitor connector pinout HD DB15 female Keier fo ss __ 2 Green vides fio Ground 3 Bue video m Ground 5 Ground 13 Horizontal H V sync D Redground r4 Vvertealsync 8 Biegroun Connector Phone Remote Pin 4 Data Pin 5 Data mT a Connector Remote Radio RFU is a 6 pin XLR with the same pinout as on all ETC consoles Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 560 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Connector MIDI MIDI In Pin 4 Data Pin 5 Data MIDI Out Thru Pin 2 Gnd Pin 4 5V Pin 5 Data MIDI pinout for D
48. database fields 3 If you want choose to store the mappings under a given name for later reuse Text file format Tab delimited Map to columns Channel mandatory Text A mapped Text B mapped Text mapped Text D Not mapped Use column headers in Channel Database Use existing mapping New mapping Save as new mapping Name for new mapping Follow the instructions 1 2 3 and import the texts You can save your mapping and reuse if you want to import a similar file later 152 Field description Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Setting Feedback Text file format Choose if the file you are importing is tab or comma delimited Map to columns Channel numbers and text to each column Use column headers in Channel Database The source file headers will be displayed instead of TEXT A B C D Use existing mapping Use this mapping or select a previously stored mapping Save as new mapping Save this mapping for later use Name for new mapping Name for this mapping when saving Import Text File LightWright 4 1 It is easy to import Channel Database texts from LightWright Here are some good things to know You can download the Lightwright 4 demo from http www mckernon com The demo works fine and you can even save shows it has a limit of 75 units It also contains a demo show Export Format In Lightwright data can be exported to
49. this time can be set or edited in a column to the far right It is possible to enter a time code timestamp for each sequence step When the specific time code position is reached the sequence step will be executed providing Time Code is set to on See System Settings MIDI e Time Code is edited from the keyboard display or external in all Congo consoles In the bigger Congo it can be edited from the numerical console keypad as well e If there is MIDI Time Code coming into the system the running time will be shown on top of the monitor instead of the normal date and time Manual and Time Code trig You can combine sequence steps with Time Code times with normal manual or automatic crossfade The Time Code time is just an additional trigger that can activate a sequence step If there is a problem with the MIDI Time Code input you can always start the crossfade by pressing GO Time Code On Off There is an overall parameter Read MIDI Time Code that switches on or off time code in general See System Settings MIDI Time Code Format Time code must be entered in this format hh mm ss ff Time code is shown in the Playback view like this Step with time code 00 00 01 00 Out 5 In 5 Learn mode Each time GO is pressed the current time code timestamp will be recorded in the current sequence step See System Settings MIDI Trig in B or Auto Mode Normally only Sequence steps that are in the B field will be triggered
50. to load the next stored Preset Record selected channels as Preset to a Master Le RECORD J You will get the recording popup asking you to Master Key e S Playback confirm this Record selected channels RECORD amp You will get the recording as the next free Preset Master Ke popup asking you to to a Master Playback NOTE confirm this If you record a preset with dynamics to a master the size of the dynamics will follow the master fader 104 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Sequences Hold MODIFY and press the Master Key to open the editor for that Sequence No levels are visible until the Master is over 0 Function Keys Feedback Load Sequence to a sl SEQ amp Sequence is loaded to Master Playback Master Ke the Master Playback The number and name are shown in the master display Load all recorded SEQ amp Hold SEQand keep Sequences from Master Keys pressing new Master keys Sequence to the Master to load the next stored Playbacks Sequence Start crossfade to the next Master Key The Master Key now step works exactly like the GO key in the Main Playback Start crossfade to step 4 Master Key The Master Key now works exactly like the GOTO key in the Main Playback NOTE You can load a Sequence directly from the Sequences List as well See
51. used when recording Preset with Attributes C Del See above 100 B Del See above 100 F Time A default time in seconds or of 100 the In time used when recording Preset with Attributes C Time See above 100 B Time See above 100 You can change this separately for each Sequence Step in the Sequences Sequence List CERET 100 of the In time is displayed as 408 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Settings Output Press SETUP and use the right left arrows to select the Output Settings tab e Use the down arrow to select a cell e Use MODIFY or MODIFY to change values Sn o Settings Channels Crossfade Masters System Attributes Outputs MIDI Output 1 Start Output 2 Start Blind Ethernet output WYSIWYG SandNet Capture Link v Output Settings 4 2 There are two output ports that can transmit DMX512 Both can transmit the same data For more than 1024 outputs use Ethernet output Function Explanation Default value Output 1 Start Output connector 1 1 Output 2 Start Output connector 2 513 Blind Ethernet Output Activates preview and blind output to third party visualisation tools such as WYSIWYG SandNet or Capture WYSIWYG SandNet Activates bi directional Capture Link communication with third party visualisation tools See Visualisation Blind Output 409 Settings MIDI 4
52. 2 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Press SETUP and use the right left arrows to select the MIDI Settings tab e Use the down arrow to select a cell e Use MODIFY or MODIFY to change values aS ee eee 2 Settings Channels MIDI Channel Keys Faders Program Change Crossfade Masters System Read MIDI Time Code MTC Learn mode Auto locate step MIDI Show Control Device ID MIDI Settings 4 2 The MIDI Settings are general for the system Attributes Function Explanation Default value MIDI Channel The MIDI channel used by Congo 1 Keys All keys are sent as notes Off Faders All faders are sent as controllers Off Program Change Jumps to sequence step Read MIDI Time Code MTC MIDI Times Code reception is on Learn mode Activate learn mode for setting Time Code to Sequence Steps Auto locate step Sets if Time Code should auto locate steps or not MIDI Show Control Activates reception of MSC Device ID Sets a Device ID for this Congo i 410 Outputs MIDI Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 DISPLAY LISTS 4 1 NOTE Display Lists are only available in the Congo not in the Congo Jr The main display of the console handles a number of data lists in the mid section You can use the trackball to access information in these lists in the Display List mode There are two ways of ope
53. 3 070328 Device Palettes Select Stored Channels You can Select all channels that are stored in a Palette as Each Device NOTE This is not possible for palettes stored as Each Device Type since no specific channels are stored with them Function Key Feedback Channels in Focus Palette Te CH amp Focus All channels stored in Palette are selected in the active Channel View Channels in Color Palette Te CH All channels stored in COLOR Palette are selected in the active Channel View 2 Channels in Beam Palette cH amp BEAM All channels stored in Palette are selected in the active Channel View Channels in All Palette CH amp All channels stored in PALETTE Palette are selected in the active Channel View 329 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Palettes Display List All Palettes can be activated from the Display Lists in the Main Display of the console facepanel When the Trackball is in DISPLAY LIST mode you can use it to select activate palettes by pressing RIGHT LEFT click Function Key Feedback Focus Palette List Display List amp The Focus Palette list is Focus opened in the Main Display Color Palette List Display List amp The Color Palette list is COLOR J opened in the Main Display Beam Palette List Display List amp The Beam Palette list is
54. 4 2 See Home Positioning Clear reset patch or rename 4 3 You can reset 1 1 or clear the dimmer patch the moving device patch or the renaming system for any channel range from x to x If you check Apply To All you don t need to specify a range Unpatch All clears channel device and name patch 4 2 et O Ee Patch Wizard Patch Dimmer Patch Device Set Clear Operation From To Apply to all 139 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 These are the options in the Clear wizard tab Patch Wizard Patch Dimmer Patch Device Operation Unpatch all Unpatch all Set dimmer patch 1 1 To ar dimmer patch From Apply to all See Renaming Channels NOTE 4 3 Checking Apply To All clears everything up to the total system limits regardless of any prior downgrade of channels outputs 140 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Patch Channel List 4 2 You can view and edit dimmer outputs scaling and constant ch level in the Channel List BROWSER gt Patching gt Channel List There is a shortcut to open it hold MODIFY and press CH See Introduction To Patching for more information 3 Channel List Channel Dimmer Address Device Device Address 101 1 101 102 1 102 NOTE When a step is selected the corresponding channel and output are selected in the Live and Output Editor tabs 4 2 Channel List Columns amp Functions C
55. Action Key Feedback Select the Browser The Browser is focused Press again to close or open it Move up down in a list Up and down arrows move in all open lists Open a sublist The right arrow opens a sublist under a closed node Jump to top and close The left arrow jumps to the top of a a sublist sublist and then closes that node if pressed again Open an editor Opens the editor of the object selected in the Browser Resize the Browser amp Moving the wheel while holding Wheel BROWSER will resize the Browser area Collapse the Browser amp All open nodes are collapsed 4 2 68 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Browser Functions LOAD 4 2 Use MODIFY and LOAD to activate selected items from the lists in the Browser Action Key Feedback Open an editor Opens the editor of the object selected in the Browser Load a Group Loads the selected Group to the active Channel View Activate a palette Activates palette for the selected channel s Load a sequence to Loads the selected sequence to the main playback the Main Playback Load a sequence to amp Loads the selected sequence to playback Playback Load a Preset to amp Loads the selected Preset to Playback Playback Activate a Dynamic Activates Effect library for the Effect selected channel s From 4 2 it is possible to expand Sequences to see linked information for each step and to o
56. Add by Device type Add by Channel Database text Add by Channel number Channel layout wo Layout y Apply for IFCB ly These are the different options Add by Device Type Choose a Template corresponding to the Device Type and what it applies for IFCB Intensity Color Focus Beam Other Add by Channel Database Text Enter the Database Text you wish to search for and what it applies for IFCB Intensity Color Focus Beam Other Add by Channel Number Select a channel range from channel to channel and what it applies for IFCB Intensity Color Focus Beam Other Add by Channel Layout Choose a Channel Layout corresponding to the Device Type and what it applies for IFCB Intensity Color Focus Beam Other 504 Add by Shannel Layou Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Partitions Activate 4 3 Partitions are activated from the Partition List 1 Open the Partition List BROWSER gt Setup gt Partition List 2 Press MODIFY in the ACTIVE cell to toggle Yes No The active Partition is indicated in the yellow info banner at the top of all Channel Views Preset 6 0 Active Partitions All IFCB NOTE If no Partition is active all channels are available and shown in the Live View In Live Attributes only channels and attributes that can be controlled are shown NOTE REFRESH with no channels selected will affect all channels in the Playback including channels outside the Parti
57. Basically MIDI is a standard for transmitting notes O 127 on off with velocity how hard they are played and continuous controllers such as faders volume for example There are more parameters but these are the basic ones In Congo all keys correspond to a note and all faders to a controller MIDI is transmitted serially in up to 16 individual MIDI channels in one three lead cable The communication is unidirectional which means there is no feedback or intelligent bi directional contact between MIDI units DMX512 is also unidirectional while a pair of walkie talkies for example are bi directional allowing communication both ways There is support for three sorts of MIDI Standard MIDI Send and receive Notes Controllers and Program Change MIDI Show Control A standard set of commands is supported MIDI Time Code Trig Sequence Steps by time code There is a Learn Mode Once you have connected a MIDI Device to the Congo with the MIDI connectors in the back of the console you have to set up the console to receive and or transmit MIDI and define which MIDI commands it will recognize There is a MIDI Setup where you can configure how the console will function with MIDI See System Settings MIDI 486 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 MIDI Standard MIDI 4 2 All MIDI functions need to be activated in the MIDI Setup See System Settings MIDI MIDI NOTES amp CONTROLLERS All keys and faders can send notes an
58. Channel Layouts Boxes 4 2 Boxes can be filled or frames and have a text label 1 Select box object with the arrow in the lower corner of the object box 2 Click and drag to draw a box 3 Click and drag again to create a new box Select the arrow tool to edit an existing box NOTE If you click on a box in an active layout you will select all channels inside If you double click all other channels will be de selected first Objects will be executed 175 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Layouts Content 4 2 The following types of Play content besides channels can be added to a channel layout To activate a content object in a Layout click on it Color and Size do not apply to these objects All other Layout functions are available De 1 Mac 300 Dy 1 gt circle Focus Palettes Color Palettes Beam Palettes All Palettes Dynamics Groups Devices Masters 176 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Layouts Load Function Key Feedback Load Channel Layout FORMAT Channel Layout is loaded in the currently selected Channel View Hide channel symbols FORMAT All channel symbols are set to the standard I2 Down Arrow symbol of Congo Show channel symbols FORMAT amp Up Arrow All channel symbols from the Channel Layout are shown 177 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 CHANNELS
59. Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Function Action Feedback Download latest software www avabcontrol com Save the file congo exe on a USB memory stick ina folder named Software Put USB in Congo Go to login screen See Exit amp Shutdown You will see the login screen Go to Settings Right Arrow Open Settings MODIFY The Settings popup is opened Go to Software Update Trap Software Update is highlighted If not Congo cannot find the file congo exe Confirm Upgrade MODIFY You will get an installation Software wizard to confirm all steps End upgrade ESC Pressing ESC exits to the login where you can start as usual The Settings popup 35 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 ne wat 7 System settings General System name Congo Preferred language english Preferred help language japanese File Server path Inverse LCD Channel downgrade 3072 Swap 0 and C buttons Time settings International settings S re upgrade Networking Preferred IP address Anslutning till lokalt n tverk 192 168 0 199 ETCNet2 ETCNet2 System priority ETCNet2 EDM amp Start Avab IPX Artet Streaming ACN Logical network Advanced settings Backup setup When you are done you can check New Software Version information This information is opened from the Browser gt Media gt Documentation You should always read the Ve
60. Cy an p 0 0 o Off Magents 0 d 0 0 off Yellow D Off Template Editor Columns amp Functions Press INSERT to insert a new Parameter These are the functions in the columns Function Key Feedback Parameter Opens a dropdown Select parameter DMX Set DMX offset 1 256 Type Set LTP HTP 8 16bits Default The default value that is used when patched and by HOME ATTRIB Highlight The value used in Highlight mode Snap MODIFY Set Snap or Fade Invert Invert the values of a parameter Ranges Opens the Range Editor for subranges such as gobo positions Tables MODIFY Opens the Table Editor for table functions Low DMX Set the low resolution DMX offset for 16 bit parameters Fine Step See 16 Bit Control Fine Step Fade with int The parameter will follow the intensity of this Device 345 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Templates Create 1 Open the Template List from the Browser Browser gt Patching gt Templates Template Text Parameters Comment Time stamp ColorWash M1 ColorMix AT M2 11 Updaterad 16 4 05 Oskar 1200 Colorspot M2 3 ESC Gobos 13 4 05 Oskar 21 2 Go to the end of the list and press INSERT to select a new Template 3 Enter a name in the text column press MODIFY to activate and MODIFY to store 4 Press MODIFY in the first column This will open the Template Editor which will be empty 5 Use INSERT t
61. DISPLAY LIST amp All Color Palettes Click to COLOR activate Beam Palette List DISPLAY LIST amp All Beam Palettes Click BEAM to activate Master Page List DISPLAY LIST amp All Master Pages Click to PAGE activate Master List DISPLAY LIST amp All Master Playbacks MASTER Channel Layout List DISPLAY LIST amp All Channel Lists Click to Direct Select activate 412 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 LOGIN SETTINGS The Login Settings make it possible to configure system features like time nationality network and software update upgrade This chapter contains the following sections Login Settings Introduction Login Settings Editing Login Settings General Functions Login Settings Time Settings Login Settings International Login Settings Software Update Login Settings Software Upgrade Login Settings Networking 413 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Login Settings Introduction The Login Settings are opened from the Login Screen See Login Settings Editing This is where you set the following items System name Preffered language Fileserver path Inverse LCD Channel Downgrade Time Settings International Settings Software update Software upgrade code Logical network ETCNET2 IPX ArtNet Logical Network Advanced Settings 414 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Login Settings Editing 4 2 The Login Settings a
62. Device Palette Recording 0 ceeecscesecessecceseceeesecseesecneeecsaeeecsaecaeeseeneseeesaeeess Shortcuts Device Palette Activating cic eeceescseseceseceeesecseesecseeeecsaeceessecaeesecneseresaeeees 18 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Device Palette Updating 0 ccc eecseeceeeeceseceeesecseesecseeecsaeeeessecaeeseeneeseenaeeees 547 Shortcuts Device Palette Speciale 547 Shortcuts Device Palette Views 547 Shortcuts Device Palettes In Masters 548 Shortcuts Device Align amp Petch ceceescssseceecssssecesecseesecseesecseseecsaeeeesaecaeesecneseeeaeeees 548 Shortcuts Patch amp Oummuts eee ee cece eirese Teeri paea EE eea E TE E OEE EE EOT 549 Shortcuts Main Display General 549 Shortcuts Track E RE 550 Shortcuts Presets 4 1 E 551 Shortcuts Groups 4 1 sscscesccteeees acess Reeder dep ceded ecessbevbdecaustecgesnes lap a ia 552 Shortcuts Live amp Blind OI 552 Shortcuts Record Functions GI 553 Shortcuts Update Functions 1 553 Shortcuts Channel Text Wizard GI 553 Shortcuts Main Playback 11 554 Shortcuts Sequence Editor OI 555 Shortcuts Direct Selects 4 A ic aves n seed See Bags Sees l ie Aarie 555 Shortcuts Notesi AT vat nth aici Aere EES HE Retin Bate 555 Shortcuts Capture amp Release 2 556 Shorteuts Dynamics i500 cisaces ee ee davies BEES 557 SHOP CUS TIMES an EE Eege eer eer 558 Appendix NEE 559 Connector IDM XS I2 ea aa Er Aea E E ERR EEE Aa
63. Display Display List List for a Master Row 1 20 21 40 2 Select a Master Page Trackball The selected item is highlighted with gt arrows lt 3 Load the selected Right or left click The Master Page is Master Page and press PAGE loaded to Masters 1 20 274 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 DEVICES A channel with other attributes parameters than intensity is treated as a moving Device This chapter contains the following sections Devices General Devices Control Devices Views Devices Times Devices Palettes Devices Play Back Devices Recording Devices Templates Devices Media Servers 4 2 275 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Devices General A moving Device has to be Patched before you can start controlling it See Patch Moving Device s Devices Controls Select a channel to get control of a Moving Device The Main Display of the console has wheels and keys for controlling Moving Device parameters Position pan tilt with the trackball or wheels There is a special Device mode for testing Load and change templates at any time There is a soft key page for lamp strike Select odds and evens at any time with the Selection tool Fan and align any kind of parameter Mask any parameter or group of parameters Special functions for scrollers with rolls and calibration Devices Views The Live Attribute View shows all parameters for selected
64. Go regardless of the GoOnGo setting for the sequence step See Dynamics Stop 390 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Store Running To Library Running Dynamics can be stored as a Dynamic Template in the Effect Library and be reused with different channels 1 Open the Dynamic Effect Library by holding MODIFY and pressing DYN EFFECT or from the Browser Browser gt Effect Library 3 Effect Library Parameters DelayRel Int All All Pan Til Foc Foc Ar All Cya Mag Yel Amb Whi All All Col Fan Col Col Aux All Til i All Str All All Int l All Pan All All Mag All All CTO All All MagYell bort Mag Yel All All Int blin Int All All 2 Go to the end of the list arrow keys 3 Press INSERT You will get the question Record running dynamics as a Dynamic Template _ _ _ _ Are you sure Record running dynamics as 4 Dynamic Template If you answer OK the dynamics for the currently selected channels in the selection order will be used as a base for creating the new Dynamic Template If you answer CANCEL you will get an empty Dynamic Template 4 Enter a name in the text column press MODIFY to activate enter text and press MODIFY to confirm 5 Exit by pressing ESC 391 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Tables The basic element of a Dynamic effect is a wave form or table that is assigned to the intensity or any other attribute parameter of a
65. Groups Select Channels 4 1 isisiscssaccstigsccesasecsedavaesecedpantcen es sesdauaasdetaccvansdeetenes 204 Groups Fetch Intensities 4 Jeco ni a eet 205 iSe IS SAG E E E E EE E T E 206 Group List Columns amp Functions 31 206 Groups Display Listin enesinnsnnnoun nnn i n e Ss 207 Groups Load To Playbacks GI 208 PRESE TS ieat gitart u ar ated a erate as tee res ae eis Taie 209 Presets operluecht asint a e ia 210 Pres ts Recorduri aee aei i AEE AA EE AE EE iaoi aa ses 211 Th Recording Popup Ge sce hte baa A She de 211 Record Presets Live Tabs ege Eesen 213 Record Presets Field A Only oint irei tarre a a N a ee rake ies 213 Record All Attributes for selected channels 31 213 Record Directly To A Master 21 214 Record Selected Channels To Any Breser 214 Pr sets E 215 IA AAE E EE 216 Pr set List Columns 4 2 sranna nn a ai E E REENE E E N 216 Preset Eist Pugetpeng nenia a cud a E a ows estou E es 217 Presets Load To Te E E EE 218 Quick load Presets to Masters 218 Pr setS gt Copy onne e e a Gees eaa aaa r Eeer aei i Tais 219 Presets Select Channels 4 1 eina non a a a 220 Presets Fetch Intensities In 221 e TIS ey E 222 Presets Channel Editor Wizard js0 siisced dcatascccca ESA EEN ed Ree lies 223 Channel Editor Wizard Type Of Change 224 Channel Editor Wizard Nalue 224 Channel Editor Wizard Include If Op 224 Pr setS e EE 225 Presetsi KEE 226 Presets Compare WOME Scie yu te ential vats
66. Key flagged as changed purple background The changed device indication is cleared when you fade or step in the Sequence You can clear them manually by holding C ALT and pressing FOCUS COLOR and BEAM See Channel Information Detailed For more information see Presets Record NOTE It is possible to use the C ALT key as well as the SETCHNGED key 339 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Recording Block Cues 4 1 Normally only changed parameters are recorded for moving devices The opposite of this is to record all values this is called a block cue A Block Cue is automatically created when you record moving devices directly to a Master Playback In the sequence it is an option in the advanced Recording Popup See The Recording Popup Record all attributes Ly Check the box Record all attributes to create a block cue 340 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Recording Delete 4 1 Deleting a Device from a Preset is done in the Preset Editor 1 Open the Preset List for the Preset e Enter the number of the Preset hold MODIFY and press PRESET e Open the List from the Browser Browser gt Presets 3 Preset List Preset Text Channels Attributes Dynamics reset all smoke 1 30 Fronts 2 Select the Attributes column 3 Select the channels you wish to delete 4 Press Delete A popup will appear for confirmation RN e gt Are you sure
67. Live or A tab will automatically be added to the Sequence in the Main Playback in numerical order The only reason to set this mode to OFF is when a Preset recorded in Live or A should NOT be added to the sequence in the Main Playback Sequence Modify Sequence Mode This function is accessed by a softkey in the Misc Soft Key Page See Navigating Misc Soft Key Page The default setting for this mode is OFF When turned ON all crossfade in Sequences will disregard Wait and Followon Times Master Links Master Pages Links and other linked information It is a mode created for rehearsals where only the main lighting changes are advanced manually When activated there will be a popup explaining what this means for the user 252 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Fade Curves 4 1 It is possible to create and assign fade curves to each crossfade It is possible to create any kind of curve in the Fade Curve Editor The curves affect intensities not Moving Device attributes Action Key Feedback 1 Open the FadeCurve Browser gt Setup The Fade Curve List is List gt FadeCurve List opened 2 Insert a New Curve A new curve is inserted You can name it in the Text cell 3 Open the Fade Curve Press MODIFY in the Editor Fade Curve cell to open the editor Fade Curve Editor example fast start Curve 5 Fade Curve Editor Percent Output Interpolation 25 60 On Acti
68. Login Create 4 3 User Logins are created in the User List 1 Open the User List BROWSER gt Setup gt User List 4 User List User Name Default Partition Allowed Partitions All Al Press INSERT to create a new User Select the Name cell and press MODIFY to enter a text label Select Default Partition press MODIFY in the Default Partition cell PON Allowed Partitions When a new user is created the Default Partition is set to ALL and all Partitions are set as Allowed You can disallow Partitions for a User by pressing MODIFY in the Allowed Partitions cell opening the User Partition List 498 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 User Login Activate 4 3 User Login is activated from the command Change User in the Browser If no User has been logged in the Default User will be logged in when a Play is opened 1 Select the node Change User and press MODIFY BROWSER gt Setup gt Change User You will get a popup where you can choose from all defined Users tle Change User New user Default Default 2 The User is activated and indicated in the top left corner of all screens Congo Offline Editar Any Partitions associated to this User will be activated See Partitions NOTE The last used login name will be remembered in each station and used for the next startup 499 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 PARTITIONS 4 3 A channel partition is a definition of
69. MODIFY in the text cell of a spreadsheet to activate text input since the keys of an external keyboard otherwise simulate functions keys of the console It is also possible to activate text input directly to specific items using the TEXT key Action Key Feedback Set text to the Preset in A TEXT A popup for setting text to the step in A appears Set text to the Preset inB TExT amp B A popup for setting text to the step in B appears Set text to the content in a TEXT amp A popup for setting text to Master Master Ke the preset in Master appears Set text to a text cell ina MODIFY Text entry is activated for spreadsheet the text cell NOTE 4 3 In keyboard override mode level and mouse wheels are blocked to prevent unintentional changes 394 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Text From The Console Keyboard 4 1 Anytime text input is activated the lower row of master keys and the displays are converted into a qwerty keyboard The master keys correspond to the key in the display NOTE In the Congo Jr the keyboard works in the same way but layered in the main display of the console The ALT key is a MORE key stepping through these four layers Right Display Some of the Console keys are used in addition to the letters of the display keyboard Function Key Feedback Special characte
70. Master attributes will follow the FCB times of the Preset in that Master If another master with overlapping attribute parameters is activated leaves 0 it will take control of the corresponding attributes To re gain control from any Master move it to 0 and up again How attributes behave when moving the Master fader down depends on the setting of Rubberband See Masters And Attributes Rubberband Masters And Attributes Rubberband 4 1 Rubberband mode sets if attributes will follow a Master fader down as well as up It can be disabled completely in the Master Settings See System Settings Master e If set to On moving a fader down will fade back attributes to the previous values e If set to Off moving a fader down does nothing with attributes By holding the C Alt key pressed while you move down you can temporarily reverse either of these settings This way you can select if you want the rubberband behaviour or not when you fade a master down 1 Hold SETUPand press a Master Key to open the Master Settings popup Settings Flash on time Times on masters Rubberband Return on fade down 2 Select 4 1 Rubberband Return on fade down MODIFY 3 Exit with ESC Crossfaders And Attributes When a manual crossfade is made the attribute positions will follow the B fader If the fader is moved slower than the time assigned to the attributes the fader has control If the fader is moved faster than the a
71. Master Key Load a Beam palette to a master BEAM amp Master Key Load an All palette to a master PALETTE amp Master Key If you keep the Palette key pressed and continue pressing Master keys you will continue loading the next recorded Palette of each kind to the following Masters Shortcuts Device Align amp Fetch Functions for aligning amp fetching values for the selected Devices Align uses the first selected Device or the Device focused with NEXT LAST as the argument DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Align parameters for Focus ALIGN amp FOCUS Align parameters for Color ALIGN amp COLOR Align parameters for Beam ALIGN amp BEAM Align a single Parameter LALIGN amp Wheel Key Fetch Focus values from a preset al ONFETCH amp Focus Fetch Color values from a preset al ONFETCH amp COLOR Fetch Beam values from a preset C ONFETCH amp BEAM Fetch Parameter values from a preset ONFETCH amp Wheel Key Fetch all attributes from a preset ONFETCH amp ATTRIB 548 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Patch amp Outputs Keys and shortcuts for patch and output functions Select outputs and open Patch lists DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Select a
72. More Hold BROWSER and use level wheel to resize the Browser e Location Navigation Pad top right See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key BUILD SEQ Softkey N A e Function Deactivates auto creation of a new Sequence step when a Preset is recorded in the Live or A Tab See Sequences Build amp Modify Modes e Location Softkey under the PLAYBACK page of the Main Display See Facepanel Console Main Display 521 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Key C ALT Backspace Function Clears last numerical entry See Channels Clear Functions More Used in combination with other keys to clear Playbacks See Master Playbacks Load Clear Modify e Moremore Console Key CAPTURE C e Function Activate deactivate Capture Mode See Channels Capture Mode e Location Programming Section under RECORD See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key CH ID Num Lock e Function Selecting channels See Select Channels e Location Programming Section middle See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key CH DELAY Softkey N A e Function Sets channel time to the selected channels See Sequence Times Channel Times e Location In the TIMES soft key page of the Main Display See Facepanel Console Main Display Console Key CH TIME Softkey N A e Function Sets channel delay time to the selected channels See Sequence Times Channel Times e Loc
73. PLAYBACK Clear all Mutes c amp MUTE All Muted Playbacks are reset NOTE MUTE will not change any data or fader levels You can mute the Main Playback as well by pressing the PLAYBACK key 469 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Mute amp Solo SOLO 4 2 Hold SOLO and press a Playback key to activate deactivate Function Key Feedback Solo the output from SOLO amp The Solo status is Playback Master key indicated in the Master Display of the console and in the Master View Solo the output from the SOLO amp The Solo status is Main Playback PLAYBACK indicated in the Playback tab Un solo the output from SOLO amp Playback Master key Un solo the output from SOLO amp the Main Playback PLAYBACK Clear all Solos c amp SoLo All Soloed Playbacks are reset NOTE SOLO will not change any data or fader levels You can Solo the Main Playback as well by pressing the PLAYBACK key The keyboard equivalent of SOLO is Alt Y 470 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 PARK 4 2 Park allow you to Park any part of a channel or device at a constant value The Park status is stored with the play Keyboard shortcut Z This chapter contains the following sections Park Introduction 4 2 Park Parking Values 4 2 Park Edit Parked Values 4 2 Park Un parking Values 4 2 Park Parked Items List 4 2 4
74. Playback Keys Console Key GOTO G e Function Crossfade to Preset in the Main Playback See Main Playback Transport Keys e Location In the Main Playback See Main Playback Introduction Console Key GROUP Alt G e Function Select channels in a Group See Groups Select Channels e Additional Functionsadditional Functions Console Key HIGHLIGHT Alt H e Function Set the current selection to Highlight mode See Device Control Highlight Mode e Location In the Main Display Area See Facepanel Console Main Display 525 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Key HOME ATTRIB e Function Sets all selected devices to Home See Device Control Home positioning e Location Programming Section right See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key IN Cl e Function Set an in Time in the Sequence of the Main Playback See Sequences Times e Location Programming Section right See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key INDEPENDENTS 7 8 9 N A e Function Independent key functions See Independents e Location In the Independent area top right corner See Independents Console Key INSERT Ins e Function Insert items in Lists See Editing In Lists e Location In the Navigation Pad See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key INV GROUP Num Lock Shift e Function Select all channels in the Channel control with a level except the c
75. Reset 4 1 There is a reset button in the back of the console It works differently depending on your Congo Hardware model There are two kinds of Congo hardware Without internal UPS These consoles have a soft switch for power e In order to reset the console press reset With internal UPS These consoles have a two position mains switch on off for power In order to reset the console hold the reset button for more than 5 seconds This will shut down the console e In order to re start the console after the above step hit the reset button once This will start up the console again It is IMPORTANT that you use the same reset button to start up the console again 132 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Troubleshooting Help from ETC Technical Services Emergency service is available from all ETC offices outside of normal business hours If you are having difficulties your most convenient resources are the references given in this manual and the Help system To search more widely try the ETC website at http www avabcontrol com If none of these resources is sufficient contact ETC Technical Services directly at one of the offices identified below When calling for help please have the following information handy Console model and serial number located on back panel Software version is located beneath the Congo logo on Screen 1 Dimmer manufacturer and installation type Moving light informat
76. Solo allow you to treat the Playbacks as you would in a sound console being able to temporarily Mute or Solo the content of any Playback This chapter contains the following sections e MUTE amp SOLO Introduction 4 2 MUTE amp SOLO MUTE 4 2 e MUTE amp SOLO SOLO 4 2 467 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Mute amp Solo Introduction 4 2 Mute and Solo allow you to temporarily mute or solo the content of any Playback s e Muting a Playback will temporarily stop all output from this Playback without changing data or fader level e Soloing a Playback will temporarily mute all Playbacks except this one without changing data or fader levels In effect this is the same functionality that is found in a sound console It allows you to quickly isolate the lights from any Playback for editing or for playback purposes 468 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Mute amp Solo MUTE 4 2 Hold MUTE and press a Playback key to activate deactivate Function Key Feedback Mute the output from MUTE amp The Muted status is Playback Master key indicated in the Master Display of the console and in the Master View Mute the output from the MUTE amp The Mute status is Main Playback PLAYBACK indicated in the Playback tab Un mute the output from MUTE amp Playback Master key Un mute the output from MUTE amp the Main Playback
77. Standard Times are described like this Out In Time In Out Delay In with a d for example d2 gt 3 Delay Out with a d for example d2 gt 3 TimeCode Channel Times are summarised as ChT The indicates how many different time groups there are in a step Moving Devices are summarised as Dev The indicates how many moving devices are affected by the step Master Links are indicated as ML The indicates how many Masters are linked to the step Master Pages are indicated as MP The indicates which Master Page is linked to the step NOTE You can click on objects in the Playback View to open the corresponding editor directly For example PRESET or DEV or MASTER LINK 232 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequence Playback Views The Graphical Representation The graphical representation of the next crossfade is very simple Focus Color Beam Channel time It shows the in and outgoing fade times as arrows and FCB times and channel times as progress bars You can toggle this view on off by holding FORMAT and pressing the UP or DOWN arrow Sequence Playback Views Packed Format 4 3 It is possible to show the information in the Playback view in a traditional columnised format instead of the packed default format ss es gereen cm geg Example of sequence Build 1 i 1 0 First Step D Step Preset Delay Out Ch Devi Dyna Mast Mast Mac
78. Submaster content If a submaster contained attributes on the Strand system the attributes are not transferred to Congo only the intensities Palette references In the Strand system attribute information stored in groups can be used as palettes and referred to in presets Strand groups that are referenced from presets are converted to All Palettes and a reference to the palette is stored in the Congo Preset Groups Groups that are not referenced from other presets are stored as Congo groups to avoid mix up with preset numbers In Strand plays groups may contain attributes this is not supported in Congo Parts 4 2 Parts are translated to Channel Times Strand consoles can store channels and values overlapping in Part cues in a questionable way so sometimes it isn t possible to translate this properly to Channel Times Strand consoles can store attribute information in the Parts This is not supported on the Congo side NOTE Since a Congo Palette cannot store intensity values a Strand group that gets converted to an All Palette will loose its intensity information In the Strand system intensities in a preset can also reference a group This is currently not supported in Congo All such values will be set to 99 to indicate that they have to be updated manually Import Wizard ETC Express Expression Emphasis 4 2 Only ASCII light cue format is supported file ending x asc See local manual for export instruction
79. Table sine wave saw wave etc to an intensity or Moving Device parameter to create an Effect fading up and down or moving in a circle This is a basic introduction to Dynamic Effects See the DYNAMICS chapter for more details This chapter contains the following sections Create a Dynamic Intensity Effect Control A Dynamic Effect Record A Dynamic Effect To A Master Stop A Dynamic Effect Create a Dynamic Effect Create a Dynamic Intensity Effect Function Console Feedback 1 Select the LIVE view LIVE The Live tab is selected and highlighted 2 Select channel 1 CC The number 1 will appear in the Numerical Input display 3 Set a level of around Level Wheel The level is set to around 50 with the wheel 50 4 Activate Dynamic Effect 7 3 Dynamic Effect 13 13 smooth DYN EFFECT smooth is started for channel 1 The Channel will start fading up and down A small D over the channel will indicate that a Dynamic Effect is running Control a Dynamic Effect Function Console Feedback 1 Select the DYNAMICS The soft key page for soft key page in the Main Dynamics is loaded to the Display main display of the console Wheel 1 and 2 control size and rate 2 Change rate and size Wheel 1 and Wheel 2 The value of the wheels with the wheel will change from 100 and affect the effect proportionally 63 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4
80. User Login Introduction 4 3 User logins allow you to keep personal settings for Direct Selects Screens and Notes within the same Play as other users See Direct Selects Direct Selects Save Screens and Notes It s also possible to connect Partitions to User Logins which makes it possible to have a User Login with a predefined set of channels that can be accessed by by that user See Partitions 496 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 User Login List 4 3 You can view edit and create new Users in the User List Browser gt Setup gt User List 4 User List User Name Default Partition Allowed Partitions Default All View All User List Columns Function Key Feedback User The ID of each Partition Cannot be changed Name Press MODIFY to activate and end text input This text is shown in the top of the screens Default Partition MODIFY Toggles the Default Partition on off This is the partition that will be activated when this User logs in Allowed Partitions MODIFY Opens the User Partition List where it is possible to toggle the permission for each Partition Yes No Please note that the Default Partition has to be set to YES in the User Partition List as well this is done automatically NOTE The default Users Default and View are defined to allow access to the full system 497 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 User
81. a new step with Preset Preset with number Edit Text in a step MODIFY Opens the text cell for editing The Congo keyboard is activated in Master Playback display four Delete selected Step s Deletes all selected Step s Cannot be undone Edit any value Enter a new value and press MODIFY Move a Step Drag and drop You can drag and drop a Sequence Step with the trackball to move it Set an In time to the Sets an In time of seconds focused step 4 1 directly to the focused step Set an Out time to the OUT Sets an Out time of seconds focused step 4 1 directly to the focused step 235 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequence List Columns 4 3 Part 1 Column Input Function Step No input The number of this Step Cannot be edited Preset No input This is the number of the Preset in this step Cannot be edited DelayOut sl mopiFy Edit the delay out time Out CT MoniFY Edit the Out time Delayln GJ Edit the Delay In time In MODIFY Edit the In time WAF MODIFY Toggle time type between Wait Alert and Followon 4 3 WAF Time MmoniFY Edit the WAF time Mode MODIFY Change fade mode Select between crossfade x movefade m and lockfade I Text MODIFY Press MODIFY to activate and end text input This text is shown in the Playback views 4 3 You can toggle the t
82. be closed press again to open 2 Use the down and right arrow keys to open the SETUP node 3 Select Printer Wizard and press MODIFY This popup will appear Printer Wizard Type of printout Start sequence Presets SR Sequence amp Pre Lines page Master Pages Channel List Patch These are the options Function Explanation Type of printout Select what kind of data Sequence will always print the sequence in the Main Playback Start First item of the selected type of printout Stop Last item of the selected type of printout 4 Press EXECUTE to confirm This popup will appear i mens en Are you sure The printout has been saved to C CONGO PRINTOUT TXT Do you want to copy this file to the USB memory 5 Confirm with MODIFY 509 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Accessories Lynx Fader Wing The Lynx is a Master fader wing with 24 extra faders and a crossfade playback It is connected to the APN port in the back of the console and can be used to get a remote control for Masters 1 24 the A B Crossfade Playback and five keys from left to right Key Function Feedback Key 1 Flash Mode Toggles Flash modes for the Masters Key 2 Start Starts a Master fade Key 3 Not implemented S Key 4 Seq Steps to the previous Sequence step Key 5 Seq Steps to the next Sequence step 510 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 07
83. changed moving device RECORD Playbacks will be recorded See parameters in the A field to A The Recording Popup The Preset a specific preset a is added to the sequence in the Main Playback Record All Attributes for selected channels 4 3 Depending on how attribute recording is set up only changed moving device parameters are recorded You can record all parameters of the selected channels at any time with a shortcut similar to a block cue 4 3 See Device Recording Introduction Setting Key Feedback Record all attributes for RECORD amp You will get a popup the selected channels to ATTRIBUTES where you can choose to the currently loaded merge or replace with the Preset in the A field values stored already in that Preset Record all attributes for GJ amp You will get a popup the selected channels to ATTRIBUTES where you can choose to Preset merge or replace with the values stored already in that Preset This is the Record Attributes popup 213 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 e T en Record Attributes 2 Record to current preset 127 0 ge with existing NOTE Control parameters are not recorded Record Directly To A Master 4 2 You can record the selected channels or all channels with an intensity on stage directly to a Master A preset will be created automatically if none is specified If Attribute recording i
84. channel A Sine wave for example will fade a parameter up down continuously over under the current Base Value By changing the Rate and Size of this Sine Wave you will affect the speed and value range of the result Although the idea of tables is very technical it really requires little technical understanding most designers prefer to experiment with different tables and parameters to understand the effect of a Sine Wave is too different on a color parameter compared to pan or intensity to explain in detail here These are the tables Table Description Stop A Stop Dynamics table Sine A normal sinus wave Step An on off wave Sawtooth A linear fade up fade down wave Ramp A fade up cut down wave Ramplinv A cut up fade down wave MarkOn On longer than off used for fly in or fly outs MarkOff Off longer than on used for fly in or fly outs Spiral A sinus wave with varying amplitude Tangent A sinus wave with a sharp top Random1 Random curve 1 Random2 Random curve 2 Random3 Random curve 3 NOTE If you are used to working with for example WholeHog tm Tables a Sine 90 degrees is a Sine with an offset of 25 here 392 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 COPY CUT amp PASTE Copy cut and paste Sequence Steps Groups Presets and Device Templates Action Key Feedback Copy COPY CUT The currently select
85. channel views DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Scroll in the active channel view CH amp Arrow Keys Scroll in the active channel view CH amp Wheel Toggles Channel View formats FORMAT Selects Channel Layout EB Zooms the Channel View FORMAT amp Wheel Toggle channel symbols in Channel Layout FORMAT amp Arrow Keys Show temporary Captured format FORMAT amp CAPTURE Show temporary Parked format FORMAT amp PARK Select All Channels format FORMAT amp Select non zero channel format FORMAT a CH ID 539 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts HELP 4 1 These are the keys and shortcuts used for the online HELP function DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Open the help index If a menu or editor is open it will E2 open help for that Opens help for that key 2 amp Any Key Scroll the Help window content Down arrow amp Wheel Open the free text Search Function TEXT Navigating in the help pages DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Next page Down Arrow J Page before this page Last visited page Previously visited page Navigating the Hyperlinks DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Next hyperlink LC ALT amp Down Arrow Previous hyperlink LC ALT amp Up Arrow First hyperlink on page LC ALT amp Left Arrow Last hyperlink on page LC ALT amp Right Arrow Follow focused
86. hyperlink Creating a Favourite DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Create a Favourite from a HELP tab NOTE Delete a Favourite from the Browser DELETE Shortcuts Channels Only Mode Channels Only Mode is activated by the three position Fader Mode switch in the top middle of the console It turns the console into a single field manual desk DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Switch Direct Ch mode on off Fader Mode Switch Select a channel range for the manual faders Direct Select keys 540 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts General Editing Keys These keys are central in the general editing functions of the console They are mostly used in combination with the navigation keys DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Closes popups and tabs without executing ESC as an ALT key Clears numerical input and is used in combination with other keys Tea used in combination with a lot of keys to open editors Works as an ENTER key for popups and in spreadsheet cells Is MODIFY Shortcuts Spreadsheet Editing These functions are for editing in Spreadsheets spreadsheet DESCRIPTION SYNTAX The arrow keys are used to navigate ina spreadsheet Arrow Keys or list but also in combination with all the other navigation keys for different functions Will insert a new entry in most spreadsheet lists INSERT Will insert the entry
87. in a layout marked as Auto selectable this layout will be selected If the came channel is included in several layouts the first Auto Selectable one will be selected NOTE When a new Layout is inserted it is possible to pre fill it with the current channel selection or all patched channels There is a limit to 500 objects for this 165 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Layouts Editor 4 2 This is where you create and edit a Channel Layout Browser gt Setup gt Channel Layout gt 5 Channel Layout Editor Channel Layout Editor 1 foreground EEE Background Stretch H Li Symbol Channel Layout Editor General Functions 4 2 The Channel Layout Editor requires a mouse or trackball Select objects in the upper area and action in the toolbar Each function is described in the following chapters e Select ARROW to select or edit objects e Select OBJECT and type to insert objects These are general functions Function Key Feedback Insert item Mouse click Item is inserted at the cursor Selected content type is used Insert next item Mouse click Next item of same type as the previous is inserted Insert channels Selected channels are inserted Delete item The currently selected item s is deleted Copy selected items Copies selected items Paste selected items Paste last copied items Move selected items Arrow keys Moves selected items
88. is Wizard for the play or opened media type 2 Select type of Dropdown Opens the dropdown with information the available data that can be imported for the selected play The first and last available item of the selected kind is displayed in the start and stop boxes 3 Select start item Start at Select first item 4 Select end item Stop at Select last item 5 Decide if prompt on Checkbox When checked you will overwrite get a warning if you are overwriting existing data with the same id 6 Execute the import Performs the import 396 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Wizard Limitations show data A major natural limitation is that you can t import anything regarding a moving device unless you import the template first then the device settings After this the show data such as Palettes Item Description Limitation Presets You have to choose from one of three It won t make sense to methods import Presets with Attributes unless you Import the Templates and Device List settings these are referring to first Presets In Main Sequence Imports all presets in the main Sequence 1 Presets in Other Sequence Imports all presets in the other Sequences Presets in No Sequence Imports all presets that are not assigned to a Sequence Dynamic Effects that are stored in these Presets will be imported as well Groups Yes No Master Pages Yes If the Page contai
89. is channel information defined in the Channel Database it will generate Auto Groups in Jam Mode Such texts can also be imported from external programs like WYSIWYG LightWright Capture or Excel See Patch Channel Database amp Auto Groups Follow these instructions to prepare working with Jam Mode J am Mode Step 1 Activate J am Mode 4 1 Move the three position switch located next to the Master Playbacks to the JAM position If this is the first time Jam Mode is activated data is generated and a popup is shown WE e Jam Mode Groups have been generated from the Auto groups Color palettes have been generated for basic colors Focus palettes with default positions have been created This will not be repeated next time you enter Jam mode You have to update your focus palettes to start working Use UPDATE and the master button to do this This only happens the first time If Jam Mode has been activated earlier in this same Play you will return to the settings of that time Jam Mode is indicated at the top of all screens 459 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 J am Mode Step 2 Check Groups 4 1 Masters 1 20 are used for Groups These Groups are the main handles for improvising If there is specific selection of Devices you need to access fast that isn t created already create it The first time Jam Mode is activated a maximum of ten Groups will be created starting at 101 based first on the
90. mode In Parameter mode the trackball controls pan and tilt of the selected channel s All parameters of a moving device are grouped into four groups of functions Focus Pan and tilt Color all color functions such as CMY color wheels etc Beam everything else Intensity is stored in Presets Control parameters are never stored 279 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Control Lamp Strike amp Reset In Control Soft Key Page there are functions for lamp ON OFF and RESET for moving devices which are defined in the template of that device 1 Go to the top menu for the Main Display in the console facepanel by pressing lt until you have this page Congo Device ech Congo Jr i a i II 2 Press DEVICE to select the Device Soft Key page Congo Live Dynamic Effects Congo Jr Flip Update Focus Set Clear ui U2 U3 Palett Mode Chnged Chnged lt C D ET EE 280 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 3 Press Control to get the Control Soft Key Page Congo Enable Lamp Idle F Wi Congo Jr Lamp Lamp Lamp Lamp Idle On Off Reset ye C Ed Control Soft Key Page Functions NOTE These functions are Device and Template Specific Check the manual and template of each moving Device Control parameters are not stored in Presets Press HOME ATTRIB after a Lamp On Off Reset to avoid sending control commands to th
91. of the main playback Capture Mode Subtract any channel regardless of where it is output from with Capture Mode Capturing a channel is similar to using a programmer which means that the channel has to be released back to the playbacks or it will stay at the captured level See Capture Mode Channel Control Channel Controls can be connected directly to any playback See Live Editing In Playbacks 78 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Live Live Tab The Live Tab press LIVE focuses the Live tab The Channel View in the Live Tab shows all channel levels no matter where they are output from If you add channels they will be output from the Active field of the Main Playback A If you want to subtract channels that are output from any other Playback activate CAPTURE Mode See Capture Mode ES LIVE SL Main Playback Preset 1 0 First step All channels AB NOTE The Live Tab cannot be closed Multiple Live Tabs 4 2 It is possible to open several Live tabs They can be set to operate individually or linked to the same channel pool synchronising to show as many channels as possible at all times Action Key Feedback Open a new Live tab TAB amp A new Live tab is opened Every Live tab that is supposed to be linked to the same channel pool needs to activate this feature 1 Hold SETUP and press TAB with the Tab in mind focused T en Tab Parameter Setup R Include C
92. output Output is selected 2 Patch to channel A popup will ask if you want to replace existing channel 3 Confirm Patch is complete e WEE en Patch confirmation Do you want to patch channel 11 to output 512 Replace existing Patch an output range Action Key Feedback 1 Select output range Output functions Outputs are selected 2 Patch to channel s A popup will ask if you want to patch all to one channel or as a range Use 0 to unpatch selected outputs 3 Confirm Patch is complete e P T ER Patch confirmation Do you want to patch the 6 selected outputs to one or several channels Replace existing Patch to channel 5 Patch to 8 channel arting at 5 161 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Patch Direct Patch In Lists 4 1 See Output List Select amp Patch Outputs 4 1 See Channel List Select amp Patch Channels 4 2 See Output Editor Patching Mode 4 2 162 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 CHANNEL LAYOUTS A Channel Layout is a topographical custom view of your whole lighting rig or part of it It can also contain show data This chapter contains the following sections Channel Layouts Introduction Channel Layouts List Channel Layouts Editor Channel Layouts Create Channel Layouts Channels Channel Layouts Lines Channel Layouts Boxes Channel Layouts Content Channel Layouts Load
93. parallel with the Server while the Backup is only used for programming once converted to Server Server Backup The first system to boot will become the Server unless it has been set up differently See Network Backup Setup NOTE 4 3 If two Servers are active on the same nework for some reason the header bar at the top of all screens will show Warning Dual Servers Online A message is shown in the Message area bottom of screens on the Server system when a Backup or Client is started The system that is started as Backup now displays an information message about this When the contact is lost between two linked Congos a message is shown in the Message area bottom of screens and the Backup Congo is automatically converted to Server ETCNet2 You can connect to ETC nodes with a router Congo consoles Client PCs should be given IP addresses in the 10 101 201 101 range when used with ETCNet2 Please see the ETCNet2 v4 Planning Guide for information on configuring an ETCNet2 network 425 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Network Fetch amp Send Play 4 2 Play data is not replicated automatically for security reasons Always send or fetch the most current play before running a show Plays can be fetched from Server and Backup but only sent from Server 1 Select the Browser by pressing BROWSER if it was selected it will be closed press again to open 2 Use the down and right arrow keys to o
94. selected with normal Command Syntax from the numerical keypad If the same channels exist in several Masters only the Master key LED with all the channels of that Playback Group are selected This is to make it clear which group that is currently active The selected channels are highlighted in the LIVE tab as usual See Channels Views 462 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 J am Mode Set Positions and Colors 4 1 The currently active Group Master LED is lit will move to the target of any Palette by key or fader Masters 21 30 have Focus Palettes and Masters 31 40 have CMY Color Palettes See Jam Mode Step 3 Update Focus Palettes and Jam Mode Step 4 Check Color Palettes This is basic operation Function Key Feedback Rubberband to Palette Move Master fader The currently active Group will fade to the target of the Palette in that Master Playback Snap to Palette Master Key The currently active Group will snap to the target of the Palette Move to Palette ina Master Key The currently active time of seconds Group will move to the target of the Palette in seconds Executing palettes by pressing the Master keys executes on the field time if there is one or on the master page time if a percent time is set to the field See Master Playbacks Times J am Mode Beam Palettes 4 1 Beam Palettes are not created automatical
95. set for the incoming channels Set a Delay Out time DELAY amp A delay time is set for the OUT outgoing channels Set a Wait Alert or Sequence List Enter the time in the Followon time WAFcolumn of the 4 3 Sequence List You can toggle between Wait Alert or Followon in this column 4 3 A Wait or Followon time will automatically execute a crossfade to the Step it is assigned to The difference is that a Wait time starts counting down after the END of the previous crossfade while the Followon time starts 238 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 counting down from the START of the previous crossfade Wait times is the default setting The Alert time will count down as a warning to the operator but not execute the next fade See Sequence Times Alert Times See Times Soft Key Page You can view edit the main times in the Sequence List Sequence Times Channel Times 4 3 P gt Times are set to the step in A Active or B Next depending on the setting for times SETUP amp TIME Function Soft Key Feedback 1 Select the TIME soft TIMES soft key The time soft key page is menu page selected in the main display Set a channel time for the A time is set for the selected channels selected channels You can set a text label to the channel time group Set a channel delay time A time is set for the for the selected channels selected ch
96. size for the Tilt parameter showed as F 99 to F 0 Think of it as a continuous scale from a vertical movement through the full circle to a horizontal movement This is done in the Form column of the Live and Preset Dynamic Effects tab See Dynamics Live Dynamic Effects See Dynamics Preset Dynamic Effects 388 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Fetch From A Preset Dynamics can be copied from any Preset All channels with Dynamics in that Preset will be copied Function Key Feedback Fetch Dynamics from sl ONFETCH amp Dynamics in Preset are Preset DYN EFFECT activated A D will appear next to the involved channels in the Channel View 389 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Playing Back A Preset with Dynamic Effects can be played back in any of these ways e The Preset is faded in on a Sequence Step e A Master with the Preset is faded up size follows the Master fader e A Master with the Preset is Flashed General Facts When activated Dynamic Effects fade to the initial value including the Offset If the attributes are masked the Dynamic will start anyhow Dynamics run until Deleted or Size is set to zero Device Dynamics will stop if new attributes are faded in a Sequence Step IMPORTANT SETTING Always Start Dyn On Go Crossfade Settings gt When activated from a Sequence Step dynamic effects are always started on
97. the Channel Database See Patch Channel Database amp Auto Groups It is possible to copy a channel selection and paste with new numbers See Channel Layouts Editor Channel Layouts Channel Numbers 4 2 It is possible to change the numbering of any channel selection 1 Select channels 2 Enter first number 3 Confirm with MODIFY All channels in the selection will change with the same offset as the previous numbering For example if channel 1 and 5 are selected and 10 MODIFY is pressed they will change into 10 and 15 172 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Layouts Channel Features 4 2 There are various features for a channel in a Layout Color size rotation etc All of these features are described in the chapter Channel Layouts Editor These are examples of most functions in use A box of all symbols 173 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Layouts Lines 4 2 Lines can be drawn in any direction 1 Select line object with the arrow in the lower corner of the object box 2 Click and drag to draw a line 3 Click and drag again to create a new line Select the arrow tool to edit an existing line NOTE If you click on a line in an active layout you will select all channels that are on top of it If you double click all other channels will be de selected first Objects will be executed 174 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328
98. the top right corner of the monitor screens Screen 1 1 ti 6 9 16 33 This will take effect immediately and are NOT related to different play files 564 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Congo The Story Congo is the result of ETC and AVAB efforts combining over 30 years of experience in lighting control Here is some of the story When Fred Foster of ETC acquired the Avab brand his aim was to maintain it and continue development The Avab core team were given the possibility of a lifetime to hand pick people in the industry with the experience they wanted and work together with the resources of ETC to create Congo If there is a better crossover between dedicated moving light console and a true traditional theatre or television console in this price range please let us know Best regards from the Congo Development Team Anders Ekvall Concept amp Software Ulf Sandstr m Concept amp Help System Bullen Lagerbielke Concept amp Field Testing Lars Wernlund Graphical Interface Programming Peppe Tannemyr Graphical Interface Design Magnus Anuell Mechanical Design Michael Lichter Electronics and Firmware Tony Kvoch Electronics Nikolaus Frank Industrial Design Cecilia Frank Graphical Console Design Sarah Clausen Team Support amp Ideas David Lincecum Team Support amp Ideas Ingo Bernert Team Support amp Ideas Outside this core team there are layers of collegues power
99. the www avabcontrol com Execute setup exe to start the installation Follow the instructions on screen 3 Open a show in Wysiwyg and follow the instruction manual to connect an external console Visualisation Capture 4 1 In the computer hosting Capture you need to make sure IPX is active and that the frame type is set to 802 3 Capture will recognize Congo on the network and patch it automatically providing Congo is set up with IPX and LINK on as described in the beginning of this chapter Accessories Visualisation Software Example getting started 1 Start Capture and open the demo play Sketching 2 Open the demo play Sketching in Congo NOTE There is a plug in for Training Projects powered by Capture See Media Training Projects Capture can be downloaded from www capturesweden com 516 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Visualisation Blind output 4 2 When Blind Output is activated everything edited blind will be sent to the visualisation software to provide feedback to the operator when making changes in data not being sent to stage Set Blind output to ON in the System Settings See Settings Output Anytime an editor is opened the currently focused step is sent to the visualisation software without changing the live output from the console The following editors are supported Preset Sequence Master View Focus Color Beam All NOTE When editing in a Preset Group or P
100. to that section of the manual 23 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Disclaimer 4 1 We do everything possible to guarantee the reliability of this system To guarantee this it is not allowed to install anything by yourself into a Congo system This includes printers touch screens etc You are not allowed to change or add anything in Windows except for the screen resolution and the IP address It in doubt contact your ETC representative See Troubleshooting 24 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Power up Procedure 4 1 For best performance power up your system in the following order NOTE 4 1 If you set the Output mode switch to Freeze before you start the application the output will not be updated until you move the switch to on This makes it possible to start without output and prepare the correct light before activating it on stage Action Hardware Feedback 1 Turn on external Power switches hub s or switch es 2 Turn on the console Power switch on The displays will light up with and monitor s console and the Congo logo The screens monitors will load the login screen 3 Start the Congo You can select start option software with mouse or console keys trackball or arrow keys 4 3 4 Choose starting Play or ESC A popup will give the choice of the last play or recovery or a new play The Live channel view will be active 5 Turn
101. top of the Playback views Mode MODIFY Toggles between Normal and Chase mode Rate wopiFy Speeds up the playback by Chase mode Bounce MODIFY Sets playback to alternate continuously between forward and reverse Chase mode Reverse MODIFY Sets Playback in the reverse direction only Chase mode Single Shot MODIFY Sets Playback to one time Chase mode BPM Ce Suppresses fade times and sets step time wait to BPM Chase mode 234 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Sequence List 4 1 You can view edit and delete sequence steps in the Sequence list SEQ or BROWSER gt Sequence gt 5 Sequence List Example of sequence Sequence List 1 Example of sequence Non zero channels Out Delayin in WAF WAF Time Mode Text s00nGo ChTime MA First Step Going v NOTE You can open the Sequence List for the Main Playback by holding MODIFY and pressing PLAYBACK This is not possible however in Tabs that use MODIFY for other functions It is possible to enter the number of a step preset first to open the list with that step focused 4 1 Sequence List Functions 4 1 Function Key Feedback Open the Sequence List SEQ The Sequence List is opened Go to the selected Step GOTO Fades in the Main Playback to the selected step Update the current Step UPDATE Updates level changes in the current step Insert a new Stepanda Inserts
102. users and beta testers that have contributed immensely to this project It would be impossible to remember all but here are some Oskar Krogell Fl Jussi Kaatrasalo Fl Jeremy Roberts UK David Gray IT David Smith US the list grows Congo The Avab Heritage Back in the seventies Avab was a leading Scandinavian lighting console manufacturer that held one of the world s two existing 999 channel consoles the Viking The other one was Strands Galaxy Both were state of the art in their own way Viking could talk speech module and had very exclusive thumbwheels with tactile feedback Most of the functions for conventional lighting existed at this point in either or both of these systems If you want to sum up what has happened since the answer would be Moving Lights Media Servers Networking System prices have gone down 1000 565 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Congo Creating the specification During the years before Congo the development team made an extensive survey to lighting control operators and lighting designers in all paths and backgrounds of the industry Over 200 people were interviewed What is your favourite hardware What are your favourite functions What is vital to you with a lighting control hardware Which is your favourite console Why is it your favourite console Etc There were over 100 questions And the most important feedback for the Congo Team was this We want to be a
103. windows and exits choices INSERT Inserts data in all lists DELETE Deletes data in all lists NUMBERS in the numeric keypad Numeric entries HOME Jumps to the first line of the list or editor END Jumps to the last line of the list or editor PAGE UP Page Up in lists PAGE DOWN Page Down in lists ARROW KEYS Arrow keys Keyboard Console Functions Most functions in the console have direct keys in an external keyboard Hold and press a key to see the shortcut See Console Keys 507 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Accessories Ext Mouse or Trackball You can use an external USB mouse or trackball in the same way as the built in trackball Connect it to the USB port Function Key Feedback Select channels left click Selects and deselects channels Set channel levels mouse wheel Same as the Level wheel of Congo Set channel levels Right click and mouse Same as the Level wheel of Congo Open Browser objects left doubleclick Opens the corresponding editor tab Select a cell in a list for editing left click Like a mouse in any pc environment 508 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Accessories Printer Printing is done from the Printer Wizard to a text txt file This file can be auto loaded to a USB memory stick to be printed from a standard computer of any kind 1 Select the Browser by pressing BROWSER if it was selected it will
104. with the list 1 Activate Display list mode for the trackball DISPLAY LIST The Trackball will turn green yellow 2 Select a Dynamic in the Live Dynamic Effects list using the trackball 3 Press DELETE DYNAM to delete Fade In A Preset In The Main Playback When a Preset with new attribute values is faded in the Main Playback any active Dynamics for those attributes will be stopped Load a new Sequence to the Main Playback When a new Sequence is loaded to the Main Playback all running Dynamics are stopped the next time GO is pressed 373 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Record Dynamic Effects are recorded in Presets for playback Only Dynamics that have changed or are started since you last pressed RECORD will be stored Record Mode should be set to AUTOMATIC for attributes A Keep Dynamic flag can be set to a Preset This will allow the Dynamic to move to new base values without stopping the Dynamic Record Changed Dynamics Function Key Feedback Record Dynamics to RECORD All channels are recorded Preset including all running Dynamics to Preset Record Mode has to be set to Automatic for Attributes See Devices Recording Modes Record Dynamics To Another Preset Function Key Feedback Record Dynamics to ES amp All changed and or Preset DYN EFFECT selected channels are recorded with running Dynamics to Preset
105. zero 461 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 am Mode Working Method 4 1 Activate Jam mode and prepare according to the previous Chapter See Jam Mode Activate amp Prepare The layout and functionality of Jam Mode is based on our experience of how many moving light operators will prepare a console for improvising with moving devices JAM MODE DESCRIPTION Masters 1 20 are used to select activate a Group of Devices and the rest of the console is used to control them Use Masters Keys 1 20 for select Groups of Devices Use Master Faders 1 20 for Intensities Use Masters 21 30 to move to new positions Use Masters 31 40 to change colors Use the left section of Direct Selects to start effects Use the right section of Direct Selects to change single parameters All of these actions are described separately in detail in this chapter J am Mode Selecting Devices 4 1 Devices are selected from Masters See Jam Mode Step 2 Check Groups Function Key Feedback Select a Group of Devices Master Key 1 10 The LED in the Master gt 20 Key is lit The Group stays selected until another Master Key is pressed Add a Group from another amp Master Key Both LED s are lit and Master both Groups are active Subtract a Group from amp Master Key This Group is another Master deactivated Select any Device freely See Select Channels Any Device can be
106. 0 7E 40 126 64 FlashMode 30 48 Focus 7D 1A 125 26 Format 7E 61 126 97 GO 31 49 GoBack 32 50 Goto 33 51 Group 7E 56 126 86 Help 34 52 Highlight 7D 34 125 52 In 7D 46 125 70 Independent 1 7E 63 126 99 Independent 2 7E 64 126 100 Independent 3 7E 65 126 101 Insert 50 80 Inv Group 7D 66 125 102 Last 7D 2A 125 42 Left 4E 78 Live 7E 5E 126 94 Load 7E 74 126 116 Macro 35 53 Mask 7D 28 125 40 Master 7D 2B 125 43 Master Page lower 7D 5D 125 93 Master Page upper 7E 1D 126 29 Master Page upper 7D 5F 125 95 Master Page lower 7D 5C 125 92 Master Page upper 7D 5E 125 94 MasterKey1 0E 14 MasterKey20 21 33 MasterKey21 56 86 MasterKey40 69 105 MasterPage 36 54 Modify 37 55 Mute 7E 47 126 71 Next 7D 29 125 41 Note 7E 45 126 69 Out 7D 45 125 69 Output 38 56 Palette 7D 23 125 35 492 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Park 7E 46 126 70 Paste 7D 5B 125 91 Pause 3B 59 Playback 6D 109 Preset 3F 63 Record 40 64 Refresh 7D 33 125 51 Release 7E 70 126 112 Rem Dim 7E 52 126 82 Right 4F 79 Select 7E 58 126 88 Select All 7D 30 125 48 Seq 44 68 Seq 6B 107 Seq 6C 108 Setup 46 70 Solo 7E 48 126 72 Start 45 69 Tab 7E 5F 126 95 Tap 7E 54 126 84 Text 7D 64 125 100 Thru 47 71 Time 48 72 Track 7D 63 125 99 Type 7E 42 126 66 U1 7D 1D 125 29 U2
107. 0328 Accessories Remote Control This system can connect an optional remote control for controlling channels and levels There are two options phone remote and radio remote This chapter contains the following sections e Remote Control Introduction e Remote Control Phone e Remote Control Radio 511 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Remote Control Introduction 4 3 There are two main kinds of wireless remote controls e ETC cRRFU USB e The Phone remote RJ45 There are two older remotes that are backwards compatible with some functionality Talk to your dealer e ETC RRFU The functions supported in the older ETC RRFU are GO BACK CHAN REC AT FULL THRU and e Transtechnik Radio Remote The functions supported in this remote are the same as in the Avab Pronto All remotes are connected in the back of the console NOTE Remote Control needs to be enabled in the System Settings for remotes to work See System Settings System 512 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Remote Control Phone 4 1 The Phone Remote option allows you to use a standard phone without a phone line 4 1 to remote control channels and levels Wireless Remote Connect the base station of a wireless phone directly to get a low level remote control solution Activate the handset for an internal call depends on the system how this is done and use the numeric ke
108. 3 070328 Record A Dynamic Effect To A Master Function Console Feedback 1 Record to Master RECORD amp The recording popup will Master Key ask you to confirm 2 Confirm recording RECORD The preset is recorded 3 Delete the effect from The softkey Delete the Live view Dynamic will stop the effect from running in the Live view 4 Fade it in on the Master Move the Master The Dynamic Effect will Fader up fade in out with the fader Stop A Dynamic Effect To stop a Dynamic Intensity Effect you need to clear it This is a shortcut Function Console Feedback 1 Select all channels with amp Channel 1 is selected and Dynamic Effects highlighted 2 Clear Dynamics C ALT amp The Dynamics are cleared DYN EFFECT Create a Dynamic Device Effect Function Console Feedback 1 Select the LIVE view The Live tab is selected and highlighted 2 Select a moving device The number will appear channel in the Numerical Input display 3 Set a level of around Level Wheel The level is set to around 50 with the wheel 50 4 Activate Dynamic Effect DYN EFFECT Dynamic Effect 1 gt circle 1 gt circle is started for channel The Channel will start moving in circles A small D over the channel will indicate that a Dynamic Effect is running If it is a moving head and pan and tilt are set to 50 it will move in an eight Se
109. 4 3 070328 Device Control Highlight Mode 4 3 Highlight is a temporary mode It will set all intensity channels to a predefined level Step Level in Congo Settings default 70 and all moving device channels to the values defined in their templates with the highlighted device to white Action Key Feedback Activate Highlight All channels in the current selection are highlighted The LED in the key is lit Highlight is indicated at the top of the screens 4 3 Step forward Channels are focused and Highlighted in the order they were selected Step backwards Channels are focused and Highlighted in the order they were selected Leave Highlight mode Highlight mode is deactivated The LED in the key is off All Devices return to their last CB values NOTE Highlighted Intensity channels are indicated in the channel views with a highlighted background 292 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Control Flip 4 1 If a moving head reaches it s en position for Pan it is possible to press FLIP softkey in the Device Soft Key Page to invert the pan and tilt values so that the end position is passed 1 Go to the top menu for the Main Display in the console facepanel by pressing lt until you have this page Congo Device zech Congo Jr EIT IEE LLL as ee ll ec 293 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 2 Press DEVICE to select the Device Soft Key page
110. 5 Sort By COlUMM 52 555 s stscseuessbssshesesdedysoyssvebs sce seeaessscayscdsdstust ba ssauseedasshacsressveoudssvesgoessyeottesss 75 Ch nge The List EEN 75 Navigating Misc Soft Key Page 3 76 EE 77 Live Introduction siniese Matera einai I a au SEs etna elias 78 Lives Tive Tables TE 79 Multiple Live Tabs ERC 79 geleed ee 80 E 81 Blind TPO CUCHION EE 82 Blind Blind Wal fesse ee eile tanta siete anieee R 83 The Blind Tab Functions 4 11 83 Blind Freeze Mode 4 3 cccesssssssccscecccsessssnsnaccesecscssnsssacaeeeccesensnenseaeeeseceens 84 Plait aya TE 85 Main Playback Introduction EE 86 Main Playback Manual Crossfades 0 cccccessseceescecesececeeneeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeenaaees 87 Main Playback Transport Keys vices asecvsttejeneserstrevetesy duestaagucagacs deehaapassesetadarvens 88 Whe GOTO EE EE 88 Main Playback Edit Keysicsscssiscccsitacsesctiasaivestaasesacaissacacsaneavadsa ENNEN 89 Main Playback Time Sein ee EE 90 Main Playback EE EE 91 Main Playback Refresh Functions 21 92 Master Playback sscisisicsctacccsysencesisceass uina ia a dadedas E R ae 93 Master Playbacks Introducton 94 Master Play backs Content ssri onenen Ee oe dues ee pens se ov RES 95 Master Playbacks Playback Keys 0 cceessccessseceececeeececeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeaeees 96 Master Playback Functions 31 97 Master Playbacks Fader Mode Switch 98 Master Playbacks Master Burer esoe 99 Master Editor Columns
111. 70328 Device Control Mask 4 3 You can mask whole groups of parameters FCB or single parameters in a group with the MASK key When mask is active it is indicated in the LED of the MASK key and at the top of the screens 4 3 The mask is used when recording Presets Palettes and Dynamics e When you record Attributes to a Preset with a MASK enabled the masked values will NOT be recorded They will be indicated like this Mask Functions Function Key Feedback Toggle Mask on off The LED in MASK is lit In the Main Display you can see Mask FCB and a sign after a masked parameter group Mask FOCUS MASK amp Toggles the Mask for the all FOCUS parameters Mask COLOR MASK amp Toggles the Mask for the all COLOR parameters Mask BEAM MASK amp Toggles the Mask for the all BEAM parameters Mask single parameters MASK amp Wheel Key Toggles the Mask for any single parameter Open the Mask editor MODIFY amp MASK Opens the Mask editor see below A indicates that all parameters in a parameter group are masked A indication indicates that some are masked The Mask editor gives a comprehensive list of masked parameters See Mask Editor Mask F GOB ColorWash Mi 284 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Mask Editor In the Mask Editor single parameters can be toggled on off by pressing MODIFY in the Mask column Hold
112. 70328 Record This To Master 1 You can record the output of the selected channels to a Master Playback Function Key Feedback 1 Select the channels ALL All channels with a level in the channel control are selected Should be 1 amp 2 that you set a level to in the previous example 2 Record to Master 1 RECORD amp Hold RECORD and press Master Keyl the grey key over Master 1 You will get a Record popup asking you to confirm 3 Confirm RECORD The preset is stored to Master 1 and the number is indicate in the graphical display over the master fader NOTE The same light is still output from the Channel Control A Clear this by selecting all channels and fading to zero with the wheel Now test fading up Master fader 1 The channels should be fading up on stage and on the channel screen Fade down the Master again so that there is no light on stage Record A Preset In The Main Playback Set some new levels and record as a Preset in the Main Playback Function Key Feedback 1 Select channel 3 and 3 Level Wheel Channel 3 is marked in set a level orange as selected and the level is set by the wheel 2 Select channel 4 and 4 Level Wheel Channel 3 is left at its set a level level channel 4 is selected and marked in orange The level is set by the wheel 3 Record as the next free RECORD You wi
113. 71 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Park Introduction 4 2 Park allows you to Park the output of any part of a channel or device at a constant value e Parked values are indicated with PARK in the Channel view and the Info box of the Browser when the channel is selected 2 PARK e A parked value can still be altered and recorded blind e Park can be held and used with LEVEL CH ATTRIB FOCUS COLOR BEAM U1 U3 Wheel parameter keys e There is a new sofkey UNPARK for unparking parts of a channel or device e n Live Attributes PARK and UNPARK are used for selected cells e There is a PARK tab for viewing and clearing Parked values MODIFY amp PARK e Keyboard equivalent Z NOTE Park replaces the Constant feature of older versions than 4 2 472 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Park Parking values 4 2 The Parked status is indicated in the status part at the top of the screens in blue in the Live channel view for each channel PARK and in the attribute views dimmed Magenta 74 74 74 74 Yellow NOTE PARK works against selected cells when an Attribute View is open There is a Parked items list that is opened with MODIFY amp PARK You can hold PARK and press several different values consequently Function Key Feedback Park all values of the PARK amp Channel is parked selected channel s Par
114. 7D 1E 125 30 U3 7D 1F 125 31 Up 4C 76 Update 7E 4F 126 79 Wizard 7D 32 125 50 493 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Faders MIDI Chart 4 2 Fader MIDI Code Hex MIDI Code Dec Lower_1 41 65 Lower_2 42 66 Lower_3 43 67 Lower_4 44 68 Lower_5 45 69 Lower_6 46 70 Lower_7 47 71 Lower_8 48 72 Lower_9 49 73 Lower_10 4A 74 Lower_11 4B 75 Lower_12 4C 76 Lower_13 4D 77 Lower_14 4E 78 Lower_15 4F 79 Lower_16 50 80 Lower_17 51 81 Lower_18 52 82 Lower_19 53 83 Lower_20 54 84 Upper_1 55 85 Upper_2 56 86 Upper_3 57 87 Upper_4 58 88 Upper_5 59 89 Upper_6 5A 90 Upper_7 5B 91 Upper_8 5C 92 Upper_9 5D 93 Upper_10 5E 94 Upper_11 5F 95 Upper_12 60 96 Upper_13 61 97 Upper_14 62 98 Upper_15 63 99 Upper_16 64 100 Upper_17 65 101 Upper_18 66 102 Upper_19 67 103 Upper_20 68 104 AFader 69 105 BFader 6A 106 GrandMaster 6C 108 494 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 USER LOGIN 4 3 User logins are used to keep track of personal settings like the setup of the Direct Selects and who has written Notes Partitions can be connected to a User Login This chapter contains the following sections User Login Introduction User Login List User Login Create User Login Activate 495 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328
115. Alt and press MODIFY to set the opposite of what is currently selected 226 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Presets Compare Mode The Compare function allows you to compare the current light in the active field with the recorded version of the preset in the active field This key is in the Channels Soft Key Page Congo Congo Jr W em A S on EES CT Action Key Feedback Compare recent changes The last stored version in a channel view with the last stored version will be loaded Press COMPARE to exit Compare mode Compare the content of a channel view with any preset COMPARE The selected preset will be loaded Press COMPARE to exit Compare mode 227 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Presets Delete Presets are deleted from the Preset List Browser gt Presets Action Key Feedback Delete the selected You will get a popup Preset where you can choose to delete the corresponding Sequence Steps this Preset is used in as well WEEN e Are you sure Delete Preset 29 0 Avslag Delete corresponding Sequence stepis 228 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 SEQUENCES A sequence is a list of presets that can be played back manually with fade times and as a chase This chapter contains the following sections Sequences Introduction Sequences In The Main Playback Sequences Playback Views S
116. Beam Palettes Beam Palettes Text Track list for All Palettes 451 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 3 Track List All Palettes Text Track Channels In The Play 4 2 Track the current channel selection in Sequences Presets Groups and Palettes Function Key Feedback Track current selection in amp Track List for Play is Play opened Track list for Play 4 Tracking List Found in 452 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Track Presets 4 1 A Preset can be tracked through the current Play This can is done by selecting the Preset node of the Browser F10 and pressing TRACK Function Key Feedback 1 Open the PRESET See Navigating Preset node is selected node in the Browser Browser and opened 2 Select a Preset See Navigating A preset is highlighted Browser 3 Track this Preset Track List for Preset is opened Track list for tracking Preset 3 0 from the Browser 3 Tracking for Preset 3 0 453 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Track Palettes 4 1 All types of Palettes can be tracked through the current Play This is done by that Palette in the Palette node of the Browser F10 and pressing TRACK Function Key Feedback 1 Open the Palettes See Navigating Palettes node is selected node in the Browser Browser and opened 2 Open a Palette type See Navigating A Palette node is selected
117. Channel 4 2 Any channel can be set to control the Size of a Dynamic Effect At 50 it does not affect the programmed Size at all At 0 the Effect is stopped and at 100 the Size is doubled Size Channel 22 The channel is marked with SIZE in the Channel Views 380 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Rate Sets the rate frequency of the waveforms in a Dynamic Effect It is set from 0 1000 You can also change this parameter with the second parameter wheel in the Dynamics Soft Key Page press DYNAMICS in the Index Page It can also be set in the Preset and Live Dynamic Effects tabs See Live Dynamic Effects and Preset Dynamic Effects Rate Channel 4 2 Any channel can be set to control the Rate of a Dynamic Effect At 50 it does not affect the Rate at all At 0 the Effect is stopped and at 100 the Rate is doubled Rate Channel 300 The channel is marked with RATE in the Channel Views 381 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Relations amp Distance 4 1 Offset Relation Delay Relation and Distance set all channels to perform a Dynamic one after the other or overlapping These parameters can be set in the Live Attribute editor and from the Dynamic Display soft key page 4 1 Offset Relation Specifies when channels start in relation to the table assigned to them Al y All Evenly spread zl Oh OI wh CO da Ja SS K d d d H D Offset is set in the Dyn
118. Channels 4 2 Captured channels are released back to the sum of all playbacks this can be done on time channel s Action Key Feedback Release intensities for The selected channel selected channel s intensities are released regardless if Capture is active or not Release intensities and RELEASE amp The selected channel attributes for selected CHAD intensities are released regardless if Capture is active or not Release all captured channels on a time al RELEASE The selected channels are released on the time regardless if Capture is active or not Release intensities and RELEASE All captured channels are attributes for all RELEASE released regardless if Capture captured channels is active or not Release Focus RELEASE amp Release captured Focus parameters FOCUS parameters Release Color RELEASE amp Release captured Color parameters COLOR parameters Release Beam RELEASE amp Release captured Beam parameters BEAM parameters Release single RELEASE amp Release captured parameters parameters Wheelke Release grouped RELEASE amp Ui1 Release captured parameters parameters u 190 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels Clear Functions 4 3 The C ALT key is used in combination with other keys to quickly clear different playback areas of channel levels and channel selection Thes
119. Create 4 2 1 Start by inserting and naming a new Layout Function Key Feedback Open the Channel Layout Browser gt Setup Opens the Channel List gt Channel Layout Layout list Create a new layout Ia A new layout is inserted A popup will ask if you want to pre fill with patch or channel selection Name Layout MODIFY Move to TEXT cell and press MODIFY Give a name 2 Now open the Channel Layout Editor Function Key Feedback Select the Item cell of the Arrow Keys The cell is highlighted new Layout Open the Channel Layout The Channel Layout Editor Editor is opened To Load this Layout see Channel Layouts Load 171 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Layouts Channels 4 2 Channels can have color symbol rotation and color You can use Align Copy Paste and Wizard to edit and insert channels See Channel Layouts Editor Insert single channels 1 Select channel object with the arrow in the lower corner of the object box 2 Enter a starting number 3 Click to insert the first 4 Continue clicking to insert consecutive objects Select the arrow tool to edit an existing line Insert a channel selection 1 Create a channel selection with channel select functions 2 Press INSERT The selected channels will be inserted at the top left corner of the Channel Layout NOTE Channel Symbols can be changed here and are stored in
120. DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Load Create Sequence Tal SEQ amp PLAYBACK Load Preset to A al PRESET amp A Load Preset to B al PRESET amp B Focus the Main Playback TAB and connect the Channel Control to Live Goto Preset Goto Preset in B JUMP TO B Step to the next Preset in Sequence Step to the previous Preset in Sequence Start the next crossfade GO Start the next crossfade during an ongoing fade GO Insert a Master Link to the current Step INSERT amp Insert a Master Link with Target to the current INSERT amp Step Open the Sequence List at the current step MODIFY PLAYBACK Open the Sequence List at step MODIFY Refresh functions DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Refresh all channels Refresh the intensity of selected channel s RELEASE amp LEVEL Refresh the attributes of all or selected channel s RELEASE amp ATTRIB Refresh a parameter of all or selected channel s RELEASE amp Wheel key Refresh Focus Parameters of selected channel s RELEASE amp FOCUS Refresh Color Parameters of selected channel s RELEASE amp COLOR Refresh Beam Parameters of selected channel s RELEASE amp BEAM 554 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Sequence Editor 4 1 These are shortcut in the Sequence List that will set times directly to the focused step
121. Delay 4 1 Wheels 1 and 2 are used to set Size and Rate for Live Dynamics See Dynamics Size amp Rate e Select channels and set values e Set numerical values with and Wheel Key Wheels 3 and 4 are used to set Offset and Delay relations See Dynamics Relations amp Distance e Hold the key and use the wheel Live Dynamic Effects Display List All live Dynamic Effects are shown in this list e Use the Trackball in Display List mode to select click a running dynamic e Use DELETE DYNAM to delete the currently selected Dynamic from this list Keep Dynamics In Next Preset 4 1 The KEEP DYNAM soft key is used to record a new base position for a running Dynamic Effect See Record Keep Dynamics New Base Value Set Distance In 4 1 The DISTANCE soft key is used to set the Distance parameter for the selected running Dynamics directly See Dynamics Relations amp Distance 368 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Edit Live Dynamics Editor 4 2 All parameters of running Dynamic Effects can be edited in the Live Dynamic Effects tab Press DYN EFFECT to open it 4 1 This tab can be opened from the Browser as well Browser gt Live Dynamic Effects The top right corner shows a pan tilt monitor with a dot representing each channel This is a visualisation for the Offset Relation Delay Relation and Distance values 4 1 3 Live Dynamic Effects Selected channels Size Channel Rate Rate C
122. E O E E e Gaa EEEE iE 559 Contiector VGA MOT O a e e a e a E A EER 560 Connector Phon Remoten naen noite ntr r E AA Ea EEE EEEE Aa TRE AEAEE 560 Contiector REmot e R AdO e e r tie a e A E RA EERS 560 Connector MIDD re aE aa E E E E AE E EEEE ORARE A TEE EEEE 561 Connector APN NEE 561 Connector External Trig Egeter Eed 561 Contiector Ethernet manne sc vessausancs aa ar aE REE aa EEEE a EAE S ETE 562 Connector Keyboard and Mouse ce eeeeeesceescessceseceseceseceaecsaecseecaecsaecsaecseeeseseneeeaeees 562 Contiettor Desk Light enice erine aer apa E E Oa EEEa REER 562 Connector Congo Jr Backpanel irere stepske esso is itses kasst resos iS 562 Appendix Frequently Asked Questions ssseeeseseeseeseesseseresressereressersrerreesesee 563 FAQ Import Show Data From Other Systems A 563 FAQ Channel keypad in notebook 563 Appendix Console amp Sound Seng 564 Console Setup sesini orere sr a reee aE EEES E E E EErEE EE EEES EEEE EE 564 Sound SettiNg Seisei en ee E EK E E E e a 564 Congos The Sto EE 565 Congo The Avab Hentage EENS NEEE EE AEEA 565 Congo Creating the specification cseecsescsesecsseceesecseeecssesersecsaeeecsaecaeesecseesesnaeeneegs 566 Congo Designing The Sereeng iioii e neee e ne NEEE eE S E E EE EEE EEEE 567 Congo Designing The Hardware e eseesseeeesessseseserrerersestetteretessststetreteesesesterretsrseseees 568 Congo The Eurovision i isis ccs sissies cases cescs ves ces cova ENESE ENNE EE
123. Editor Control Min Max Min Mox Text Centered 0 0 0 Idle Off SS 21 21 P T Speed Off 65 25 25 P T Time Off 75 29 29 On Black Move Off 65 33 33 Off Black Move off 5 37 37 On Black Color Off 105 41 41 Off Black Color Off 135 S3 SI Lamp On off 57 57 Pan Tilt reset Off 155 61 61 Color Reset Off 65 65 Zoom Shape Reset 175 69 69 Dimmer Strobe reset 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 There is a Range Wizard to create ranges See Template Range Wizard Template Range Editor Columns Function Value Feedback Min 0 255 This is the start value for a sub range The same value for Min and Max will be treated like a position for a color or gobo for example The Min value can be entered in the Min column as well Max 0 255 This is the end value for a sub range The Max value can be entered in the Max column as well Min 0 100 The Min value can be entered as here instead of bits 0 255 in Min Max 0 100 The Max value can be entered as here instead of bits 0 255 in Max Text This text is displayed in all editors and in with the Parameter Wheels Centered On Off When On selecting a range will set the output to the middle of the given range Parameter values are displayed relative to this centre position with steps This can useful for speed rotation or index parameters for wheels with a stop position in the middle Values between positions s
124. Effect Library Xtra Enter a number and press DYN EFFECT to start a Dynamic Effect See Dynamics Start Xtra Hold to get Direct Mode in Direct Selects See Start Dynamics With Direct Mode Location Programming Section next to SEQ See Facepanel Programming Section Consle Key ESC Esc e Function Close popups and tabs e Location In the Navigation Pad See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key FAN Ctrl F e Function Fan any parameter within the current channel selection See Device Control Fan e Location To the right of the Main Display section See Facepanel Console Main Display Console Key FLASH N A e Function Flash keys for the lower row of Master Playbacks See Master Playbacks Flash Keys e Xtra Can be used in combination with FLASH MODE to set flash levels e Location Over the lower row of master faders See Master Playbacks Introduction Console Key FLASH MODE F e Function Sets flash level to the flash keys for the lower row of Masters See Master Playbacks Flash Keys e Location Over the Master Playback key section See Master Playback Playback Keys Console Key FOCUS Alt F e Additional Functions Hold RECORD and press FOCUS to record a new palette See Record A Focus Palette e Additional Functions Hold FOCUS to activate Direct Select Mode See Device Palettes Direct Mode e Location To the right of the Main Display section See Face
125. Function Open the Live Attribute List See Device Views Live More Open the Preset Attribute Editor See Device Views Presets More Record Attributes See Record All Attributes For Selected Channels Location Programming Section next to DYN EFFECT See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key B B e Function Open the B tab and connect B to the Channel Control See Main Playback Edit Keys e Location Main Playback section See Main Playback Introduction Console Key BANK N A e Function Hold to select Bank for each Direct Select section See Direct Select Content e Location In the middle of the Direct Select Section See Direct Selects Introduction Console Key BEAM Alt B Function Activate Beam for the selected channels See Devices Palettes More Hold RECORD and press BEAM to record a new palette See Record A BeamPalette More Hold BEAM to activate Direct Select Mode See Device Palettes Direct Mode Location To the right of the Main Display section See Facepanel Console Main Display Console Key BLIND F3 Function Activate the Blind Tab See Blind Blind Tab More Hold BLIND and use the level wheel to fade in BLIND More Hold BLIND and press a Master or Playback key to load the content Location Navigation Pad right See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key BROWSER F10 e Function Activate hide the Browser See Navigating Browser e
126. Functions 186 Set Channel Levels Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Once a channel s is selected you can set levels in the following ways Level Command RPN AT MODE Set to 50 5 0 EN LEVEL Set to 55 5 G EN LEVEL Set to 100 LEVEL J LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL Set to 70 LEVEL J LEVEL ONFETCH Set to 0 c amp Ea cJ amp E Add 5 EA Subtract 5 Select ch and add 5 G SR ch and subtract G d Increase level by GJ CJ Diminish level by GJ C This is the Step Level value of the SETUP for the Level key You can change it by holding SETUP and pressing LEVEL NOTE There is a function for setting the last recorded level and for fetching levels from any recorded Preset See Presets Fetch Intensities 187 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels 8 bit 256 Step Levels You can work with 8 bit 256 step levels directly Action Key Feedback Set a 256 bit step level C amp LEVEL Holding the decimal while pressing LEVEL sets the level in 256 bit steps Increase a level by a1 bit C amp 4 As long as the decimal step point is held pressing will add one bit step to the selected channels Decrease a level by a 1 A As long as the decimal bit step point is held pressing will s
127. Functions Basic loading and clearing of content DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Load Preset to a master PRESET Master Key Load Sequence to a master SEQ Master Key Load Group to a master GRouP Master Key Load Focus Palette to a master FOCUS Master Key Load Color Palette to a master sl COLOR Master Key Load Beam Palette to a master sl BEAM Master Key Load All Palette to a master PALETTE amp Master Key Load Dynamic Effect to a master DYNEFFECT amp Master Ke Load a Parameter to a master Wheel Key amp Master Key Clear a master C ALT amp Master Key Clear all Master Levels C ALT amp LIVE LIVE Set text to preset or group in a master TEXT amp Master Key field Set a Time to a Master with a Preset sl TIME amp Master Key 542 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master control functions DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Activate the Master View MASTER Open the Master Editor MODIFY amp Master Key Set an individual flash level in flash mode FLASH MODE amp Master Key Toggle a master on off START amp Master Key Toggle master on off START Fade a master to a specific
128. IFY to get a Template column dropdown with all templates Select a new device template Change Device Address __ Device Settings Enter a new device Device Address address with column address universe You can change universe only by universe Change Device Channel Device Settings Enter a new device Device Channel channel column Delete Device Device Settings Press DELETE in any row All play information that can be read by the replacement device template will be used You can swap back to the first device at anytime later This is useful if you have to replace one type brand of Moving Device with another 148 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Patch Channel Database amp Auto groups You can give each channel up to four text labels ABCD From these texts virtual groups are automatically created and available from the Name List in the Main Display DISP MODE amp CH CH Any moving device that is patched will automatically show up on the Name List as well which allows you to select all Stage Zooms or Scrollers without creating any groups in advance The Channel Database is opened from the Browser Browser gt Patching gt Channel Database 3 Channel Database Channel Fixture Purpose Pipe Filters Gobos Template Symbol Scroller Pipe Front Standard Key light Pipe Front PAR Key light Pipe Front PAR Scroller Pipe Front Fresnel Fresnel Fresnel Fresnel Fresnel Fresnel Fresnel
129. IN 5 pin female 1 rot connected Connector APN Pin 4 Data Pin 5 Data Not in Congo Jr Connector External Trig 1 9 The external trig allows the following functions 1 Go 2 Pause 3 Go Back 4 Toggles Master 40 On Off The Remote Control Setting must be turned on for the remote to work See Settings System 561 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Connector Ethernet Pin 1 TX Pin 2 TX Pin 3 RX Pin 4 NC Pin 5 NC Pin 6 RX Pin 7 NC Pin 8 NC Connector Keyboard and Mouse Keyboard and mouse are connected to the USB ports in the back of the console Connector Desk Light You can connect a standard desk light to the connectors in the top corners of Congo Pinout for Littlites XLR 3 pin female EE ERC Connect the lamp between pins 2 and 3 562 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Appendix Frequently Asked Questions UNDER CONSTRUCTION FAQ Import Show Data From Other Systems Q Can import show data from other systems A Yes You can import from any system that can export as ASCII Light Cues Normally you get cues presets with channels levels and times Sequence and texts Patch There are limitations to ASCII Light Cues e You may not get any attributes or scroller data e Effects are usually not compatible e Time Groups are rarely compatible U S 050601 FAQ Channel keypad in notebook Q How can get the channel
130. Key Page See Dynamics Control Start and stop Dynamics DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Activate an Dynamic Template for the selected channels DYN EFFECT Open the Live Dynamics List 4 1 DYN EFFECT Select the DYNAMICS Soft Key Page in the Main Display softkey DYNAMICS Activate the Dynamic Template or Dynamic Table list I2 DYN EFFECT Select all channels whith a running dynamic softkey 4 1 H D 0 gt L E n EI SELECT ALL Select all channels whith a running dynamic Clear running dynamics for the selected channels softkey 4 1 OH Ss Ka is lt e m au 1 m O 4 CLEAR SELECTED Clear running dynamics for the selected channels LC ALT amp DYNEFFECT Load a Dynamic Template to a master Le DYNEFFECT amp Delete the selected Dynamic from the Live Dynamic Effect Display List softkey Delete all running Dynamics softkey Delete all running Dynamics softkey ALL amp DELETE DYNAM Activate Direct Select for Dynamics hold key for 2secs to get display Open the Dynamic Effect List 4 1 amp Record and edit Dynamic Effects DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Record running Dynamics to the current Preset in RECORD amp A DYN EFFECT Record running Dynamics for the selected RECORD amp channels to Preset DYN EFFECT Fetch dynamics
131. Live Attributes Live Attributes All devices 301 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Views Editing The Live and Preset Attribute Editors are very similar You can enter a value or a Palette reference depending on the Attribute Editor Default Settings The default setting is Palette See Attribute Settings This is how you can enter values for the selected cell s Function Key Feedback Enter a value The Palette is assigned to the selected cell s Open a dropdown All available Palettes FCB for the selected cell s are opened ina dropdown Set an absolute value amp The absolute value is set to the selected cell s Delete the content of The content is deleted for selected cell s these cells Changed values get a purple background in the Live Attributes View ColorWashM Pan i Focus Spee Control en 0 Idle FTrHome F Tr Home Idle eng 50 Idle NOTE If the Attribute Editor Default Setting is set to Absolute you can select Palettes in the same way as setting absolute values in Palette mode enter the number hold C ALT and press MODIFY 302 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Views Presets 4 2 You can view and edit all moving device parameters for a Preset in the Preset Attribute Editor PRESET amp ATTRIB a Preset Attribute Editor 16 0 Preset 16 0 Selected devices Mac 300 M4 Device GoOnGo Pan Focus Sp Cyan Magenta Yell
132. MODIFY and press MASK to open the editor 3 Mask Editor Parameter Mask On On Off Off Off Off Off 285 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Control Select The Select Soft key page has functions for creating a sub selection of the current channel selection by numbers or random Open by pressing SELECT softkey from the top menu in the Main Display of the console facepanel See Main Display Functions Congo Select 2nd C F Wi Congo Jr CTT ed EE 286 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Select Sub selection Functions In all cases below Press SELECT ALL to return to the original selection Function Soft Key Feedback Every 2nd Every second channel from the current channel selection is selected Use NEXT LAST to step Every 3rd Every second channel from the current channel selection is selected Use NEXT LAST to step Every th al Select Nth Every th channel from the current channel selection is selected Use NEXT LAST to step Random 2nd RANDOM amp Two random selections are created from the current selection Use NEXT LAST to step Random 3rd RANDOM TA Three random selections are created from the current selection Use NEXT LAST to step Random Nth RANDOM amp Nth random selections are created from the current selection Use NEXT LAST to step li no number is entered the last used nu
133. Main Playback Action Key Feedback 1 Open the Channel WIZARD amp A popup with the Channel Selection Wizard select wizard is opened 2 Select UNUSED or MODIFY This is a choice in the USED dropdown menu 3 Select the Start and Arrow keys This is default set to the Stop ranges first and last step of the Sequence 4 Execute the selection Based on your choice all unused or used channels of the sequence loaded to the Main Playback are selected 197 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels Group Wheel Mode 4 3 In Group Wheel Mode you can assign a channel group to each wheel under the Main Display All wheels interact inside the A field of the Live tab on a Latest Takes Precedence basis Action Key Feedback Select the CHANNELS Channels Softkey The CHANNELS Soft Key Soft Key Page Page is selected in the Main Display of the Console NOTE 4 3 In a client setup with multiple users each client will have individual settings for group wheel mode Congo Device zech Congo Jr SEITE LIL CT e ee 198 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 The Channels soft key page Congo Congo Jr Com Bal pare ance i C IL a L M Action Key Feedback Load the selected PRESET amp The selected channels channels to a wheel Wheel Key are loaded as a channel group to the wheel Load the selected GROUP a
134. Master Playback Open the editor for a MODIFY amp The editor for the content Master Playback Master Key of Master is opened NOTE If a change is made to a Preset or Group that is loaded to a Master which is active the change will be pending until the Master is brought to zero and back up 4 1 Pending content indicated with inverted colors on the master LCD 100 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Start Fades You can start timed fades in Master Playbacks manually If there is no fade time the Master will cut to 100 or 0 from where it is Function Keys Feedback Start Fade START amp Master will fade to Master Key 0 100 on the Master Fade Time Start a fade to a specific START amp Master will fade to level level Master Keys it will fade up if is it is down and down if it is up If it has Up Wait Down times it will make a complete fade up wait down 101 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Channel Selection Press a Master key to select all channels in the Preset or Group of that Master Function Keys Feedback Select channels in Master Master Key All channels in Master are selected in the Channel Control Select all channels in ALL amp Master Key All channels in Master Master with a level in with a level
135. Mode Parameters 1 464 Jam Mode Dynamic Effects GI 465 Jam Mode Direct Selects Setup 4 1 cee ceesscesseeceesecceeeeeceeeeecseeeecnteeeesaes 466 MUTE SOLO 1A 2 EE 467 Mute amp Solo Introduction 2 468 Mute amp Solo MUTE 4 2 Age Aude ee Ae 469 Mute Solos SOLO 42 E eeneg Eet Seen Bet 470 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 PARK Eege dee e Sedna ie ee 471 Park Introduction 21 472 Park ssParkime Wal Wes kee eegge EE ees 473 Park Edit Parked Values 71 474 Park Un parking Values Eeer ere EE E 475 Park Parked Items List 7 476 DOCK AREAS E one Aes ee COE BOE ee Ae EIN 477 Dock Areas Introduction GL 21 478 Dock Areas Configure 4 2 ccccicssessseesiccissaseeciaavevtaaesedenesadendaasasovsndeanncseoetes 479 Dock Areas Navigate 42 E 480 MACROS 42 E 481 Macros Introduction 21 482 Macros Record amp Playback 4 2 ijscccssstcastsccvsastsvaskeceturcesadeceaaea edd EENEG 483 Macros Tast 4 2 eege ees a tN eege ee cases 484 NET E E sect hile Baek E 485 MIDI Introduction 4 2 sc cccscsssadieescseadscasids a a ei dasassestiesaiate tes 486 MIDI Standard AMET Sea Gis 487 MIDI MIDI Show Control GL 21 488 MIDI Time Code 4 2 Jerrie ee ee 489 MIDI Implementation Chart 21 490 Console Keys MIDI Chart In 491 Console Faders MIDI Chart 21 494 USER LECH Deg E A RAS 495 User Login Introduction 4 3 vscscccscaccisescatsassaveavasecsscceusaceenatdevsdeadeovactesnsceenens 496
136. Mode to create the first Focus 3 Hold UPDATE and press the Master Key 22 for the second Focus palette This will provide an UPDATE POPUP Re record existing Palette Type Existing Palette 102 Palette Name Focus 2 Record attributes for Each De Merge with 4 Press MODIFY again to confirm 5 Repeat this procedure for as many Focus Palettes as you think you may need Then repeat with all devices in the Group on Master 2 if there is more than one type patched 460 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 J am Mode Step 4 Check Color Palettes 4 1 Masters 31 40 are used for Color Palettes The first time Jam Mode is activated ten CMY Color Palettes will be created starting at 101 The first one is Open White O W Color C0101 C0104 C0109 Co104 C01045 C0104 C0104 C0109 C0109 Co110 OZW Red Green Blue Cyan Magent Yellow Warm Cold CONGO a These Color Palettes are auto generated for Moving Devices with CMY mix If there are no CMY devices you may wish to record some Color Palettes for your Devices It is also possible to acces fixed colors from the Direct Selects Check the Color Palettes 1 Select all Devices in Master 1 by pressing the master key for that Playback The LED in the Master key will light up All Devices of the first type are select 2 Check how they correspond to Color Palette 1 by pressing Master Key 31 They will all be set to the first color Update the Color Palettes
137. N 569 Congo The arrival of Jr tvs scsi isthe ae ots adhd AE Bebb ee 570 19 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 This Manual Using the Help system 4 1 Action Key Feedback Start Help CG The help system is started in a tab Find topic for a key CJ amp Hold the key and press any key in the console facepanel to jump to the chapter explaining that key Find topic for the last CG Press after opening an opened tab editor or list to get help Jump to page 1 CJ Press to jump to page 1 e Use the up and down arrow keys to browse the table of contents The right arrow expands a topic and the left arrow jumps to the parent and closes See Navigating Browser Help System Navigating 4 1 Navigating in the help can be done as a paper manual next or last page and as a web browser previous page Action Key Feedback Scroll within page Down Arrow amp Wheel Scrolls up down within this page Next page Down Arrow Steps to the next page Page before this page Up Arrow Steps to the previous page Last visited page Left Arrow Steps to the last visited page 20 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Help Search Function 4 1 Pressing TEXT in the Help tab opens a search dialog where you can search for information in the Online Help _ ___ _ en Search in Help A Text Scroller The result page is shown like t
138. Name 476 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 DOCK AREAS 4 2 Dock views allow you to set up control and view areas around the perimeter of the screens This chapter contains the following sections e Dock Areas Introduction 4 2 e Dock Areas Configure 4 2 e Dock Areas Navigate 4 2 477 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dock Areas Introduction 4 2 Dock areas are control and viewing panels that can be set up in the borders of each screen There are four types of dock areas Browser Moving Lights Independents Masters am Congo Offline Editor t 3 Screen i Play Archive Small Theatre CLEN osec to 15 5 08 45 to 15 6 00 44 4 1 0 2 0 3 0 40 5 0 6 0 First Change Start Stop D Blue m Focus yaamic 2 live 1 Main Playback Independent SEER eE Preset Moving Light Control Channel Contre Merrege x Mester ffe gt Playback Arthet 478 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dock Areas Configure 4 2 Dock areas are configured by holding SETUP and pressing BROWSER We Dock Area Setup Left area Browser Right area Independents Top area Bottom area Moving Lights Ok NOTE It is possible to configure any type of area several times 479 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dock Areas Navigate 4 2 Dock Areas can be opened with keys or by mouse doubleclick
139. ORD together with keys to record directly to a playback More Press RECORD together with keys to record specific data GROUP DYNAMIC ATTRIBUTE Location Top of Programming Section next to UPDATE See Facepanel Programming Section REFRESH Ctrl Y Function Updates changes to stored values in the Main Playback See Main Playback Edit Keys Location In the Main Playback See Main Playback Introduction RELEASE Ctrl R Function Release selected channel s from Capture Mode See Channels Capture Mode More Press twice to release all captured channels Location Programming Section next to CAPTURE See Facepanel Programming Section SELECT Shift Function Used with arrow keys to select cells in lists See Navigating Lists Location Navigation Pad top right See Facepanel Programming Section SELECT ALL F7 Ctrl N or Ctrl L Function Select all channels within the current selection See Device Control Next amp Last Mode Location The right side of the Main Display area See Facepanel Console Main Display SETUP F11 Function Open the System Settings See System Settings More Press SETUP together with keys to open Local Settings Location top right corner under the Grand Master See Quick Tour Console Facepanel SET CHANGED softkey N A Function Sets all selected devices flagged as Changed See Devices Recording Location Softkey under the DEVICE page of the Ma
140. On Time is activated the Master Playbacks will flash on the time assigned to each playback See Master Playbacks Times Function Keys Feedback 1 Open the Master Setup SETUP amp The Master Settings are Master Key opened 2 Select Flash On Time Arrow keys Flash On Time box is highlighted 3 Activate Flash On Time box is checked 4 Exit Settings Settings are closed 109 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Solo Fade Mode A Master Playback in Solo Mode will fade all other masters proportionally to zero as it is faded to full Function Keys Feedback 1 Open the Master Editor MoODIFY amp The Master Editor is Master Key opened focused at Master 2 Select Solo Fade Arrow keys Solo Fade is highlighted 3 Set to ON MODIFY MODIFY toggles on off for each Master 4 Exit ESC Master Editor is closed NOTE If several masters have Solo Fade mode On the last Solo master that leaves its 0 position will have priority over the other Solo masters To take control with another Solo master move it down to 0 and up again 110 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Dynamics A Dynamics is executed for the currently selected channels when you press the Master Key Function Keys Feedback Load Dynamic Effect to Tel DYNEFFECT amp Dynamic Effect is a Master Playba
141. Projects Open Project 4 3 Opening a Training Project Go to the Browser BROWSER Navigate with the arrow keys to the File gt Open gt Play Archive node Open the file A demo play this will close the online help open again and continue Navigate with arrow keys to the MEDIA node Open the sub node Training Projects Open the file A demo play c2p You will get a visualisation tab like this NOORWN gt 3 capture a demo play c2p Training plugin powered by apture The play loaded will correspond to this training project 437 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Training Projects The Camera 4 1 There is a camera viewing angle that allows you to zoom pan and rotate the stage There are some default functions connected to the FORMAT key of Congo and some functions are accessible by patching the camera as a Device to a channel Default functions Camera does not have to be patched as a DMX device Function Key Feedback Zoom FORMAT amp Wheel The view is zoomed in out from the camera Pan stage right Right Arrow amp Wheel Stage is panned to the right around the camera Pan stage left Left Arrow amp Wheel Stage is panned to the left around the camera Tilt stage up Up Arrow amp Wheel Stage is tilted up around the camera Tilt stage down Down Arrow amp Wheel Stage is tilted down around the camera DMX functions Camera is patched as a device to cha
142. REFERENCE MANUAL wiscisacicigecesssaceadaccasdaatasgntaa nas nn n n e anis 135 PATCH iire a E E T E aSa 136 Patch Introduction 452 gies deisde A A aA A E ai 137 Patch Pateh Wizard ennenen EE 138 Patch Ter S KATE E EE A E E 138 Patch Nemme ege geseet see eege E E A EEES 138 Clear r set patch op rename 4 3 ecrit eari TE a a EEEE Ea aE RETEA AE ERSE 139 Patch Channel List 141 Channel List Columns amp Functpons 141 Channel List Select amp Patch Channels 21 142 e E O tp t List 4 ee Oe RE 143 Output List Columns amp Functions 21 143 Output List Select amp Patch Outputs LI 144 Patch Device Settings E 145 Device Settings Columns amp Functions eseseesseesesesssesrsreerererstsrereersrsesesrerereesrereeeeses 145 Device Settings Patching 71 146 Patch Rename Channel ssii s iscciecsdvesdtededeccvasaveecssavcvadeisseeadeasecesavaluesnccessnccseases 147 Change a channel namestie dees due eege cs aden enes eE ee Besenseaeesse pe EENE epee dd ed cess 147 Patch Edit Change A Moving Device EE 148 Patch Channel Database amp Auto groups ccceesceceesceceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeceteeeenaes 149 Set Channel Texts For The Database ccccccccssecessececeessececseaaececeseceeeeseeecseeceseeeeenees 149 Display Tist Auto Groups eech eier e 151 Channel Database Import Text File Wizard OI 152 Import Text File LightWright OI 153 Import Text Fl Excel 4 rroia Dees deed eege GEES Dee 154 Pa
143. Record Mode has to be set to Automatic for Attributes See Devices Recording Modes Record Dynamics To A Master Function Key Feedback Record Dynamics to RECORD amp Selected channels are Master Master Ke recorded including running Dynamics to Master as the next free Preset Record Mode has to be set to Automatic for Attributes See Devices Recording Modes 374 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Record Keep Dynamics New Base Value Keep Dynamics will set a Keep Dynamics flag to an existing Preset When this Preset is played back in a Sequence it will change the Base Values for a running Dynamic Effect without stopping it There are two ways of setting this From a checkbox in the Recording Popup or from the Dynamics Soft Key page described below See The Recording Popup 1 Select the Dynamics Soft Key Page in the Main Display of the console facepanel by pressing DYNAMICS in the top menu Congo Live Dynamic Effects Delete Dynam Congo Jr Delete Delete Keep Dist All Dynam Dynam ance fee mt IL nt 2 Press KEEP DYNAM The Currently running dynamics are stored with a Keep Dynamics flag in the Preset active in the A field of the Main Playback Keep dynamics is shown with a waved line under the value in the Preset Attribute Editor You can store to a different Preset by entering a number before Keep Dynam The Preset has to be recorded first NOTE Y
144. S Check The Output After loading a new Play the patch is set 1 1 and the output protocol will be set to DMX512 on both output connectors in the back of the console If you enter a number and move the level wheel a dimmer should respond providing there is one connected If nothing happens see Lights Are Not Responding 54 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Quick Start Conventional Lights This is an introduction to working with conventional lights You may want to complete the chapter Reset The System to reset the system first This chapter contains the following sections Set Some Levels With The Wheel Record This To Master 1 Record A Preset In The Main Playback Crossfade With Default Times Set Some Levels With The Wheel Press LIVE before you start the examples to open the Live channel view and connect the channel controls to the A field The wheel is in the Navigation Pad section of the console Function Key Feedback 1 Select channel 1 and Channel 1 is marked in set a level orange as selected and the level is set by the wheel 2 Select channel 2 and Channel 1 is left at its set a level level channel 2 is selected and marked in orange The level is set by the wheel 3 Select both and set All channels with a level them to full connected to the channel control are selected 1 amp 2 The level is set by the wheel 55 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 0
145. S 0 Focus Focus parameters are set to home Home COLOR 0 COLOR Color parameters are set to home Home BEAM 0 BEAM Beam parameters are set to home Home all attributes C ALT amp All parameters are set to ATTRIBUTES home 282 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Control U1 U2 U3 4 1 The parameter group keys U1 U3 can be set up with any mix of moving device parameters Each of them have three sub pages This makes a total of nine user definable parameter pages This editor is opened by holding MODIFY and pressing U1 U3 4 1 or a Wheel key when a bank U1 U3 is selected 3 Wheel Parameter List U3 Page Wheel Parameter Focus Tir Y Focus Tin A Cyan Magenta Yellow Amber White Red Green Blue CMY Mod V NOTE Each User Band U1 U3 has three parameter pages 1 3 They are shown in the same editor U1 U3 Setting Up Parameters 4 1 Column Function Feedback Page 4 1 No function This is the number of the Page 1 3 under this User Bank U1 U3 Wheel No function This is the number of the Wheel and cannot be changed Parameter Opens a dropdown with all parameters Select one and press MODIFY to confirm The letter FCB after a parameter indicates it s parameter group NOTE Parameters in U1 U3 are still stored in the original palette types Focus Color Beam 283 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 0
146. See Patch Wizard See Scroller Item Wizard See Text Wizard See Track To Wizard See Template Range Wizard Location Top right corner under the Independent section Console Key Left mouse left Function Left key in Trackball mode See Facepanel Trackball More Activets selected item in Display List Mode Location See Facepanel Trackball Console Key Right mouse right Function Right key in Trackball mode See Facepanel Trackball More Activates selected item in Display List Mode More Hold and move mouse to set levels to selected channels Location See Facepanel Trackball 533 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Keys Keyboard Equivalents These are the keyboard equivalents of the console keys If you are using an offline editor they allow you to access most of the functionality directly as if you had a console Console Key Keyboard Key Keypad Ctrl Ctrl Left Arrow Keypad Ctrl Right Arrow A A ALIGN Ctrl A ALL Keypad Ctrl AT LEVEL Keypad ATTRIBUTE l B B BEAM B Alt B BLIND F3 BROWSER F10 C ALT Backspace CAPTURE C CH Keypad COLOR C Alt C COLUMN F9 COPY Ctrl C CUT Ctrl X DELAY Ctrl D DELETE DELETE DEVICE D DISPLAY LIST J DYNAMICS E ESC ESC FAN Ctrl F FOCUS F Alt F FETCH UNDO Keypad Ctrl
147. See Sequences List 244 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Insert Step There are two ways of inserting a sequence step between two existing ones e Record a preset with a decimal number that fits between e Insert any preset in the Sequence List See Sequence List Insert A Sequence Step In A Playback When you are working directly in a Playback and record a new preset it is inserted numerically into the sequence of that Playback Function Shortcut Feedback Insert a Step between 1 CLJ GB A popup will ask youto step 1 and 2 RECORD confirm recording preset 1 5 Confirm recording RECORD The preset is recorded between 1 and 2 Insert A Sequence Step In The List Function Shortcut Feedback 1 Open the Sequence list SEQ The List for sequence is opened 2 Move to the step you Arrow Keys wish to insert a new step The selected step is highlighted in yellow sequence steps if it has been used earlier after 3 Insert Preset Ia The preset is inserted after the selected step NOTE The Preset does not bring sequence texts fade times or links from other 245 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Delete Step Function Shortcut Feedback 1 Open the Sequence list The List for sequence is opened 2 Select the step you Arrow Keys The selected step is wis
148. Settings Main Playback Default Settings Main Playback Refresh Functions 85 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Main Playback Introduction The Main Playback can play back a Sequence a chase or random presets It has the following controls Manual crossfaders Transport keys for timed fades with default or preprogrammed times Split speed controls for in and outgoing channels REFRESH to refresh values to those of the Playback PLAYBACK for assigning sequences and selecting the Main Playback Tab Congo Congo Jr Fade to Relocate Refresh the current Preset sequence step in the Main live blind Playback RE PLNY FRESH D Load sequence set S a oine Step without tines Split rate controls for infoutgoing channels PAUSE D In Jr this playback is used also as the BACK Master Playback The main difference is that there is no split rate control for in outgoing fades Instead TAP is held together with the wheel to control rates G0 Main Playback Manual Crossfaders Playback controls 86 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Main Playback Manual Crossfades Move the crossfaders from the down position to the up position to perform a manual crossfade When both reach the top position the crossfade is terminated and the next sequence step is advanced General Facts Take over a timed fades manually Press GO during a
149. TimeStamp The number of this Note Press MODIFY to open the editor for this object User The user that created this Note Press MODIFY to open the editor for this object Linked to The object of this Note Press MODIFY to open the editor for this object Note The Note text MODIFY opens the text for editing Color The color popup only for the playback tab Press MODIFY to open and select Press MODIFY to close 443 Green Blue Yellow Cyan Magen Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 The color flag is shown for Notes in the Playback View 1 Main Playback Prt Hamlet finds gold Note Editor Delete 4 1 Notes are deleted in the Note Editor 1 Open the editor See Notes Editor 2 Select the Note with arrow keys 3 Press DELETE The Note is deleted 444 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 TRACK 4 2 It is possible to track intensities channels devices and attributes in Groups Presets Palettes and Sequences This chapter contains the following sections Track Introduction 4 1 Track Channels 4 1 Track Lists 4 1 Track Presets 4 1 Track Palettes 4 1 Track Track Editing 4 2 445 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Track Introduction 4 2 It is possible to Track a channel moving device selection with attributes through Play data Presets Groups Palettes Sequences It is also possible from the Browser to track Pres
150. User Login LAist A 3 Jire trr a Geen Sege aas araile 497 User EE TEE 497 User Login E EE 498 User login ACH Lg eieiei e Ee 499 PARTITIONS EE 500 Partitions Introduction 4 3 suck sarneactvterians geegent 501 Partitions Ed CHE 502 Partitions List Columns 321 502 17 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Partitions Create 43 ib2cstesctotie kiya ei eae BA a Partitions Add Partition Wizard 3 Partitions ACt Vat E BEE PNCCESSOLIES sicsise Cee EE EEN Accessories Ext Key DOard sicss cecasecsgraseavarcceseeatendeesbenassauecadsnghadagaebnondaceste Keyboard Level Wheel siiccsccccnciscdadesetenvtateni des E RT R AE EE E Keyboard CH Stepa das aoe aides A EA E ie Sea Seal Keyboard Standard Puncttons Keyboard Console Funcpons e a E a EE E EE R e R ERR Accessories Ext Mouse or Trackball A Accessories e ET Accessories Lynx Fader Wing soocpseisseasdacvocs sodas ceava cy sdeasayecascdaiccezacoscasnsnaes Accessories Remote OTE EE Remote Control Introduction 31 Remote Control Phone Gi Phone Remote FUNCTIONS 0cccccccceesssescccccecsessecsseccceceesssssssccsceeseesssesesceessesesssesseeseenes Remote Control ETC cRRFU Ka eeugree ENEE Accessories Dimmer Feedback Log OI Accessories Visualisation Software GI Visualisation WYSIWYG GI Visualisation Capture GI Visualisation Blind output 21 APPENDIX ee dee ee Eden Appendix C Onsole EE Console Keys Alpha
151. XECUTE Set Text Wizard Selected channels Step 1 Select the channels levels to operate on in the Channel View Step 2 Select options and Execute Text Aa Text B Text C Text D NOTE You will not get a warning if you are overwriting existing texts Display List Auto Groups This is the Display List for Auto Groups not available in Congo jr yet Device CF HES StudioBeam gt Led Front of ho Mac 250 MH Specials Select Mac 500 MH Fixed rig StageScan G 31 Focus Spe Tracking 1 151 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 There are different ways of opening the Display list Key Feedback amp You will get a list of all auto groups Hold DISPLAY LIST When DISPLAY LIST is held you get all lists in the and press AUTO Direct Selects GROUPS in the Direct Selects Channel Database Import Text File Wizard 4 1 The Channel Database can import any comma or tab delimited file and assign four text fields to the text fields ABCD of the database This makes it possible to import data from programs like Lightwright Excel Word Wysiwyg and such The file has to have the ending txt and is opened from the Browser Browser gt File gt Import from _ _ _ xrvmpRRoooo Import Text Wizard 1 Select the delimiter used by the file you are importing 2 Select which columns that should be mapped to the internal Channel
152. a diesen neues ai 227 Presets Deleter nananana a E ametenaeeecanninanas 228 IOLO IN E DS TA E EE EE E EEE E es sucesancunesers 229 SEQUENCES ENEE Oses nee a n 230 Sequences In The Main Playback sensseeesseeesseeesseesseesseesserssseeessresseesseessee 231 8 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Playback views 31 232 Sequence Playback Views The Graphical Representaton 233 Sequence Playback Views Packed Format GL 31 233 SE QUEMCES EE 234 Sequences List Insert Delete Load AA 234 Sequences East Columnis 2 casa sEsegese Ee Date TEE EE EE EE Ee 234 Sequences Sequence List 4 1 DEE 235 S quence List Funct Ons 4 1 cencecee ceaceeds EE EES Eege Ee de E Ee ES 235 S quence List Columns 4 3 EE 236 Sequences Crossfade Movefade amp Lockfade AA 237 SEQUENCES EE ee 238 Sequence Times Set To A or B n 238 Sequence Times Main Times in out delay wait csccessseescseeeeceseeeeeseceeesecneseeenaeeees 238 Sequence Times Channel Times 31 239 Sequence Channel Time Editor 11 240 The Time Editor Popup 31 241 The Times Soft Key Page 31 242 Sequence Times FCB TIMES EEN ENEE ee 243 Sequence Times Parameter Times cc ceceesesccssecseeseceeeceeesecsaeceeesecaeeseceecaeesecnereeesaeeees 243 Sequence Times WAF Alert Times 31 244 Sequence Times WAF Wait amp Followon Times 31 244 SEQUENCES MISEL E 245 Insert A Sequence Step In A Playback 00 elie eeeescesscesece
153. a is Global and owned by the database of the Server Also all playback features are Global shared by all users NOTE You are free to work independently blind from any client or the Server at the same time When working Live you are sharing control spaces as soon as someone presses for example GO it will affect all systems This is something you have to synchronise on a human level operator to operator Main and Master Playbacks Playback functions are global and shared by all This includes functions like GO PAUSE and REFRESH Highlight Mode This is a global mode both affecting and indicated on all screens on all stations Grand Master The Grand Master is global This means any user can control it for the whole system Freeze The Freeze switch is global This means any user can control it for the whole system B O The Blackout switch is global This means any user can control it for the whole system Independents The Independents global This means any user can control them for the whole system Multiple Users Local Functions 4 3 Basically everything is local except the global features described above See Multiple Users Global Functions There are some special cases Capture Each user has its own Capture mode but all captures channels are handled on a global system level on a first come first served basis This means that if a channel can be controlled from two clients or the Server and one of the
154. a limited set of channels and attributes When activated only these channels can be accessed This chapter contains the following sections Partitions Introduction Partitions List Partitions Create Partitions Activate 500 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Partitions Introduction 4 3 A partition is a definition of a set of channels devices Every Partition has a permission mask which defines if the Partition is applied to IECH Intensity Color Focus Beam Partitions can only be activated by users that have permission to activate them Once a Partition is acitve it limits the access to these channels The following functions are filtered through the Active Partition e The channel selection only allowed channels can be selected and viewed e Parameter access non allowed attributes are dimmed in Attribute Views e Recording of attributes or intensities Non allowed Partitions for the current logged in User are indicated with in the Partition List Every partition can have a text label NOTE The default Partition All allows access to all functions of all channels 501 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Partitions List 4 3 You can view edit and create new Partitions in the Partition List Browser gt Setup gt Partition List 5 Partition List Partition List Selected channels Partition Text Active Apply to All No IFCB Partitions List Columns 4 3
155. alette list the changes are not visualised until the step is updated and reselected You will need an updated version of Capture 2005 to be able to display blind output properly When a blind output list is opened the Live Attribute view will display Blind Attributes instead 517 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 APPENDIX The Appendix contains information about control interfaces fuses key shorcuts etc This chapter contains the following sections Appendix Console Keys Appendix Shortcuts By Function Appendix Connectors Appendix Frequently Asked Questions Appendix Console amp System Settings 518 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Appendix Console Keys Hold and press a key to get help This chapter is a summary of all key help texts to make the online help more efficient This chapter contains the following sections e Console Keys Alphabetical Order e Console keys Keyboard Equivalents 519 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Keys Alphabetical Order These are the Console Keys and the online help text connected to those without a direct chapter Console Key F1 Function Open the HELP tab See This Manual More Hold and press any key to get Help for that key More Press after opening an editor to get Help for that editor Location Top right corner under the Grand Master Console Keys lt
156. alternative Play Paths see Login Settings General Functions Function Key Feedback New Opens a popup asking you to confirm See Load a new empty Play Open See Open a Play Save Saves the current play Opens a popup asking you to press MODIFY to confirm Save as See Save a Play Import from See the Import Wizard NOTE USB memory is the main external storage media If you insert a USB device which contains Image or Movie files you get a question about auto importing them to the Images and Movies folders The Floppy drive is mainly an interface for importing shows from other systems using floppy such as Pronto Safari Expression Strand 500 series etc See IMPORT WIZARD If your system does not have a floppy drive connect one with USB or move the files to a USB memory stick 4 3 Sub folders are shown at the start of the file list with the name in brackets 26 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Load a New empty Play 4 2 When you want to clear the console to start with a new play you use the New command Browser gt Files gt New Function Key Feedback 1 Select the Browser The Browser is selected on the left side of screen 1 NOTE If the Browser already was selected it will be closed Press Browser again to reopen Browser Playbacks r Pa ges 2 Go to Files at the Arrow keys Files is marked in orange top 3 Open the F
157. ameter key and pressing the Master key or from the Master List 95 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Playback Keys Any Master Playback can be connected to Playback Controls to be able to pause stop reverse and start the chase or sequence in that master You can also set a tempo by tapping the TAP key e Inthe Congo console this is done with the Master Playback e Inthe Congo Jr console this is done with the Main Playback Congo Congo Jr acter Conrischa iMacier Connect a Master JUMP CON GOTO TAP TAP CON TOB NECT NECT Tap Tempo FRESH BACK _ Chase direction SEQ SEQ GO PAUSE pack Playback controls Re b Master Playback Playback controls 96 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playback Functions 4 3 Function Key Feedback Start a chase or GO Starts a stopped Chase or crossfade a Crossfade for a Sequence Start a crossfade from eo Starts a Crossfade to step step 4 1 Pause a chase or PAUSE Pauses a running Chase crossfade or Crossfade Reverse a fade STOP This key is the equivalent of GO BACK to the previous step of the Main Playback Step without times lt lt Or gt gt These keys are the equivalent of SEQ and SEQ in the Main Playback Change Chase direction lt lt or gt gt The currently connected 4 1 Chase will change direction Con
158. amic Effect views Live and Preset Press MODIFY in either for a dropdown with the following options Action Description All All devices start at the same point in the table Evenly Spread The starting point offset is evenly spread 1 2 1 9 E devices are divided in groups 382 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Offset Relation Dynamics Display 4 1 In the Dynamics Display the Offset Relation for the selected Dynamic Effect is mapped to wheel 3 Activate the Dynamics Soft Key Page in the Main Display of the console facepanel by pressing DYNAMICS in the top menu Congo Live Dynamic Effects Delete Dynam Congo Jr Delete Delete Keep All Dynam Dynam lt ed 1 Hold wheel key 3 to get a list of Offset Relations in the display 2 Select a relation using the wheel 3 Let go of the wheel to activate the current selection 383 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Delay Relation amp Distance Specify when channels start in relation to each other Delay Relation Distance all Y 100 All Evenly spread ak ak ab J T ak ak 1 9 Delay Relation and Distance are set in the Dynamic Effect views Live and Preset Press MODIFY in Delay Relation for a dropdown with the following options Action Description All All devices start at the same time Evenly Spread The starting time is evenly delayed 1 2 1 9 Deeg devices are divided in groups
159. amp Functions seseessseseeeseseeesssteeessesetsestrsesstsesseseesteseesesseeeeseeses gt 99 Master Playbacks Load Clear Modify OI 100 Master Playbacks Start Rades viis c jcsccssussanensscdcassacstaaes dntccasesucouassabsdcacanssecdense 101 Master Playbacks Channel Selection ssnnssessseeessseesseessressersseessseessseesssees 102 Master Play backs WE 103 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Presets lt i s ieccisisesesisceaescavavacwevazavevaicisadendsaspadaavesevenetessneatoates 104 Master Playbacks UE 105 Master Playbacks EE 106 MasterPlay backs EE 107 Master Playbacks Flash Keys icc sccsssnecevsseveyradessnbverscessecaseonedesasdenedaqasbnacsevegee 108 Flash Modes GI deed EEN a KE EEE auuiniees 108 Flash On Teenager EECHER 109 Master Playbacks Solo Fade Mode 110 Master Playbacks Dy mannii Ge cccsssasucintdedevessansivegtesy ENEE 111 Master Playbacks Channel Layouts ccceescccssseceseecesececeseeceeseeeeeneeeeee 112 Master Playbacks Palettes eege acct ee ee DE 113 Master Play backs KEE 114 Set In Wait Out times for a Master 114 Master Playbacks Master View 4 3 ccssccssssecesscecesececeeeeeceeeeeeseeeecseeeesaes 115 Master View Select And Set Levels GL 21 116 Master View Formats 21 116 Master View Dock Areas 21 116 Independents eu segedueeidshegdeetuseiu g ege geed Hea de ENEE 117 Using the Independent ieoi riria oeae re aA E ea O EO aaie EES 118 Ind
160. anel Programming Section Facepanel Console Main Display Facepanel Output Mode Switch Facepanel Grand Master Facepanel Trackball These sections are described elsewhere in this manual Main Playback Master Playbacks Direct Selects Independents Console Facepanel Congo Main LCD softkeys and moving light Fader Mode Switch controls T k pA Trackball ege e Independents M Master Playbacks 1 40 N with graphical displays and master keys Direct Selects Master Playback Controls Programming Section with Navigation Pad Main Playback 40 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Facepanel Congo J r Main Display softkeys and moving light controls Output switch and Grand Master aus nig BEI g SELECT IH uer MT ill ieee AUS COLOR Bi PAETE LoD COPY PASTE Ke pm geen ANE GOO Tos IW ATS TRAX DM SEQ erect PROT Geer CTLCT THRU Programming section SS with navigation pad e Main and Master ie Playback Facepanel Programming Section NOTE Congo amp Congo JR share the exact same layout of the Programming Section The only difference is that in Congo Jr the number input and channel info displays are only shown on the screen status bars The keys in the programming section allow you to select and store channels levels moving light parameters and times General Facts
161. annels lt TR lt TBODY gt You can set channel times with a shortcut as well Function Key Shortcut Feedback Set a channel time for the amp A time is set for the selected channels selected channels You can set a text label to the channel time group Set a channel delay time CH amp DELAY A time is set for the for the selected channels selected channels This is what it looks like in a playback view If no name is assigned the channel numbers will be shown 4 3 Chs 46 Special Keyliqght This is how the time is indicated in the live channel view under the level NOTE When Channel Times are activated the first four Channel Times are shown on the Main Display over the 4 wheels The status for each Channel Time is displayed over each wheel Rate for each channel can be adjusted with the corresponding wheel and the Channel Time can be started stopped with the corresponding wheel key 239 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequence Channel Time Editor 4 1 Channel Times are edited in the Channel Time Editor press MODIFY in the ChTime column of the Sequence List See Sequence List This is where you can add a text to each channel time group This text is shown in the graphical time line view of the Playback list 6 Channel Time Editor Selected and non zero channels Group Delay Time Text one 10 Backlights fading slow Editin
162. arameter type FCB or to the individual parameters Function Key Shortcut Feedback Focus time GJ amp A Focus time is set for the Focus selected channels Color time EI amp A Color time is set for the COLOR selected channels Beam time ES amp A Beam time is set for the BEAM selected channels Focus delay time GJ amp A Focus delay time is set Focus for the selected channels Color delay time ES amp A Color delay time is set COLOR for the selected channels Beam delay time GJ amp A Beam delay time is set COLOR J for the selected channels You can edit FCB times in the Preset List NOTE There is a shortcut for setting both F C and B Times to the same value Enter the time and hold TIME or DELAY and press ATTRIBUTE In the Times soft key page there are keys for setting FCB time and delay directly See Times Soft Key Page 308 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Times Attribute Time Attribute times take precedence over all other times for Moving Devices Times are set to the step in A Active or B Next depending on the setting for times SETUP amp TIME Function Key shortcut Feedback Attribute time Tel ME amp An attribute time is set for Parameter ke the selected channels Attribute delay time DELAY amp An attribute delay time is Parameter ke set for the selected channels
163. are channel selection subtracted from the current channel selection Select all channels in a GROUP All channels stored in range of Group 7 GROUP amp every Group from to THRU are selected 204 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Groups Fetch Intensities 4 1 Fetch intensities for all or specific channels from any Group Function Key Feedback Copy level from Group FETCHION amp All selected channels are GROUP set to the levels stored in Group Copy levels and channels GROUP amp All channels in the from Group LEVEL specified Group are selected and set to the levels in Group Ride Group GROUP a Group is faded in Proportionally on the Level Wheel proportionally on the Level Wheel 4 1 Level Wheel 205 Groups List Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 You can view edit and create new Groups directly in the Group List GROUP or BROWSER gt Group 3 Group List Text TechoBeams MACZ250 Group List Columns amp Functions 4 3 These are the functions in the Group list NOTE 4 3 The behaviour of UPDATE and RECORD in the Group List are different in 4 3 than in earlier versions of the software See below Function Key Feedback Open the Group List GROUP The Group List is opened Open the Group List G am
164. ation In the TIMES soft key page of the Main Display See Facepanel Console Main Display Console Key CLIENT N A e Function Controls Client functionality e Location To the left of the Main Display section See Facepanel Console Main Display Console Key COLOR AItC e Function Activate Color for the selected channels See Devices Palettes e Additional Functionsadditional Functions Console Key COLUMN F9 Function Select all cells in a column of a list See Navigating Lists Xtra Hold COLUMN and use the level wheel to resize a Column Xtra Move columns See Change The List View Xtra Sort by column See Sort By Column Location Navigation Pad upper right See Facepanel Programming Section 522 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console key CONNECT N A e Function Connect a Master to the Master Playback See Master Playback Playback Keys e Location See Master Playback Playback Keys Console Key COMPARE Softkey N A e Function Activates COMPARE mode comparing a Preset with the last recorded version See Presets Compare Mode e Location Softkey under the CHANNELS page of the Main Display See Facepanel Console Main Display Console Key COPY CUT Ctrl C e Function Copy an item in a List See Copy Cut amp Paste e Xtra Press COPY twice to cut an item in a list e Location Programming Section next to PASTE See Facepanel Programmi
165. back AAA 373 Load a new Sequence to the Main Playback 373 Dynamics ER 374 Record Changed Dynamics otenn iee dea E EEEE eE EEE EES EE PERE e 374 Record Dynamics To Another Dreset 374 Record Dynamics To A Master 374 Record Keep Dynamics New Base Value eseeeeeeeeeseeseeeeereesrsesrrrrerersrsrsrerrereersesesreerees 375 Dynamics Eftect Library ANY enop Zeiss 376 Dynamic Effect Library Columns amp Functons cceeeeeesesecneeeeceseeeceseceeesecneeseeneeeeeess 376 Dynamic Template Editor Create 11 377 Dynamic Template Editor Functions 0 cceeesesecssecseeseceesecseeesseceaeeecsaecaeesecaeeseenaeseeeas 377 Dynamics Preset Dynamics Editor A 71 378 Dynamics EA EE 379 Dynamics Size amp Kate 4 2 NEE 380 EE 380 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 SIYAH Channel 4 2 E 380 UE 381 Rate Channel 4 2 EAS AEE eege ceecteottl ccs secaeeei ted taht ees 381 Dynamics Relations amp Distance Ise 382 Offset Relation 228 eebe EES EELER Ste OLR AN 382 Offset Relation Dynamics Display GI 383 Delay Relation amp Distance sorier nren Ere EE EEE EEA EEEE EEEE 384 Delay Relation amp Distance Dynamics Display 11 385 Ernest eege 386 Dynamics Fade mieis a ac cea na a tus stones cabot as tana anaddai es aide 387 Dynamics de EE 388 Dynamics Fetch From A Preset Sieden ie A ees 389 Dynamics Playing Back 2ic 02 cseece ege 390 Dynamics Store Running To Library eee ceesceceenceceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeteeeesa
166. back to the top of this description Then repeat the procedure described above 464 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 J am Mode Dynamic Effects 4 1 The left section of the Direct Selects is set up for controlling Dynamic Effects e The lower part is used for activating a Dynamic Effect for the currently active Group selected channels See Start Dynamics From The Direct Selects e The upper part is used for changing Offset and Delay See Dynamics Relations amp Distance i Offset Offset Delay Delay Delay Delay Delay Dynan Evenly 1 4 All Evenly 1 2 1 3 1 4 ctrl 1 10 1 2 3 8 9 10 Dynan gt circle lt circle figure Ocean can ballyho ballyho fly in fly out 1 10 ol o2 This is basic operation Function Key Feedback 1 Activate a Group Master key 1 20 The LED in the Master key is lit and the channels are highlighted in the Live tab 2 Activate a Dynamic Direct Select Keys for Dynamic Effect 1 10 is Effect Dynam 1 10 activated 3 Set Offset and Delay Direct Select Keys for Offset and Delay relations within the Group Dynam ctrl 1 10 are set to the active Group More advanced controls In addition to this the Main Display of the console can be set to the Dynamics Soft Key Page with soft keys and wheel functions for controlling Dynamic Effects Press the soft key DYNAMICS Live Dynamic Effects NOTE The four wheels are also used for cont
167. band 1 334 Crossfaders And Attributes eru eieren Eare aenea Hae en deos es E EE N E 334 Device Play back GoOnGo or GoInB 31 335 Devices e 336 Device Recording Introduction 4 3 eegene sacs nas eegenaeenaneaewes 337 Device Recording Modes eegene Seege 338 Only Changed are recorded AAA 338 Device Recording Block Cues GER eegene aides 340 Device Recording Delete 41 E 341 Deyi ces KEE 342 Device Templates Introduction 21 343 Device Templates List ccrnieric iien nn i a e a i 344 Template List Columns Punctons 344 Device Templates e TEE 345 Template Editor Columns amp Functions seeeesseeseseseeeseeeereresrstsrertererersesrerrereersesenrerses 345 Device Templates Create aeaa re a a a E a A A 346 Device Templates Eat ee EE 347 Parameter Definition Editor ccccccsccesscccsscessceceseceeseecesesesseecsecseceecsaeeseseecseseeeeecsseeenaees 348 Device Templates Type LTP or RER cccceejevccksiasvegsessavasteaaucsestsdeasamassansaareaes 349 Device Templates Type 8 16 bit contra 350 16 Bit Control And Wheel Bebhaviour 350 16Bit Control Fme EE 351 Device ergatteren ee h 352 Device Templates e 353 Template Range Editor Columns 353 Template Range Wizard NEEN a E a a 354 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Templates Mode Table eic isccssccevsssseeecsavevarsisaencsaspavaaneseusnetesencaevases 355 Define RO 355 Device Templates Fade With Intensity 0 0 0 eececeeseeceeeeceeeeec
168. betical Order Console Keys Keyboard Eouivalentz Appendix Shortcuts By Punconcss oisieede ois viele hin eee wat shorteuts Select Channels js 3 nenni ar eae E aE EEEE EAEE E RE SEA Shortcuts Channel Levels caca aeae A R EAE R EAO RER E ERNE ACER Shortcuts Channel Modes ia eu EES S EEA EA aa R A Ta Shortcuts Select Nth FUnctions ccc ccsccesccssseeseceseceeeceeeceeesneesneeneesnenseeeseenseeaesnaeesaeaes Shorteuts Channel ViCws scucssscsancestsscvessissazhssdcscnasss a E e E EE Er E SEEE REEERE Een Shortcuts HEIEP 401 EE Shortcuts Channels Only Mode 0 se escseecseecneeceneconscnsvonsvnsosscssorssessecssesneesneessersees Shortcuts General Editing KeyS c s c ssssossssssssescnenoncssesonenensessessensnsssenersteneesosenesees Shortcuts Spreadsheet Editing cece eecsseseceecseeeecssecseesecseesecseeeecsaeeeesaecseesesneseeseaeeees Shortcuts Navigation Keys ioc cs rescies esevecoapssapstustessssedossusbeesesuonsivspssenstogcesdossesbapavnvoneda Shortcuts Master Playbacks seisine renr cenre ioei i e eoii eos Shortcuts Masters amp Channels shortcuts M ster Pages ici cctits chee Read Aisle am dee Dee Shortcuts Devices To Home Position cescesceesecesecececseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeseenseenaeeaesaes Shortcuts Device Attribute Editors GI Shortcuts Device Masking ccessssesecseeeecsseeececeeeeccsaeceesecaeesecneeecsaeeeeaecaeesesnereeeeaeeees Shortcuts
169. bit parameters Extensive scroller handling with roll libraries and individual calibration per unit Assign any device parameter to a Master and store in a Master Page 343 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Templates List The Template Lists are opened from the Browser Browser gt Patching gt Templates 3 Templates Template Text Parameters Comment Time stamp ColorWash M1 ColorMix AT M2 11 Updaterad 16 4 05 Oskar 1200 Colorspot M2 3 ESC Gobos 13 4 05 Oskar 2005 04 05 16 1 Template List Columns amp Functions Function Key Feedback Template MODIFY The ID of each Template Press MODIFY to open the Editor Text MODIFY Press MODIFY to activate and end text input Parameters The number of DMX channels it uses Press MODIFY to open the Editor Comment Press MODIFY to activate and end text input Time Stamp Date and time 344 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Templates Editor The Template Editor is opened from the Item or Parameter cell in the Template List Browser gt Setup gt Templates Open an existing one directly in this node as well Browser gt Patching gt Templates gt xxxx 4 Template Editor ColorWash MI Parameter OMX Type Highlight Snap l Invert Ranges Tables Low OMX Fine step Fade A Pan LTP16 Off Off 2 off Tilt 3 6 8 28 Of Off Focus Speed 5 0 0 off Control 6 D On Off Color d 0 0 OF oft Color 2 8 0 off
170. ble to operate the console with our concentration focused on the performance This may seem simple but it implicated a lot of things we had to take in consideration e Vital functions should have direct keys e Navigation should be possible without looking at the screens e The user interface should be tactile physical keys 566 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Congo Designing The Screens Moving to a graphical interface opened a lot of possibilities Color graphics local menus toolbars Interviews led us quickly in a different direction The main input we got from all roads of experience was Don t clutter the screens We want only the necessary information at a glance and only colors for important stuff True enough Local menus toolbars and colors were skipped for the simple concept of the Browser We took aboard graphical designer wiz Peppe Tannemyr from Beacon to create an environment that used color only when necessary that had nothing to do with office computer environments and everything to do with lighting 567 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Congo Designing The Hardware We knew we wanted the following Our navigation solution made physical High quality faders and keys Graphical displays next to the Playbacks Simple access for service Ergonomical key layout Screen holders for standard screens that allow free view over the console We also wanted someon
171. bute Editor default Palett Press MODIFY to toggle Default Attribute time Time Use as default Course Fine 16 bit control Override scroller fan value F Del C Del B Del F Time C Time B Time 100 407 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Attribute Settings The Attribute settings affect recording and control of moving device parameters Function Explanation Default Record Attributes as Record attributes to move live GoOnGo GoOnGo or to move when the positions are loaded for the next Crossfade GolnB Disable Automatic GolnB The logic for automatically storing Off logic non intensity moves as move while dark is disabled Record Attribute mode There are three different modes Automatic for recording Attributes See Device Recording Modes Attribute Editor default The default setting for entering Palette values in the Attribute Editors Palettes or Default Attribute time Sets a time for all moving device 3 seconds changes during programming Time Use as default Times are set as of the In time Off seconds of a crossfade or in seconds Coarse Fine 16 bit control Moving parameter wheels slowly Off 8 bits gives 16 bit control See Device Templates 16 bit control Override scroller fan value Override the fan of all patched 0 scrollers with fan control F Del A default delay time in seconds or 100 of the In time
172. by incoming MIDI Time Code Other Steps will not be trigged even if the times match It is also possible to run the system so that any Sequence Step matching a specific Time Code time is run automatically regardless if it is in the B field or not If the Auto locate step parameter is set to On any step that is matching the incoming MIDI Time Code will be executed See System Settings MIDI 489 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 MIDI Implementation Chart 4 2 All MIDI messages described below can be sent or received on any MIDI Channel between 1 and 16 The values shown in parenthesis like this 144 all refer to MIDI channel 1 To be able to use other MIDI channels you have to add the channel number and subtract 1 Example NOTE ON on channel 4 144 4 1 147 Keys All keys are transmitted as Note On and Note Off messages When a key is pressed the following MIDI Message will be transmitted NOTE ON 144 Key number 64 When a key is released the following MIDI Message will be transmitted NOTE OFF 128 Key number 64 By sending the corresponding command to the MIDI In port the Congo will execute the key Since standard MIDI Notes only can accept a maximum of 127 individual notes and the Congo uses far more buttons than that a special coding had to be introduced for the buttons above 127 In the table below these are shown as x y The first value is used as the note number and the second va
173. ccess your instruments without altering your Patch This is useful when you want to keep your addresses and dimmer assignments as they are but you want to change the numbering to fit the numbering of a Plot Renaming is done in the Name column of the Channel List BROWSER gt Patching gt Channel List 3 Channel List Channel Dimmer Address Device Device Address Scale Park Name 101 1 101 100 100 102 1 102 Change a channel name Function Key Feedback Change a channel Enter a new name and press name MODIFY If the name exists you will get a warning message about this Set a channel Select channels Enter the channel number and selection to the press MODIFY same channel name Remove a To If a Name is set to zero the channel from all channel will disappear from all channel views channel views and cannot be accessed until given a name Clear all channel Patch Wizard All Channel Renames can be names cleared from the Patch Wizard Set names 1 1 Patch Wizard The Rename function can be reset from the Patch Wizard It will not disappear from Channel Layouts 147 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Patch Edit C hange A Moving Device You can exchange one moving device with another from the Device Settings tab All parameters that are similar will continue functioning Function Where Explanation Change Device Type Device Settings Press MOD
174. ce a smoke machine or something else it will always correspond to a channel number in the Patch See Channels Attributes terminology The control parameters of anything that isn t a dimmer for example a moving device or a scroller are called attributes These are patched to the controls of Congo when the Template corresponding to that device is assigned to a control channel in the Patch See Moving Devices Patch terminology The Patch is where you configure your outputs and devices When you start a New play the default setting is 1 1 See Patch Output protocol terminology Congo supports a lot of output protocols through Ethernet and has two DMX512 outputs as well See Output Settings Groups terminology Frequently used combinations of channels can be stored in up to 999 Groups for quick recall from the keypad or a remote focusing system See Groups Presets terminology This is a specific Avab concept Frequently used combinations of channels are stored in up to 9999 Presets 0 1 899 9 for playback in the Main or Master Playbacks The combination of a Preset and a Sequence Step is the equivalent of a Cue in many other systems The advantage here is that Presets can be reused in any Sequence with different times See Presets 48 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences terminology Lists of Presets are called Sequences that can be crossfaded move faded or lock faded in consecutive orde
175. ck Tour Key Syntaxes There are mainly two kinds of keys in the console keys with a fixed function and the softkeys around the LCD Display Keys in the Congo can behave in the following ways Function Description Example Direct functions Will perform a function directly GO and PAUSE in the when it is pressed Main Playback Functions with a Requires a numerical entry 0 RECORD to store a numerical prefix 9 before it is pressed preset with that number Prefix functions Will change the function of Hold C Alt and press key combinations another key if itis held down PLAYBACK to clear the while pressing that key Main Playback Some keys can combine all three ways of working An example of this is the PRESET key e Pressing PRESET with no numerical prefix opens the Preset List with all presets e A number and PRESET selects the channels of that specific preset e A number and holding PRESET while pressing a Master Key will load preset to that Master NOTE Hold down the HELP key and press a key to jump to the page in the online manual that describes that function 47 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Quick Tour Software Terminology It can be easier to understand Congo if you are familiar with the basic terminology Channels terminology A Channel is the control handle used to call anything controlled by Congo Regardless if it is a dimmer channel a moving devi
176. ck loaded with name and number Press Master key to execute Master Key 111 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Channel Layouts The Master key will activate the Channel Layout when pressed Function Keys Feedback 1 Open the View Masters MODIFY amp The view masters tab is tab Master Key opened 2 Go to the Content Type Arrow keys The cell is highlighted column 3 Open the selection MODIFY A dropdown is opened 4 Select Channel Layout MODIFY Layout is indicated 5 Go to Content Arrow keys The cell is highlighted 6 Select Channel Layout MODIFY Channel Layout is indicated 112 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Palettes 4 1 A Palette is executed for the currently selected channels when you press the Master Key You can execute on a time as well by entering the time before pressing the Master key Fading the fader will move the selected channels to the palette Function Keys Feedback Load Focus Palette to a FOCUS amp Focus Palette is loaded Master Playback Master Key with name and number You can do the same with COLOR BEAM and ALL PALETTE s Activate Palette from Master Key The Palette is activated Master for the selected channel s Activate Palette in time el Master Key The Pale
177. ctivate Sync mode 429 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Network Client 4 3 You need a dongle to run the software as a Client to an existing Server To log in as a Client use the CLIENT key from the Login Screen of Congo Once you are logged in as Backup or Server you have to log out to log in as a Client again As soon as a Client is connected to a Server a message is shown on all stations 4 3 If the Server is stopped clients will restart and present a modified welcome screen informing about what happened allosing you to restart If the same Server is online you will be offered to re connect If there is a new Server if the Backup took over you will be offered to connect to this Server 4 3 For the following commands use the CLIENT key of the console Action Keys Feedback Toggle Clients on off CLIENT Confirmation message at bottom of screens Set permission modes CLIENT held As long as CLIENT is held permissions can be set with the direct selects Currently only Full Access and View Only Mode are available NOTE Be careful when using the client since you are making changes directly in the server Don t try to work on the patch from the client In View Only Mode you can change the play on the main console which you may not want to 430 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Network Multiple Users 4 3 HAHAHA Multiple Users Global Functions 4 3 All Play dat
178. d controllers when this is activated in the MIDI Settings You can use MIDI notes and controllers to remote control any key or fader of the Console If you connect a MIDI Sequencer you can record all key presses and fader movements in real time and play back in real time PROGRAM CHANGE The Congo can be set to activate a specific crossfade when receiving a Program Change command through MIDI When the Program Change parameter in MIDI Settings is set to On the board will activate a crossfade to step 0 127 when receiving Program Change 0 127 NOTE You have to have a Sequence Step recorded in the board to be able to jump to it 487 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 MIDI MIDI Show Control 4 2 MIDI Show Control supports reception of the following commands GO Without cue number Executes the next crossfade With cue number Crossfades to the corresponding sequence step or preset number depending on the GOTO jumps to xxx setting STOP Pauses the current crossfade RESUME Resumes the current crossfade SET 0 39 controls master 1 40 128 and 129 controls the A and B fader pair 510 controls the grandmaster In the MIDI Setup there are parameters for turning MSC on off and setting the device ID See System Settings MIDI 488 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 MIDI Time Code 4 2 Every sequence step can be triggered both manually and by a specific MIDI Time Code time on the MIDI port In the Sequence Editor
179. d the fixture in the standard library The standard library is the one that s been in Congo from the start All templates are hand made The Extended library is data we get from the Carallon subscription service and is made by crunching a lot of data The templates are as good as Carallon with some work from ETC can make them but they have not all been tested with real lights or adjusted by humans 361 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Devices Media Servers 4 3 A media server is no different from any other device patch the template and use it However we have created a standardised interaction interface that allows interaction currently only with the ArKaos media server in an unreleased version of ArKaos In the future other media server manufacturers are discussing to adopt this new communications standard which will mean Congo will have similar interactivity with servers from Coolux Green Hippo and others ArKaos support 1 Before trying this interaction make sure the ArKaos system is up and running on the network with the right show loaded 2 You must patch the layers of the media server first and all layers of a single server must be patched to a continuous range of channels Enter the channel number that the first layer will be mapped to Subsequent layers will be mapped to the following channels The number of layers is defined in the ArKaos software 3 When an ArKaos system is detected it will show up u
180. default Course Fine 16 bit control Override scroller fan value F Del C Del B Del F Time 100 C Time 100 B Time e On The wheel controls the Coarse part of the16 bit value Hold the wheel key down and move the wheel to control the Fine part of the 16 bit value e On default The wheel will control Coarse when moved fast and Fine when moved slowly 350 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 16 Bit Control Fine Step Devices with 16 bit control rarely use all 16 bits Therefore it is possible to fine tune the resolution of this parameter in the cell Fine Step in the Template Editor Fine step 1 4 Full 16 bit control which few Devices use Catalyst is one require this value to be set to 1 default 4 351 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Templates Snap or Fade Snap or Fade is defined in the Template Editor Snap wi When set to Snap checked it will not be affected by times It will move at the beginning of each repositioning When Snap is Off unchecked the parameter will fade on times See Devices Times Press modify in the Parameter cell to toggle On Off 352 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Templates Ranges The Template Range Editor makes it possible to define and edit ranges subranges and positions for colors gobos etc in Templates This editor is opened by pressing MODIFY in the Range column of the Template Editor 5S Template Range
181. different types of patched Moving Devices and then on the texts prepared in the Channel Database for Auto Groups See Patch Channel Database amp Auto Groups Group number 110 on Master 10 is ALL DEVICES Gri01 Gri02 Gr110 Mac Mac All 300 M4 500 M4 devices Masters 11 20 are saved for Groups of your choice LILAA See Groups Record and Groups Load to Playbacks J am Mode Step 3 Update Focus Palettes 4 1 Masters 21 30 are used for Focus Palettes The first time Jam Mode is activated ten Focus Palettes will be created starting at 101 They need to be updated because they are all set to HOME as default The first one is a HOME Palette and does not need to be updated Fo1i101 Fo109 Fo103 Fo104 Fo105 Fo106 Fo104 Fo108 Fo109 Fo110 Focus Home Focus 2 Focus 3 Focus 4 Focus 5 Focus 6 Focus 7 Focus 8 Focus 9 Focus 10 Updating the Focus Palettes in Master Playbacks 21 30 is the only preparation needed to set up Jam Mode for improvising with any rig of Moving Devices Since all Moving Devices are generated as Groups by Device Type on Master Playbacks we suggest using these Groups to update the Focus Palettes Update the Focus Palettes 1 Select all Devices in Master 1 by pressing the master key for that Playback The LED in the Master key will light up All Devices of the first type are select 2 Use the NEXT key to select them one by one and the PAN and TILT wheels or the Trackball in Parameter
182. e First free Palette 3 Palette Name Shutter Combination Record attributes for Each Device Ty ype 3 Enter a text optional 4 Select Recording mode For Focus Palettes this is usually Each Device Type See Each Device or Each Device Type 5 Press MODIFY to confirm recording NOTE The MASK function can be used to filter out unwanted parameters when recording a Palette See Device Control Mask 318 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Record An All Palette 1 Select channel s 2 Initiate recording of next free Palette or Palette Function Key Feedback Record next free All amp You will get a popup Palette Record All Palette amp You will get a popup Popup TY on A Record new Palette Type First free Palette 1 Palette Name Mix of parameters Record attributes for Each Device 3 Enter a text optional 4 Select Recording mode For All Palettes this is usually Each Device See Each Device or Each Device Type 5 Press MODIFY to confirm recording NOTE The MASK function can be used to filter out unwanted parameters when recording a Palette See Device Control Mask 319 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Palettes Update The UPDATE PALETTE softkey in the Device Soft Key page is the fastest way to update all changed Palettes 1 Go to the top menu for the Main Display in the console facepanel by press
183. e A Insert a new Preset with INSERT Inserts a new Preset with the next free number this number Edit a cell with a numeric MODIFY Changes the value of the value selected cell 217 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Presets Load To Playbacks 4 1 You can load Presets directly to any Playback Action Key s Feedback Load Preset to the PRESET amp A The Preset is loaded to Active field A of the Main the A field replacing the Playback content of that field Load Preset to the Next PRESET amp B The Preset is loaded to field B of the Main the B field replacing the Playback content of that field Load Preset to a Master amp Preset is loaded to the Playback Master Key Master Playback Add Preset to Live 4 1 G amp Preset is added to Live LIVE Add Preset to Blind GJ amp Preset is added to Blind 4 1 BLIND Quick load Presets to Masters The direct functions allow you to load a series of recorded Presets to Masters this is called quick loading Presets to Masters 1 Enter the number of the first Preset 2 Hold down the PRESET key and pull your finger over a range of Master Keys All existing consecutive Presets will be loaded 218 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Presets Copy Copy a Preset by recording it with a different Preset number Th
184. e STOP I Effect See Dynamics Start You can record this to the Preset in the A field of the Main Playback When the Preset with this Stop Table is activated the Intensities will fade the size of the Dynamic Effect using the IN time of this Preset 371 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Delete A Dynamic From Running Dynamics 1 Open the Live Dynamic Effects Tab by pressing DYN EFFECT 3 Live Dynamic Effects Size Channel Rate Rate Channel Offset Relatio Delay Relation Distance Tex 100 Evenly spread All 100 2 Select a Dynamic effect with the arrow keys 3 Press DELETE to stop a popup will ask for confirmation WE en Are you sure Delete Dynamic Effect 4 Press MODIFY to confirm 372 Selected channels Loop Count Form F F Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Delete A Dynamic Using The Dynamics Display 4 1 Dynamics can be cleared or deleted from the Display List or with the soft keys in the Dynamics Display Activate the Dynamics Soft Key Page in the Main Display of the console facepanel by pressing DYNAMICS in the top menu Congo Live Oynamic ts Delete Dynam Congo Jr Delete Keep Dist Dynam Dynam ance PR mt i OOOO Press SELECT ALL to select all channels running a Dynamic effect e Press DELETE ALL to delete all running Dynamic Effects e Press CLEAR SELECT to clear Dynamic Effects from the current channel selection It is also possible to work
185. e a specific number The Recording Popup NOTE You can define how moving device parameters are stored in the Record Settings Hold SETUP and press RECORD A recorded Preset is always added to the Preset List Browser gt Presets 4 1 If there are moving devices defined the first preset in an empty sequence will ask you if you want to make a block cue The Recording Popup 4 3 The recording popup has a Basic and an Advanced section The last used tab of these two is remembered for the next Record action In the Basic part you can confirm recording a Preset RECORD or MODIFY You can also add a Preset or Sequence text and define the fade type Mem d Record Preset Basic Advanced Record new preset Next free preset number 10 0 P Text S Text Fade Type Cross 211 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 In the Advanced part you can set fade and moving device times and define the fade type You can set a Block flag for intensities attributes and keep Running Dynamics It is also possible to toggle the GoOnGo flag 4 2 Record Preset Record new preset 9 0 Next free preset number 10 0 P Text S Text Fade Type Set block flag for intensity Record all attributes Keep running dynamics Record attributes as GoInB Record Attribute mode Automatic Timing Delay Out Out Delay In In FCB Times F Delay C Delay B Delay F Time 10 C Time 100 B Time 100 Attribute Times See Pre
186. e content in the previous column In CT MODIFY Sets an In time If there is no other time it is also an out time Wait EA Sets a wait time Out GJ Sets an out time Flash Mode MODIFY Toggles Flash Mode on off Flash Level ES Sets as the Flash level of a Master Playback 270 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Content dropdown Content Type S y Beam Pal Macro Dev Dynam 271 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Pages Times Master Playback times can be stored in Master Pages Times are set from 0 1seconds to 49 59 minutes 0 1 4959 General Facts e A Master Playback can have an in wait out time e A Master Page can have a general time used for all Palettes and Presets e A Master Page can have a BPM time for all Chases Master Page Times In Out Wait Fade times for a Master Playback can be stored in a Master Page The times are activated in the following situations e When the master is linked from a Sequence Step e When you hold START and press the Master Key e When Flash On Time is active SETUP A Master Key Function Keys Feedback 1 Activate the Master Browser gt Master The Master Page List is Page List Pages opened 2 Go to In Wait Out Arrow keys Each selected cell is Times highlighted 3 Set a time MODIFY A time of is set Master Page Times Page Time The Master Page Time is used for Palettes conten
187. e BROWSERs Playlist press MODIFY 3 Playlist Step Sequence Seq Name These are the functions in the Playlist Function Column Feedback Insert Sequence Sequence is inserted into the Playlist Delete a Sequence Sequence is inserted into the Playlist Load a Sequence Loads the selected Sequence to the Main Playback from the next fade 250 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 The Playlist Mode Playlist mode is activated by the softkey PLAYLIST in the Misc Soft Key Page Congo Live Dynamic Effects UnP ark Congo Jr Learn Play Park UnPark Macro List lt C CM E S E When it is active all Sequences in the Playlist will be loaded when the previous is finished until the end Every time a new Sequence is loaded this will be notified with a message on the main screen The Playlist Console Display Hold lt and press the softkey PLAYLIST to activate the Playlist in the Main Display of the console You can select any sequence with the trackball in DispList mode by clicking on it 251 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Build amp Modify Modes There are two modes that affect recording and playback of Sequences Build Sequence and Modify Sequence Sequence Build Seq mode 4 2 This mode is set in the Crossfade Settings See System Settings Crossfade The default setting for this mode is ON When ON every Preset recorded in the
188. e To the right of the numeric keypad there is a row with keys for selecting groups of channels and to the right of that is a row with keys for setting levels in different ways There are keys for setting times to the sequence in the Main Playback There are keys for recording and updating the current preset There are direct keys to open editors for play data SEQ PRESET GROUP etc The Navigation pad includes the round navigating keys the arrow keys the level wheel and ESC and MODIFY See There are two small displays e Number Input left shows the last entered number input from the numerical keypad e Channel Info right shows the number and level of the last selected channel 41 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 a Number input manne info Navigation 234 5 d Ee Zi SA Select Record C19 Keys Ae TA ENT Facepanel Console Main Display This section has different programming functions The Display has soft menus with different sets of functions for the keys around it The wheels can be used for any device parameter There is a list section in the middle that is controlled by the Disp List function of the Trackball not available in Congo Jr 42 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Congo main display area 0 Soft menu key Display List area info area Joam 4 Parameter info area SELECT NEUT All e D Parameter wheel keys Parameter wheels Congo Jr main display area
189. e functions can be used to clear channels and levels Action Key Feedback Clear selected channels C ALT amp C ALT All channels in the contributing field of the channel view connected to the channel control are deselected Clear all channels amp C ALT amp LIVE All channels in the A field levels in A are set to zero and deselected Clear all channels amp C ALT amp LIVE All channels in all levels in all playbacks LIVE J Playbacks are set to zero and deselected Clear all channels amp C ALT la BLIND All channels in levels in Blind the Blind field are set to zero and deselected Clear all channels amp C ALT amp CH All channels in the levels in the focused Playback connected to channel view the Channel Control are set to zero and deselected Clear all selected C ALT amp CH All channels in the channels amp levels in the CH Playback connected to focused channel view the Channel Control are AND clears all changed set to zero deselcted flags AND homes all homed and the changed devices 4 3 flag is reset Clear selected channels amp C ALT amp LEVEL Selected channels in the levels in the focused Playback connected to channel view the Channel Control are set to zero and deselected Captured channels and Independent Channels in Exclusive
190. e keypad e Channel levels are set from 0 100 0 values are not displayed on the channel screen and 100 values are displayed as F standing for Full The full resolution of DMX 512 is higher than 100 steps its 256 steps called bits Therefore there are functions for setting and changing levels in increments of bits 0 255 e Channels are always controlled directly in a playback or an editor and the current one is indicated in the small display Channel Control at the bottom of all screens e There is a Highlight mode mainly used for focusing devices that can also be used for conventional lights See Device Control Highlight Mode 179 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels Ch Only Mode The idea of a Channels Only Mode allows a complete novice to get some lights on stage The Channels Only Mode switch converts all 40 Playback faders to channel faders temporarily actually turning the console into a single scene board See Master Playbacks Fader Mode Switch Action Console Feedback 1 Make sure the Grand Grand Master Otherwise there is no light Master is up output 2 Make sure the FREEZE Freeze Switch Otherwise there is static switch is set to ON or no light output 3 Turn Channels Only Mode Switch Channels 1 40 can be Mode switch to Channels accessed from the Master Only faders now Move fader 1 and you can see the value for channel 1 on the channel views You can select a channel
191. e lights forever Action Soft Key Feedback Enable This key has to be pressed together with Lamp On Off Reset to activate them as a safety measure Lamp Idle ENABLE amp The Device is set to it s Lamp Idle Lamp idle value Lamp On ENABLE amp A lamp strike is set to the Lamp On selected channel s Lamp Off ENABLE amp A lamp off is set to the Lamp Off selected channel s Reset ENABLE amp Reset A lamp reset is set to the selected channel s 281 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Control Home Positioning Home positioning of a device means setting all parameters or part of them to the default values defined in the template of this device See Templates Normally it means setting pan and tilt to 50 color to white and all other parameters to neutral These functions apply to the currently selected channel s Action Key Feedback Home all attributes HOME ATTRIB All parameters are set to HOME ATTRIB home Home FOCUS HOME ATTRIB amp Focus parameters are set FOCUS to home Home COLOR HOME ATTRIB amp Color parameters are set COLOR to home Home BEAM HOME ATTRIB amp Beam parameters are set BEAM to home Home single parameters HOME ATTRIB amp Parameter is set to Wheel Key home Another way of doing the same thing Action Key Feedback Home FOCU
192. e parameter from a Beam Tel BEAM amp Wheel Key palette Activate a single parameter from an All palette Tel PALETTE amp Wheel Key Activate a Palette from a Direct select Activate a Palette from a Direct select on time Direct Select Key Activate a Palette from a Master Activate a Palette from a Master on time el Master Key 546 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Device Palette Updating Keys and shortcuts for updating Device Palettes Some of these keys are softkeys in the Device soft key page of the Main Display DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Toggle Focusing mode on off soft key FOCUSING MODE Select Palette in Display List Right Click Step to the next channel in palette selection NEXT Step to the previous channel in palette selection LAST Update the current palettes for the selected channel s UPDATE PAL soft key Toggle Highlight mode on off HIGHLIGHT Shortcuts Device Palette Specials Keys and shortcuts for special Device Palette functions DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Select channels recorded in a Focus palette CH amp FOCUS Select channels recorded in a Color palette CH amp COLOR Select channels recorded in a Beam palette CH amp BEAM Select channels recorded in an All palette CH amp PALETTE
193. e the previous pages in this chapter on how to control record and stop the Dynamic Effect 64 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Navigating You can control everything in the software from the Navigating pad Open and close windows zoom move tabs and edit in lists This chapter contains the following sections Navigating Introduction Navigating Browser Navigating Tabs Navigating Channel Views Navigating Lists 65 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Navigating Introduction The Navigation Pad is the centre of all programming in Congo makes it possible to open windows move tabs browse the software and zoom without the need to use a mouse or trackball The round navigation keys are described in other chapters For BROWSER see The Browser For SELECT see The Lists For COLUMN see The Lists For TAB see The Tabs For LIVE see The Live Tab For FORMAT see The Channel Views For BLIND see The Blind View The Navigation Pad Insert a Delete an new item in item from a a list list Browser Select the Browser Select cells with arrows in lists Move or sort by columns in lists in combination with arrow keys Steps through open tabs Used with the wheel to crop lists Selects the Live tab Steps through ch formats can select a layout by number Used with wheel to zoom a ch view Hold an arrow key and move th
194. e used by Flash On Time NOTE The Out time is only relevant when there is an In and Wait time 114 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Master View 4 3 It is possible to view the content of the Master Playbacks in the Master View as well as the Master Editor It can be opened by pressing MASTER or from the Browser Browser gt Master View If MASTER is pressed again once this tab has been opened the same tab will be selected to avoid multiple copies of the same tab 4 3 3 Master View Page 1 1 0 First step 1 5 0 Blue m Focus oon Man All masters 2 0 Change s 3 0 Start effect 4 0 Stop D ynamic ee i 7 0 8 0 Fly in Stop a ese ll re NOTE Configure Master Views can be assigned to a dock area See Dock Areas 115 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master View Select And Set Levels 4 2 It is possible to select masters and set levels from the Master view and with the MASTER key Keyboard shortcut Alt M Function Keys Feedback Select a Master MASTER Master is selected and highlighted in the Master View Add a Master G Master is added to the selection Add a range of Masters to Up to Master are added the selection to the selection Subtract a Master from E Master is subtracted the se
195. e wheel to power scroll in Format lists Selects the Blind tab copying channels and levels Used with wheel to fade in the content live The ARROW Keys The arrow keys are used for navigating in all directions Hold an arrow key and used the level wheel to speed scroll in that direction 66 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 The ESC Key The ESC Key is used to close Tabs and popups The MODIFY Key Modify is the Enter command wherever one is needed It is used to enter values or toggle between options or open dropdown menus It is also used in combination with some keys for special functions e Hold MODIFY and press any playback key to open its editor e Hold MODIFY and press certain keys to open an editor for example CH to open the Channel List The Level Wheel The level wheel sets intensities Together with the navigation keys it also has the following functionality Hold any arrow key and use the level wheel to speed scroll in that direction Hold FORMAT and use the level wheel to zoom in channel views Hold BLIND and use the level wheel to add that content to the output Hold COLUMN and use the level wheel to scroll the column width 67 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Navigating Browser The Browser tab gives you a direct link to everything in Congo Browser About Congo quen Attributes Help elp favorites Browser Controls 4 2
196. e with a lot of experience of the lighting industry to put it together so we took aboard Magnus Anuell the engineer behind the successful Rainbow Color Scrollers 568 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Congo The Eurovision The very first show run on the Congo was the Eurovision Song Contest final The most prestigious annual live broadcast in Europe with over 250 million viewers It was a fantastic experience to see how four operators with completely different backgrounds handled the system and how well it responded It worked past our initial expectations Ulf Sandstr m Four Congo operators controlled 37 universes of lighting including e Over 300 moving lights e A large amount of conventional lights e 16 Catalyst media servers The systems were networked and all shows saved on a mutual File Server Every system had a synchronised backup Let s put it this way Congo is capable 569 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Congo The arrival of J r 2006 at PLASA the ultra compact and modular smaller version of the Congo Console is presented Congo JR Packing every ounce of power from the larger console this little beast is a dream come true for touring theatre operators moving light operators and smaller but complex venue operators and designers The Congo Jr is a dream come true for any moving light operator designer or tech wanting a full system in a very small package Bullen
197. ect Direct Select key The LED of that key is lit Mode section 1 4 2 Select Setup Direct Select key The LED of that key is lit 3 Select Types and The current types and Banks banks can be recalled with this Setup key 124 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Direct Selects Save Screens There are 100 definable memories for all screens including zoom channel format and split tabs Action Console Feedback 1 Select Type TYPE amp SCREEN When TYPE is held you can press SCREEN in your choice of Direct Select Section 2 Record the current TAB amp The current screen screen settings Section Key settings are stored to that key A number will appear over the key When you press this key all screens will default to the stored layout and format NOTE 4 3 In Congo Jr the four Direct Select keys to the left of the display also work as TYPE keys for each section 125 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Direct Selects Direct Mode 4 2 One of the very fast and unique functions of Congo A large number of keys can be held to enter temporary Direct Mode for the Direct Selects As long as the key is held it is possible to access the first forty items belonging to this key category Function Key Feedback 1 Activate Direct Mode Hold a key Direct Select display shows the first 40 2 Select key 1 40 Direct Select key When the key is pr
198. ected 220 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Presets Fetch Intensities 4 1 Fetch intensities for all or specific channels from any Preset Function Key Feedback Set last stored level FETCHION All selected channels are set to their last stored levels Copy level from Preset FETCH ON All selected channels are set to the levels stored in Preset Copy levels and channels Ces All channels in the from Preset LEVEL specified Preset are selected and set to the levels in Preset 12 Ride Preset GJ amp Preset is faded in Proportionally on the Level Wheel proportionally on the Level Wheel 4 1 Level Wheel HINT You can fetch attribute values as well See Device Control Fetch Copy You can press ON FETCH amp PRESET as well 4 1 221 Presets Display List Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Opens a list that shows all Presets in the Main LCD of the console the console Function Console Action Open the Preset Display DISPLAY LIST amp Opens a list of all Presets list in the main display of PRESET Use the trackball in Display List mode to scroll 222 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Presets Channel Editor Wizard The Channel Editor Wizard allows you to track level changes in all Presets with powerful arguments Press WIZARD in any chann
199. ection middle See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key TIME T Function Set an in out Time in the Sequence of the Main Playback See Sequences Times More Set a time to a Preset in a Master Playback See Master Playbacks Times More Hold MODIFY and press TIME to open the Time Editor Popup See The Time Editor Popup Location Programming Section left See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key TRACK F12 e Function Open the Track List for the selected channel s See Sequences Track List e Location Programming Section under UPDATE See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key TYPE N A e Function Hold to select Type for each Direct Select section See Direct Select Content e Location In the middle of the Direct Select Section See Direct Selects Introduction Console Key UPDATE U e Function Update currently active Preset See Presets Update e Location Top of Programming Section next to RECORD See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key WAIT Softkey N A e Function Sets Wait time to the A or B step of the Main Playback See Sequences Times e Location In the TIMES soft key page of the Main Display See Facepanel Console Main Display 532 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Key Wizard W Function Activate the Wizard function if appropriate for the current editor See Channel Editor Wizard See Import Wizard
200. ects iesise i eee esaties astees erates e ENEE 63 Create a Dynamic Intensity Effect oeeie a E EE A a RTE 63 Control a Dynamic Effect sees iee eis ei ea a EE REE E A E RARE 63 Record A Dynamic Effect To A Master 64 Stop A Dynamic Eet egenen sees onesie pose A EE E agin omen 64 Create a Dynamic Device Effect signi ee EENEG 64 Eu 65 Navigating Introduction gysccsyccssssheenseeystescseonsevasedeeed seas sous suveghedansenednteceqnadtern tees 66 The Navigation Padin oeni eneee AEN taste AVEN E A ER E 66 The ARROW EE 66 The ESC R Oye nae E E EEE ETE E E i n E 67 The MODIFY Key ssccsvcoscossssacsosaviasessavsavcovavcescosavsavcovavdestesavcavcovavdascovavdavtovavdaseniandavensaviatenseve 67 The Mevel Wheel a e E E T E tae Mas a ea heed E EREN 67 Navigating e EE 68 Browser Controls A2 ee e rette Se Edge ee EE ee an 68 Browser Functions LOAD 69 KEN KEE 70 Navigating ROCK EE 70 Tab Setup sand Lock 4 2 euer NEES EEEA EENEG 70 Navigating Channel Views 7 71 Channel View Zoi se eroe el ae ies a ee 71 Channel View Formats Selected cece eesesssesecseeeeceseeeceseceeesecseesecsaeecsaeceessecaeesesaesneeeeens 72 Channel View Format Selected and non zero GL2n 72 Channel View Format Selected And Captured 21 73 Channel View Format Layout cee eieecsesscsseeeceseceeesecaeesecnaeecsaeceseecsaeceessecaeeseeneseeeaees 73 KEE 74 Navigating In Lists ict cutunictaiinn E E See Ed 74 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 BEER 7
201. ed Tracked To SY Track To Wizard StopAt 6 219 0 Slut Track Channels In Presets 4 1 Track the current channel selection in all Presets Function Key Feedback Track in Presets TRACK amp PRESET Track List for Presets is opened Track list for Presets 3 Track List 9 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 9 See Track Channels Show Levels amp Attributes 4 1 Track Channels Groups 4 1 Track the current channel selection in all Groups Function Key Feedback Track in Groups TRACK amp GROUP Track List for Groups is opened Track list for Groups 3 Track List Group 450 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Track Channels Palettes 4 1 Track the current channel selection in Palettes Focus Color Beam All See Track Channels Show Levels amp Attributes 4 1 Function Key Feedback Track in Focus Palettes TRACK amp FOCUS Track List for Focus Palettes is opened Track in Color Palettes TRACK amp COLOR Track List for Color Palettes is opened Track in Beam Palettes TRACK amp Track List for Beam Palettes is opened Track in All Palettes TRACK amp Track List for All Palettes PALETTE is opened Track list for Focus Palettes Focus Palettes Text Track list for Color Palettes Color Palettes Text Track list for
202. ed object is copied Cut COPY CUT The currently selected COPY CUT object is cut Paste PASTE The last copied or cut object is pasted NOTE When you paste a Sequence step in the Sequence Editor it will be inserted before the currently focused step When you paste a Preset in the Preset Editor you will overwrite the content of the currently focused preset Texts can be copied with the shortcut CTL C from a keyboard Copy Cut amp Paste Attributes 4 3 In the Preset List it s possible to copy cut and paste attributes for the selected channels from any step to any other step 1 Open the Preset List 2 Goto the Attributes Column 3 Select channel s to copy or cut from 4 Press COPY to copy press COPY again to CUT see the confirmation in the message bar at bottom of the screen Move to the attributes colum for the Preset you wish to copy to Press PASTE On 393 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 ENTERING TEXTS Almost every item in a Play can be labelled with a text The texts are entered from a keyboard and there is a special TEXT key that can be used to quickly edit the text of a Sequence Step or a Preset Group in a Master IMPORTANT NOTE If you have an external keyboard with a NUM LOCK key connected you have to activate NUM LOCK for the numerical keypad in Congo to work This is because the numerical keypad is the same one The TEXT Key 4 3 Press
203. ed up programming This chapter contains the following sections Groups Introduction Groups Record Groups Select Channels 4 1 Groups Fetch Intensities 4 1 Groups List Groups Display List Groups Load To Playbacks 4 1 201 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Groups Introduction You can store channel combinations into groups The difference between a group and a Preset is that a group does not necessarily need levels for the channels involved only the channels selected are stored regardless of how many other channels are active Groups also do not contain moving light attributes For editing groups see Group List Functions Groups are accessible from the remotes See Remote Control Group functionality Only selected channels are stored in a group Each group will remember the order in which channels were selected to create the group Groups are not automatically inserted into the Sequence in the Main Playback Each group can have a text label A group can be selected in the same way as a single channel A group can be loaded to a Master or a channel layout Preset numbers 900 999 are reserved for Expert style groups 202 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Groups Record Only selected channels are recorded The selected channels can have a level but it is not necessary Function Key Feedback Record a new Group with RECORD amp You will get a
204. eeeeeeeteeeeenes 356 Device Templates Scroller Kolle cc siicissecceiiven acts sesides Watenevnncdeatasuaaceoaees 357 Scroller Rolls Editor Columns 357 Creat a Scroller Roll Ges schter Wee REE AA ee EE 358 Assign A Scroller Koll uge na EEEN EAA SEKERE EKETA 359 Calibrate Individual Scroller Rolle 360 Scroller Pan Override Zens sickest red ENEE tuned 360 Device Templates Import Template Wizard Ji 361 Devices Media Servers 431 362 DYNAMICS EE 363 Dynamics TOU EE 364 Ren dE 365 Start Dynamics By Number iccsssisaesgei ies esos ann E RE DNE E EES 365 Start Dynamics From The Effect Library Tab 365 Start Dynamics From The Effect Library Node In The Browser 365 Start Dynamics From The Direct Selects A 366 Start Dynamics With Direct Mode 366 Dynamics Control ys saa cee erleedegen 367 Clear Dynamics Soft Keys 4 1 reniato esere etree eeaeee rae EErEE RE EEEE a 367 Dynamic Wheels Size Rate Offset amp Delay GI 368 Live Dynamic Effects Display List 368 Keep Dynamics In Next Preset OI 368 Set Distance In 4 1 EE 368 Dynamics Edit Live Dynamics Editor 21 369 Live Dynamic Effects Columns 370 Dynamics ER ee Eeer 371 Stop Dynamics Maas eigenen SEENEN eege 371 Activate A Dynamic Stop Table cc enar e i e E E R 371 Delete A Dynamic From Running Dynamics ssssseeseseseseseeeerseseereetsteresesrerreressesesreeeees 372 Delete A Dynamic Using The Dynamics Display OI 373 Fade In A Preset In The Main Play
205. eenaeees 48 Quick Tour Control Hietar Ci yiscc ts seassoyeedhcivescsesgorceastageecaia eae eeecseo as 50 Playbacks Introduction aserre arar orse ues Ehee E E EER A e AE EES 50 Control Hierarchy Master Playbacks AAA 50 Control Hierarchy Main Playback AAA 50 Control Hierarchy Highest Takes Precedence sseeieseseeeeeeesesesesrerrererssesrsrerrerersesrereerees 51 Quick Start to Programming ssesssesssesesseesssressressersseessseessstessresseesseeesseesssresseest 52 Quick Start Reset The System nnenncenissitniii enno eissis 53 Reset The Console Facepanel 00 eee eeceeseeeeeeecesecesecesecesecsecaecneecaeecseseaeseeeseeeeeseeeensees 53 Check The Comte ENER EENS EE wide ante Gadus dais 54 Quick Start Conventional Lights ssessseeesseeesseesseesseesseeesseessseesseesseesseeesseee 55 Set Some Levels With The Wheel AAA 55 Record This To Master T oiie aero dS sassuastssasuioutasevsssuedsiasstasishsasessntiaeveb eara SEESE REEE ERCE 56 Record A Preset In The Main Playback 56 Crossfade With Default TIMES iniret eerren kiere sia erot e ib eA esa ESENES EEEREN REESS 57 Quick Start Moving DEVICES vissssessuseteisnavacagaavaaaseovaceasensedeasbovaanasvonseeesnnseatesones 58 Patch A Moving Device Or Scroller GL 31 58 KE ER 61 Record A Moving Device to a Master ceeeceseeseecsseeeceseceeesecseesecnaeeecsaeeeeesecaeeseeneeeeeaees 61 Record A Moving Device In The Main Plaxback A 62 Owick Start Dynamic Eff
206. el view to open the Channel Wizard gt Channel Editor Wizard bol 13 0 Selected channels Step 1 Select the channels levels to operate on in the Channel View Step 2 Select options and Execute Type of Change Set level Y Value 0 Change in Sequence Start at L 10 0 Stop at 4 13 0 Include if 0 NOTE You cannot reverse or undo changes made with this Wizard We therefore recommend you strongly to save your play before using this function 223 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Editor Wizard Type Of Change You can do the following commands through any range of Presets The parameter Include All Channels will affect channels with no level 0 as well and is necessary in some cases Set level Set level Add absolute Subtract absolute Add percent Subtract percent Swap chann Copy from channel Set min level Set max Function Explanation Set Level Set level Add Absolute Add to all levels Subtract Absolute Subtract from all levels Add percent Increase with of current levels Subtract percent Diminish current levels with Swap channels Change levels between the selected channel and the channel in Argument Copy from channel Copy all levels from the selected channel to channel in Argument Set min level Sets a minimum level HTP with the current levels Se
207. elp Language Select a language with MODIFY and confirm with MODIFY Reboot the system to activate Fileserver Path If you are using a file server define the complete play path following window play path standards here Example D congo backup internal path folder landers playfolder external server name folder 192 168 1 1 plays external Paddress folder Inverse LCD Inverts the colors for the Master and Direct Select LCD s in the console facepanel Channel Downgrade Select less channels to optimize the system not very common Swap 0 and C buttons Swap the physical location of the numerical keypads 0 and C buttons do so in the console as well physically 416 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Login Settings Time Settings Selecting TIME SETTINGS and pressing MODIFY or click opens the embedded XP Time Settings They are displayed in the language of the installation n LL OA System settings 2 General System name Congo Preferred language english Preferred help lanquage File Server path Inverse LCD Channel downgrade Time settings Date and Time Properties 2 xj Date amp Time Time Zone Internet Time LS SAs 6 7 8 9 10 it 12 GB 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 417 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Login Settings International Selecting INTERNATIONAL and pressing MODIFY or click opens the embedded XP In
208. ensity will be able to be controlled by the Grand Master and Black Out key when set up with an Intensity parameter This is useful for controlling a softlight or LED fixture with color mix coming from colored fluorescents that also are light sources It makes it possible to mix a color and fade the intensity of the result without changing the Hue color mix result For LED fixtures a false output should be patched to the channel to take advantage of the Fade with Intensity and Grand Mastering features of the console 356 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Templates Scroller Rolls Scroller Rolls are defined in the Scroller Roll Editor It is opened from the Browser Browser gt Patching gt Scroller Rolls 3 Scroller Rolls Scroller Roll On Off On Scroller Rolls Editor Columns Fan Intensity Default Time Text 3 Standard Roll 1 FOH Roll 1 Revolution Function Value Feedback Scroller Roll 1 999 The ID of each Template Press MODIFY to open the Editor Fan Intensity On Off Press MODIFY to toggle if Fan should follow intensity channel of the scroller Device to keep down noise when not in use providing the scroller and template have a fan parameter Default Time Os 45min This is the default time per frame the scroller will use when changed manually to keep down noise and save the gel string Text Press MODIFY to activate and end text input 357
209. ent play you will be asked to save 4 2 9 Confirm or don t Use arrow key to select your choice and MODIFY to confirm it The selected Play is loaded H the Browser already was selected it will be closed Press BROWSER again to reopen If Floppy File Server or USB files are not shown you can update this node by clicking on it Save A Play 4 3 Everytime a play is saved a backup version 1 9 is stored and subsequently overwritten You can create subfolders by pressing INSERT in the file node of the Browse 4 2 28 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 The key shortcut for saving a play is C amp UPDATE save or C amp RECORD save as 4 2 You can also press CTRL S on a keyboard Function Key Feedback 1 Open the Browser If it was already selected it will be closed Press again to open 2 Go to Files Down Arrow Files is highlighted 3 Open subnodes Right arrow Subnodes are opened Choose target drive Play Archive Hard drive in console USB if inserted or Floppy if connected 4 Select Save as Down Arrow Save as is highlighted 5 Open subnode Right Arrow Subnodes are opened 6 Select Play Archive Down Arrow Play Archive is highlighted 7 Confirm Save As You will get a popup where you can name the play from the keyboard in master display 2 8 Select OK Down Arrow OK is highlighted 9 Confirm The show is saved and the show name is disp
210. ependent Mod es s 5 seiecesssesesveaesestyeshocssveossenevesessasnesssdatsssspcsneecsevabassesseesobsdsteschpssausotsys 119 Independent Dock Areas 4 2 irra aari r a E EA Ee ER EAEN ATE EEEN 119 KE 120 Direct Selects Introduction GL 321 121 Direct Selects Content 4 2 0 gedet deet Sege 122 Content Types GT ut seit sccsebenees aby sad ste REENEN SEN 123 DifSCt ER EE 124 Ditect Selects Saye erte Dees Eed 125 Direct Selects Direct Mode 21 126 MURS VSS NG EL TN ie dh Silas sds Sele EE EE 127 Troubleshooting Lights Are Not Responding seeeeeeseeeeeseeererersrrererreeseese 128 Troubleshooting You don t understand a function sseeseeeeerereesererrereeseee 129 Troubleshooting Crashes amp Bugs ceccceessecesssecessceceeeeecesneeceeneecneneeeenaeerenas 130 An Error Popup Appears copy log LIi 130 What todoafter a Crash ege vest see ee eege ee N Rik EN i Benes ess 130 Making a crash or b g report ue aia A a ous Rie RE A n K 131 Troubleshooting Reset 4 1 sicsscccsesoctavsdeads docesaptcbeedueesdusosadentszeacs essacagusedeannbes 132 Troubleshooting Help from ETC Technical Services 133 ETC Technical Services United Kmsgdom 133 ETC Technical Services Americas ccccccccccsccessceescesssceeseecesseeeseeceseeeeseeceseeeaeecseeeeeaeees 133 5 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 ETC Technical Services Asien 133 ETC Technical Services e 133 Troubleshooting Network Problems 421 134
211. equences List Sequences Sequence List Sequences Crossfade Movefade Lockfade Sequences Times Sequences Insert Step Sequences Delete Step Sequences Links Sequences Load Sequences Track List Sequences Playlist Sequences Build amp Modify Modes Sequences Fade Curves 4 1 229 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Introduction A sequence is a list of sequence steps Each step always contains a preset Each time a Preset is recorded in the Live tab a new Sequence step is created with that Preset A Sequence Step consists of two main components Item Contains Read More Sequence Step Data Fade Times Auto Times See Sequence List Text Master Link Master Page Link Macro Link GoOnGo flag for Attributes Preset Intensities Dynamics See Preset List Attributes and Attribute Times General Facts You can rearrange the order in a Sequence at anytime The same Preset can exist in several sequence steps and sequences You can set times to every channel and parameter in a sequence step Sequences can be played back from the Main playback or any Master Playback You can create up to 999 sequences You can link any Master Playback to a sequence step You can trig a Sequence with MIDI and Time Code You can play back any Sequence in Chase looped mode with BPM and rate There is always a default sequence in the Main Playback 230 Congo and Congo Jr V
212. ersion 4 3 070328 Sequences In The Main Playback When you open a new play there is a default sequence 1 in the Main Playback When you record a Preset in the Live field it will be added to the sequence in the Main playback These are the sequence functions for the Main Playback Function Key Feedback Record a new Preset and sl RECORD Each time a Preset is create a new step recorded in Live it is added as a new step to the sequence loaded to the Main Playback Edit a Sequence Step MODIFY amp Opens the Sequence List PLAYBACK J for the sequence in the Main Playback See Sequence List Navigate in the Sequence See Main Playback of the Main Playback Unless the mode Build Sequence is off See Playback Soft Key Page 231 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Playback views 4 3 The Playback views normally have a packed format like this There is an unpacked format 4 3 as well see below i Main Playback 2 Live Seq l Example of sequence 1 1 0 First Ste La Note To the right is a graphkal representation of this fade with IN time 5 seconds and OUT time 5 seconds Red front It provides highlighted information about the current step and a graphical time representation for the next step Notes are shown with a yellow flag and displayed to the left of the graphical view for the next step There are progress bars for A B at the top
213. es Settings Channels Crossfade Masters System Attributes Outputs MIDI Default Go Time Default Go Back Time Modify Sequence Build Sequence Crossfade both ways Set times to GOTO jumps to Disable PB Rubberband Always start dynamics on Go Don t loop sequence Don t advance playback Show sequence numbers Alert Alarm time Beep on Alert 403 Crossfade Settings 4 3 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 The Crossfade Settings are general for the Main Playback Function Explanation Default value Default GO Time The Time used by the GO key when no 5 times have been assigned to a crossfade Default Go Back Time The Time used by the GO BACK key 2 when pressed independent of any ongoing fades Modify Sequence Deactivate all Auto times Master Links Off and other Autostart items for all Sequences Build Sequence Presets recorded in LIVE will On automatically be stored in the Sequence of the A B Playback They will always be stored in the Preset List Crossfade both ways Crossfaders make a crossfade both up Off and down instead of only up Set times to Times are set directly to the Sequence B Step in the A field or the B field GOTO jumps to GOTO fades to Preset numbers or Preset Sequence Step numbers Disable PB Rubberband Disables attributes from the faders of the Off Main Playback Always start Dynamics Sets Dynamics to start on Go regardless Off on Go
214. es CONTROL Aux 1 Control The parameters that exist for the parameters Dummy che etc selected device are shown with their values There is a popup to confirm deleting a device T Delete device Do you want to delete all attributes for channel 34 Preset Attribute Editor Times You can toggle the format of the Preset Attribute Editor to show Times and Delays by pressing FORMAT The current Format is shown in the bottom right corner See Device Times Attribute Time Editor 304 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Devices Times Times for Moving Devices can be set in seconds or as a percentage of the Sequence Step In times This chapter contains the following sections Device Times Introduction Device Times Percent or Seconds Device Times FCB Time Device Times Attribute Time Device Times Editor Device Times Default Attribute Time 305 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Times Introduction 4 2 A Moving Device can have Times and Delays in the following ways e No time follows the Sequence Step In time e Parameter group times an attribute time for FOCUS COLOR or BEAM parameters e FCB times Same as above but there is a shortcut for setting all three 4 2 e Device parameter times A time for each attribute of a Moving Device NOTE All times are set to the Preset in the A or B field depending on the setting of the parameter S
215. es 391 Dynamics KO 392 COPY UIE Q PASTE E 393 Copy Cut amp Paste Attributes 31 393 ENTERING TEXTS EE 394 The TEXT Key E EE 394 Text From The Console Keyboard LI 395 IMPORT WIZARD cenieni dain oie ave ae 396 Import Wizard FUNCtHOMS 5 0 c6c isieiee cases ececeues tnececoessnesceocnseg eteo ESEE ECE ENEP ENE SEAN 396 Wizard Limitations Show data 397 Import Wizard Limitations Patch 397 Import Wizard Limitations Setup 397 Import Wizard Strand 21 398 Import Wizard ETC Express Expression Emphasis 71 398 Import Wizard Avab Expert 21 399 Import Wizard Avab VLC Safari 2 399 SET LING See E sels ts ee I gs ie a eae 400 Settings ILOCOS MON EE 401 DG IMS RT 402 Channel Settings 4 2 Scscessscscevsascacesceastcdecaiuecentsvia ces a e ro e e rE EE E deetdeptendeeee 402 Settings TE 403 Crossfade Settings 4 3 EE 404 KE 405 MasterSettin gs A sD EE 405 SELIM Sr VSS a AE E E E E T 406 System Settings EE 406 EIDEN 407 Attribute TEE 408 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Settings a ut iiias ioen sien sn e Epona S EEE suesnetessneadeases 409 Output Settings EEN 409 Settings MIDI A D EE 410 INDENT C A S E 410 DISPLAY TUS TS Gl EE EE 411 LOGIN SETTINGS EE 413 Login Settings Introduction EE 414 Login Settings Editing 4 2 sessessssssesseesseessesseesseesssressressersseesseressseessrese 415 Login Settings General Functions 31 416 Login Settings Time EE 417 Login Settings Intemat
216. essed that item is activated Keys that enter Direct Mode when held Key Function Focus Palettes Color Palettes Beam Palettes All Palettes Wheel Parameter Any wheel parameter can be pressed to get direct access to all range positions This includes scrollers Including range tables 4 2 Select channels in Group DYN EFFECT Activate Dynamic Effect for selected channel s CLIENT Activate Client permissions 126 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Troubleshooting When you run into a problem with this system there are few probable reasons This chapter contains the following sections Troubleshooting Lights Are Not Responding Troubleshooting You don t understand the function Troubleshooting Crashes amp Bugs Troubleshooting Reset 4 1 Troubleshooting Help from ETC Technical Services 127 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Troubleshooting Lights Are Not Responding If you have lights dimmers devices connected and they are not responding check this list Is the device powered properly Is the device set to receive the protocol you have set the board to transmit Is the device receiving a signal from the console Is the device set to the right channel address Is there a light source connected to the device Is it a lamp failure Is the device circuit breaker thrown If not
217. et el PRESET Fetch levels from a Preset for the selected LONFETCH channels Add channels from Preset C PRESET amp Subtract channels from Preset C PRESET amp Add a range of Presets until Preset C PRESET amp THRU Levels from Preset are fetched Tel PRESET amp Load channel selection to a Master PRESET amp Master Key Bring Preset in proportionately on the wheel C PRESET amp Wheel Load Preset to LIVE clearing all previous light Tel PRESET amp LIVE Add Preset to BLIND PRESET amp BLIND Load Preset to a Master Playback PRESET amp Open the Preset List PRESET Open Preset List focused at Preset sl MODIFY amp PRESET 551 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Groups 4 1 Groups can be loaded and recorded in many ways There are shortcuts also for selecting all channels in a Group or fetching the levels See also Shortcuts Recording Functions DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Record a Group in a Channel View sl GROUP amp RECORD Select all channels in a Group sl Group Fetch levels from a Group GROUP amp ON FETCH Add channels from Group CarRouP amp Subtract channels from Group GRouP amp C Add a range of Grou
218. et Clear Number of dimmers Starting at desk channel DMX Address DMX Universe Replace existing dimmers 58 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Press TAB to select the Patch Device Tab Patch Wizard Patch Dimmer Patch Device Set Clear Type of device Mac 300 M4 Number of devices 1 Starting at desk channel Block of 13 outputs needed DMX Address DMX Universe Output offset Replace existing dimmers vY Scroller roll No Scroller Roll Open the IMPORT TEMPLATE wizard MODIFY NOTE 4 3 A standard scroller is imported by default if you are patching such a scroller skip this step and go to step 5 Select Manufacturer and Device arrows and MODIFY Import Template Wizard Import from Standard Library Manufacturer ETC Device Revolution 59 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 5 Enter the number of devices MODIFY el a Patch Wizard Patch Dimmer Patch Device Set Clear Type of device Mac 300 M4 Number of devices 1 Starting at desk channel Block of 13 outputs needed DMX Address DMX Universe Output offset Replace existing dimmers Scroller roll Scroller Roll 6 Select which desk channel you wish to start assign from MODIFY 7 Enter the DMX address 1 for example of the device MODIFY 8 Enter the DMX universe 1 for example for the device MODIFY 9 Check Replace existing dimmers unless you want
219. et Times To Field in the Congo Settings All attribute times are stored with a Preset There is a default Attribute Time that is used when Moving Devices are positioned manually or with GolnB See Moving Device Times Default Attribute Time 306 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Times Percent or Seconds 4 2 Times for Moving Devices are set in seconds absolute or as a percentage of the IN time of a Sequence Step The default setting is percent This means that all FCB Times will equal the IN time of a Sequence Step and all FCB Delay Times will execute as a percentage of the IN time 4 2 of a Sequence Step NOTE In all plays files earlier than 4 2 the FCB Delay time was set to 100 due to the fact that Delay Times were inherited from the Delay In time These plays pre 4 2 with FCB Delays set to 100 will be converted to use a delay of 0 instead 307 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Times FCB Time FCB times are defaulted to run in 100 of the main In and Delay times for a step You can change this or set a time in seconds FCB times are overrun by Device Parameter times You can set these times directly in the Advanced tab of the Recording Popup or with key shortcuts When you set a time you will get a popup asking if you want to set the times on an FCB level or as individual Parameter Times WE et Set attribute times You can set times either to the p
220. ets and Palettes A channel selection can be tracked In the Sequence of the Main Playback In the Sequence of a Master Playback In all Sequences In all Presets In all Groups In all Palettes Focus Color Beam All In the Play Sequences Presets Groups amp Palettes 4 2 From the Browser it is possible to track e Where Presets are used in Sequences e Where Palettes are used Focus Color Beam All NOTE You can press MODIFY in the first column of any track list to open the corresponding editor for that item There is a limit of 30 columns of data in all Track Lists to avoid creating huge spreadsheets if many channels with many parameters are selected As long as a Track List is open the tracking commands UPDATE amp LEVEL and UDATE amp ATTRIB are blocked to avoid confusion IMPORTANT Be careful using track editing or unblock wizard in a show where presets appear in multiple sequences or on masters as well as sequences since the changes follow through in all places 446 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Track Lists 4 1 Any selection of channels moving devices can be tracked Once the Track List is opened you can view and edit levels directly 3 Track List Main Playback Step Preset Text NOTE In all Track Lists with attributes Seq Preset Palettes both attributes and levels can be toggled on off See Track Channels Show Levels amp Attributes 4 1
221. ette All Palette PALETTE Values are set from Palette NOTE Only selected channel s that are referenced in Palette will be 325 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Palettes Direct Mode When a Palette key FOCUS COLOR BEAM PALETTE is held the first 40 Palettes can be activated from the Direct Select keys Function Key Feedback 1 Activate Direct Mode Hold a Palette key Direct Select display shows the first 40 2 Select Palette Direct Select key When the key is pressed that Palette is activated 326 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Palettes In Masters Device Palettes can be played back from Master Playbacks See Master Playbacks Palettes 327 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Palettes Select Active Channels All channels currently referencing a Palette can be selected using the Direct Select keys for Palettes FOCUS COLOR BEAM PALETTE in combination with CH and ALL Palettes are selected from the Direct Selects for this function See Direct Selects Function Key Feedback Channels in Palette CH amp All channels stored in Direct Select Palette are selected in the active Channel View Channels in Palette with ALL amp All channels with a level a level in the Channel Direct Select in the active Channel View View are selected 328 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4
222. etup SETUP amp ATTRIBUTE it is possible to specify an Override value for all Scroller Fans If you set a value gt 0 this value will be used instead of the Fan values programmed in the Scroller Roll This is useful for making a temporary and absolute override of all fans for example during long rehearsals when heat is higher than during a performance 360 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Templates Import Template Wizard 4 2 Templates are imported from external libraries or from another Play e To import from the libraries use the Import Template Wizard in the Browser Browser gt Patching gt Import Template Wizard This wizard is automatically opened from within the Patch Wizard as well See Patch Wizard e User templates from other Plays are imported with the Import Wizard See Import Wizard 1 Open Import Template Wizard from Browser gt Patching gt Import Template Wizard Import Template Wizard Import from Standard Library Manufacturer ETC Device Revolution 2 Select Library standard or Extended see NOTE below 3 Select Manufacturer 4 Select Device mode The imported Template is added to the Templates node of the Browser gt Patching NOTE Standard or Extended Library There are two libraries of templates standard smaller and extended larger both are accessed from the Import Template Wizard 4 2 We recommend that you use the extended library if you cannot fin
223. ew But when you select this format the next time a new scan through all groups and presets will be made and they will disappear again if they don t have recorded levels 181 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Information basic 4 2 Function Screen Explanation Dimmer Channel Channel number top and 53 level under Moving Device or scroller Channel number is yellow there is an extra box for palette info The box under will show the template or Text A of the Channel Database if defined 4 2 Selected Yellow frame indicates selected Selected and source of Yellow frame and in the AB highest level 5 top right corner the source of the current highest 33 level Captured Red background for channel number Fade direction An arrow for down green and up blue Parked 4 2 Channel is dimmed and PARK is written under Values are shown Masters are 1 40 Main Playback is AB and Independents are displayed as I 182 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Information detailed 4 2 Function Screen Explanation Changed intensity Purple background for intensity 4 2 Changed moving device parameters Purple background for the letter FCB to indicate what parameter group has changed 4 2 Yellow FCB means moving white means will move in next fade Source is Master or Main Playback
224. f EDMX values calculated using the EDMX Start value in the Settings dialog Congo output 1 1 the EDMX Start number and all subsequent outputs are calculated from there 143 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Output List Select amp Patch Outputs 4 1 It is possible to select outputs directly with a Command Syntax in this list only in RPN mode Function Key Feedback Select an output G The output is selected in the list and in the top view Add an output to Ce The output is added to the current this selection selection Add a range of Is CRU The output range is added to the outputs to this current selection selection Patch this sl MODIFY The output selection is patched to selection of channel outputs to a channel 144 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Patch Device Settings 4 2 You can view and edit moving device settings in the Device Settings BROWSER gt Patching gt Device Settings There is a shortcut to open it hold MODIFY and press DEVICE See Introduction To Patching 4 Device Settings Item Channel Template Inv Pan Inv Tiit Mac 300 M4 Mac 300 M4 Mac 300 M4 Mac 300 M4 Scroller Scroller 101 1 101 102 1 102 Capture camera 401 1 416 Device Settings Columns amp Functions Swap Pan Tilt Column Input Function Item No input The number of this item cann
225. f each row of master faders See Master Playbacks Introduction Console Key Page N A Function Load the previous page to this row of Master Playbacks See Master Pages Location In the middle of each row of master faders See Master Playbacks Introduction Console Key PAUSE Ctrl P Function Pause an ongoing crossfade in the Main Playback See Main Playback Transport Keys Location In the Main Playback See Main Playback Introduction 528 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Key PAUSE in Master Playback N A Function Pause an ongoing crossfade in the Master Playback See Master Playback Playback Keys Location Next to the Master Playbacks See Master Playback Playback Keys Console Key PALETTE Alt P Function Activate All palette for the selected channels See Devices Palettes Xtra Hold RECORD and press PALETTE to record a new palette See Record An All Palette Xtra Hold PALETTE to activate Direct Select Mode See Device Palettes Direct Mode Location Navigation Pad right See Facepanel Console Main Display Console Key PARAMETER N A Function Sets the trackball to Parameter mode See Facepanel Trackball Location See Facepanel Trackball Console Key PASTE Ctrl V Function Paste a copied item in a List See Copy Cut amp Paste Location Programming Section next to COPY CUT See Facepanel Programming Section Conso
226. for the selected channels from a amp preset DYN EFFECT Open the Dynamics Editor for the current preset PRESET amp DYN EFFECT Keep the Dynamics in the next Preset softkey KEEP DYNAM 4 1 Dynamics are always fetched for all channels in the target Preset even if only one is selected 557 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Times Keys and shortcuts for setting times Times are set to the Active Sequence Step in A or the Next Sequence Step in B depending on the Time Settings See System Settings Crossfade DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Set an In Out time Set an In time CIN J Set an Out time OUT Set a Delay In time C DELAY amp IN Set a Delay Out time LJ DELAY amp OUT Set a Channel time J reno amp TIME to the selected channels Set a Parameter time Tel TIME amp Wheelkey Set a Channel Delay time 4 CHAD amp DELAY to the selected channels Set a FOCUS time el CME amp Focus Set a COLOR time el ME amp COoLoR Set a BEAM time Tal TIME amp BEAM Set a FOCUS Delay time L DELAY amp Focus Set a COLOR Delay time L DELAY amp COLOR Set a BEAM Delay time Tel DELAY amp BEAM Set a Parameter time Le time amp Wheelkey Set an FCB time TIME amp ATTRIB Set an FCB Delay time Tel DELAY
227. g Modes Device Recording Block Cues Device Recording Delete 336 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Recording Introduction 4 3 Only changed Device parameters are recorded This means that it is important to record all parameters a block cue in the beginning of each Sequence There is a check box for this in the Advanced Tab of the Recording Popup General Facts e There are four recording modes automatic popup manual all and active 4 3 e It is possible to record all attributes manually e Itis possible to record selected device s only e It is possible to record selected device s to any Preset e It is possible to set all or selected parameters to Changed NOTE The SET CHANGED softkey in the Devices soft key page of the Main Display allows you to force the flag changed for any parameter or parameter group See Device Recording Modes 337 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Recording Modes 4 3 There are three different Recording modes for recording Device attributes They are set in the RECORD SETTINGS Hold SETUP and press RECORD You will get this popup E e Settings Record Attribute mode Automat Auto save v These are the three modes Function Description Automatic default All changed attributes are recorded automatically Popup A popup is provided to confirm recording all changed attributes Manual No attributes are recorded
228. g Channels in a Channel Time Group 1 Select the Group in the Channel Time Editor 2 Add or remove Channels 3 Press UPDATE to store 240 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 The Time Editor Popup 4 3 The Time Editor also part of the Record popups Advanced tab allows you to edit the times of any sequence step from a popup Press MODIFY and TIME to open the Time Editor popup for the step in A or B see NOTE below Enter the number of a step first to open it for any step Jm A O Time Edit r Times Channel Times Preset 6 0 WAF Time Delay Out Out Delay In In FCB Times F Delay C Delay B Delay F Time C Time B Time 100 Attribute Times Channel Times NOTE The Time Editor follows the setting of the Times in A B parameter in the Congo Setup SETUP or F12 The WAF box allows you to toggle between Wait Alert and Followon time for this step 241 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 The first six existing Channel Times can be edited directly in the Channel Times tab be ae Time Edit r Times Channel Times Delay Red cyc Time Delay 3 Green cyc Time Delay 4 Blue cyc Time The Times Soft Key Page 4 3 The Time Soft Key Page is selected with the soft key TIMES in the Main Display of the console Congo Congo Jr Ch Ch Wait Learn Time Delay Alert es Cc E on 242 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 These are the f
229. g to INT FOCUS Focus parameters COLOR Color parameters BEAM Beam parameters AUX 1 Control parameters AUX 2 Control parameters 348 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Templates Type LTP or HTP Each parameter in a Template can be set to LTP Latest Takes Precedence or HTP Highest Takes Precedence e _HTP 8 is used for intensity parameters e _LTP8 is used for 8 bit parameters e LTP16 is used for 16 bit parameters This is set in the Template Editor See Device Templates Editor Observe that the DMX offset of a parameter has to be incremented by 2 if the previous parameter is set to 16 bit resolution See Device Templates 16 bit Control 349 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Templates Type 8 16 bit control Some Devices have parameters that require 16 bit control Usually this is Pan or Tilt This is set in Type cell of the Template Editor e LTP 8 bit normal 8 bit control e LTP 16 bit 16 bit control 16 Bit Control And Wheel Behaviour The functionality of Coarse Fine 16 bit control is set in the Attribute Setup Hold SETUP and press ATTRIB Settings Channels Crossfade Masters System Attributes Outputs MIDI Record attributes as GoOnGo Press MODIFY to toggle Disable automatic GoInB logic Record Attribute mode Automatic Press MODIFY to toggle Attribute Editor default Palett Press MODIFY to toggle Default Attribute time 3 Time Use as
230. go and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Main Playback Edit Keys These are the editing and mode keys of the Main Playback Function Key Connect the Active A field to the channel A controls and open the A Tab Connect the Next B field to the channel B controls and open the B Tab Load a sequence to the Main Playback sl SEQ amp PLAYBACK Clear the Main Playback C Alt Ia PLAYBACK Activating the Playback Tab connects the A PLAYBACK field to the channel controls and selects the Playback tab 89 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Main Playback Time Settings Hold SETUP and press TIME to open the Settings Seen d N Settings Set times to Time Use as default Default Go Time Default Go Back Time Setting Feedback Set times to Times are set to the step in B default You can set them to the step in A as well Time Use as default Times for FCB will be set in of the main fade time Default Go time The default time is set to 5 seconds Default Go Back time The default time is set to 2 seconds 90 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Main Playback Default Settings Hold SETUP and press PLAYBACK to open these settings a NN Settings Modify Sequence Build Sequence Followon GOTO jumps to Crossfade both ways These are the default settings for the f
231. h to delete highlighted in yellow 3 Delete the selected You will get a popup step where you can choose to delete this step and the related Preset Are you sure Delete sequence step 4 Delete corresponding Preset NOTE When you delete a Sequence Step all assigned times links and texts are lost The Preset of that step can still exist in the Preset List and be used again 246 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Links A sequence step can have a link to Master fades a Master Page a different sequence step see NOTE in this explanation and a Macro All links are done in the Sequence List SEQ or BROWSER gt Sequences gt Sequence Step Links Master Playbacks Master Links are loaded when the Sequence step is loaded to the B field They are faded when GO is pressed or the crossfade faders are moved 4 Master Link List 268 303 sn an Selected and non zero channals Master ContentType Content in Wait Out Target Flash Mode Flash Level i Prs 9 0 Ane 100 On 100 Function Key Feedback Select the MastLink Arrow keys The column is highlighted column Open the Master Link List MODIFY The Master Link List is open Insert a link to Master g INSERT Master is linked with its current content and a target level of 100 ln the Sequence List NOTE All functions in the Master Link li
232. hannel Offset Relation Delay Relation Dis ce ex ade Loop Count Form 100 Evenly spread All 100 0 F F NOTE 4 2 If you start to select channels in Live Dynamics you will get a popup if you want the selection to affect the running effect or not Once you have said yes to this all channel selection will update the running effect until you close and reopen Live Dynamics RECORD and UPDATE cannot be used when this tab is focused Select LIVE to use them 369 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Live Dynamic Effects Columns Column Input Function Library Opens a dropdown to select a Dynamic Effect from the Effect Library Status No input Running status Cannot be edited Channels No input The amount of channels assigned to this Dynamic Effect Size MODIFY Set the size from 1 1000 See Size amp Rate Size Channel MODIFY Assign a size channel See Size amp Rate Rate MODIFY Set the rate from 1 1000 See Size amp Rate Rate Channel MODIFY Assign a rate channel See Size amp Rate Offset Relation See Relations amp Distance Delay Relation See Relations amp Distance Distance See Relations amp Distance Text Press MODIFY to activate and end text input Fade See Fade Loop Count Tel MODIFY See Loop Count Form See Form 370 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Stop Dynamic Effects can be
233. hannel View in Pool Lock tab from closing 2 Check the box Include Channel View in pool 79 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Live Playbacks 4 1 If you select a Playback for editing it will be live if the playback is over 0 In the main playback the A field is normally at 100 and the B field at 0 Action Key Feedback Edit a Master amp The Master editor is opened positioned at this master and the channel controls are mapped to this master Edit A ES The A channel view tab is opened and the channel controls are mapped to the A field Edit B The B channel view tab is opened and the channel controls are mapped to the B field Edit Live A CIVvE The Live channel view tab is opened and the channel controls are mapped to the A field E Move Live A to LivE amp BLIND The content of A is copied to Blind 4 1 Blind 80 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Blind This chapter contains information about controlling channels and devices blind leaving levels on stage unaffected This chapter contains the following sections H Blind Introduction e Blind Blind Tab H Blind Freeze Mode 81 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Blind Introduction Press BLIND anytime you want to control channels and devices blind All channel controls will be mapped to the BLIND field General Features e f you hold down LIVE and p
234. hannels DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Track in the Sequence of the Main Playback Track in all Sequences amp SEQ Track in the Sequence of a Master Playback TRACK amp Master Key Track in Presets TRACK amp PRESET Track in Groups TRACK amp GROUP Track in Focus Palettes TRACK amp Focus Track in Color Palettes TRACK amp COLOR Track in Beam Palettes amp Track in All Palettes TRACK amp PALETTE Track in All Play Data amp Formats Keys and shortcuts for toggling information on off in the Track lists with attributes DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Toggle Focus information FORMAT amp FOCUS Toggle Color information FORMAT amp COLOR Toggle Beam information FORMAT amp BEAM Toggle Parameter information FORMAT amp Wheel Key Toggle Intensity information FORMAT amp LEVEL 550 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Presets 4 1 Presets can be loaded and recorded in many ways There are shortcuts also for selecting all channels in a Preset or fetching the levels DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Record a Preset in a Channel View RECORD Record a Preset directly to a Master Playback RECORD amp Master Key Select all channels in Pres
235. he Live and Preset Dynamic Effect tabs in the Fade column Action Key Feedback Size default Size will fade in and out on the time for the corresponding attribute Rate Rate will fade in and out on the time for the corresponding attribute S amp R Size amp Rate will fade in and out on the time for the corresponding attribute None Activating a new attribute value will stop a corresponding dynamic directly Intensity Dynamics When a Stop Table is activated the Dynamic Effect will fade out on the in time of the corresponding sequence step If the Stop Table is assigned manually the effect will snap out Attribute Dynamics When new attribute values are played back from the Sequence they will fade from the Dynamic in the attribute time of that Sequence Step When they reach zero the Dynamic is deleted automatically See Dynamics Live Dynamic Effects See Dynamics Preset Dynamic Effects 387 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Form Form specifies the relation between the size for the Pan and Tilt parameters It is used to control the behaviour of Pan Tilt combinations like a Circle Normal value is 100 displayed as F F which means that both Pan and Tilt are equal in size e f you enter a value between 0 and 99 this will be used as the size for the Pan parameter showed as 0 F to 99 F e If you enter a value between 101 and 200 this will be used as the
236. he other parameter If there are both Range Tables and Ranges defined for a parameter the Range Table will be used if there is a corresponding range otherwise the normal Ranges will be used Define A Range Table 1 Define the ranges for the different modes of the Device See Device Templates Ranges 2 Define Range Tables for these modes in the corresponding function parameter Start by opening the Range Table editor by pressing MODIFY in the Tables column of the Template Editor 4 Template Range Table Editor FX lt gt Parameter Range Ranges FX 3 face 1 5 facet 1 FX LO FX 2 1 3 face R 5 face R FX 1 R FX 2 R 3 Use INSERT to create a Range Tables These are the options Function Key Feedback Parameter MODIFY Opens a dropdown Select the mode parameter that activates this Range Table Range MODIFY Opens a dropdown Select the range position in the mode parameter that activates this Range Table Ranges MODIFY Opens the Range Editor for defining these ranges When you make INSERT for additional Range Tables the parameter will be copied from the first defined Range Table 355 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Templates Fade With Intensity Fade with Intensity can be set in the Template Editor When On the parameter will be scaled through the intensity channel of the device Also the types of fixtures where color int
237. he tab is closed and opened again 75 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Navigating Misc Soft Key Page 4 2 The Miscellaneous Soft Key Page is selected with the soft key PLAYBACK in the Main Display of the console Congo Live Dynamic Effects Congo Jr Learn Play Park UnPark Macro List lt C md These are the functions Function Softkey Feedback Play back Macro sl Macro Macro is played back See MACROS Learn Macro el Learn Macro Macro is recorded See MACROS Playlist mode Playlist The Playlist is activated See The Playlist UnPark UnPark Is used in combination with other keys to unpark channel values See Park Suspend auto times in Modify Seq When on links and Main Playback wait followon times are not activated during playback 76 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Live This chapter contains general information about selecting and controlling channels and devices live This chapter contains the following sections e Live Introduction e Live Live Tab MM Live Playbacks 77 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Live Introduction Press LIVE to view and control all channels and Devices live The channel controls will be mapped to the A field of the Main Playback HTP Add any channel to the output by selecting it and raising the level It is piled HTP on top of the output from the A field
238. hing works you may want to use a DMX tester to check that there is DMX at the receiving devices 128 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Troubleshooting You don t understand a function Check this manual We ve put a lot of work into trying to make it as complete as possible FAQ The Frequently Asked Questions part is constantly under construction as new issues come to our knowledge Version Info You should always read the Version Info for any new update of software New functions may be added and old ones may have been changed See New Software Version Info 129 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Troubleshooting Crashes amp Bugs All software based products run the risk of a crash regardless of testing procedures In the unlikely event it happens please help us to eliminate problems with crashes and bugs by reporting them to us An Error Popup Appears copy log 4 1 If you get an error popup we have saved your show data and created two files log and dmp that can be saved to a USB memory if there is one connected to the console Mail these file to us It can help us solve your problem very fast 1 Make sure there is a USB memory in one of the USB slots 2 Open the Browser and select Copy Log files to USB Browser i About Congo apy Log files to USE 3 Mail both files log amp dmp to congo etcconnect com NOTE This has to be done directly The dmp file is a tempo
239. his example The focused link will be bold Results for scroller 1 Scroller Fan override 2 Assign A Scroller Rall 3 Patch A Moving Device Or Scroller 4 Create a Scroller Roll 5 Scroller Rolls Editor Columns 6 Calibrate Individual Scroller Rolls 7 Device Templates Scroller Ralls Navigating links is done like this MODIFY follows the focused link bold Action Key Feedback Next hyperlink C ALT IA Steps to the next Down Arrow hyperlink bold Previous hyperlink C ALT amp Up Arrow Steps to the previous hyperlink bold First hyperlink on page C ALT amp First hyperlink on this Left Arrow page is focused Last hyperlink on page C ALT amp Last hyperlink on this Right Arrow J page is focused Follow focused hyperlink MODIFY Follows the currently focused hyperlink Follow focused Hyperlink Right Arrow Follows the currently focused hyperlink 21 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Help System Favourites 4 1 Press NOTE in a Help tab to record a Favourite A dialog allows you to enter a pretty long descriptive text for the chapter you are tagging as a favourite Enter name for this Favourite Text arking chapter that explains This text is shown in the Info area when you focus on a Favourite in the Browser See Navigating Browser To delete a Note focus it in the Browser and press DELETE Help System Change Lang
240. hoose network and IP address if more than one is available ETCNet2 Check this feature if you are using devices or nodes receiving ETCNet2 ETCNet2 System Priority 4 2 Advanced A ETCNet2 parameter that decides the priority status of this system See ETCNet2 documentation ETCNet2 EDMX Start 4 2 Advanced Sets the start offset for the ETCNet2 net Avab IPX Check this feature if you are using devices or nodes receiving AVAB IPX ArtNet 4 2 Check this feature if you are using devices or nodes receiving ArtNet Streaming ACN 4 3 Check this feature if you are using devices or nodes receiving ACN Logical Network This is the logical network 0 9 used to transmit all output from this system Each server requires a logical network of it s own Advanced Settings Opens the embedded Windows XP network settings NCE Currently not used Backup Setup 4 2 Sets up the Backup Server status at startup See Network Backup Setup The system name that is exposed on Net2 is Congo the system name If you have EDMX enabled the EDMX number will be shown in parenthesis next to each output in the Output lists See Patch Output List The settings of the Logical Network will affect the AvabIPX settings Visualisation software such as Capture require Avab IPX to be ON 422 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 NETWORK 4 3 Co
241. hows how many channels devices that are stored with an intensity in this Preset Attributes Shows how many moving devices are stored in this Preset MODIFY opens the attribute editor Dynamics Shows how many Dynamics are stored in this Preset MODIFY opens the Dynamics editor Mask Open the Mask editor where you can mask any parameter FCB Time Hold C and press MODIFY to enter a time in seconds instead of of the main fade times FCB Delay Hold C and press MODIFY to enter a time in seconds instead of of the main fade times Note Opens the Note list for a note 4 2 216 Preset List Functions Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 These are the functions in the Preset list See also Copy Cut amp Paste Setting Key Feedback Open the Preset List PRESET The Preset List is opened Open the Preset List old MODIFY amp The Preset List is opened shortcut PRESET Open the Preset List ES The Preset list is opened focused at Preset MODIFY amp and focused at the PRESET specified Preset Update the focused UPDATE Updates all changes in Preset the current Preset Copy a Preset to number Tel RECORD Records a copy of the current Preset with this number Delete selected Preset DELETE Deletes the selected Preset Cannot be undone See Presets Delete Insert a new Preset with Ce Inserts a new Preset number with the channels and levels from Liv
242. if the intensity is exclusive Independent Dock Areas 4 2 The content of Independents can be assigned to a dock area See Dock Areas Configure Independents 119 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Direct Selects There are Congo four sets with ten Direct Select keys for quick access to Palettes Effects Groups etc Select Congo Jr content type and bank This chapter contains the following chapters Direct Selects Introduction Direct Selects Content Direct Selects User Setups Direct Selects Save Screens Direct Selects Direct Mode 4 1 120 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Direct Selects Introduction 4 3 The Direct Selects give fast access to stored data such as groups palettes effects and screens The Direct Selects have four sections with ten keys You can select Type of content and bank for each section You can store a complete setting of four sections to the five Setups Hold to select Bank per section Each Section has 10 direct keys 3 z i Congo Jr Direct Select ey RN Select Bank Hold to select Type press to activate section 1 4 When you press a TYPE key Direct Selects are activated for section 1 4 Then use BANK to select a Bank for this section Press TYPE again to exit You can enter a number 1 5 and press the top Direct Select key to access the five Setups that have direct keys in the big Co
243. ifferences in some cases In the HSV model if you fade down Saturation to 0 you need to reselect the Hue In the Preset Attribute Editor everything is displayed as CMY 296 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Devices Views There are two Moving Device Attribute Views one for editing Attributes Live and one for Attributes and Times in Presets This chapter contains the following sections Device Views Introduction Device Views Live Device Views Filtering Device Views Editing Device Views Presets 297 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Views Introduction 4 2 There are two device attribute views H Live Attributes e Preset Attribute Editor They are edited in the same way Both Attribute Editors have the possibility to edit set times 4 2 See Devices Times General Facts Devices are listed by type You can set attribute values directly depending on the Attribute Setup You can set Palettes directly depending on the Attribute Setup You can filter parameter groups Changed values are shown with a purple background Live You can view edit attribute times NOTE Hold FORMAT and press LEVEL to toggle levels between 100 and full 8 16 bit values 4 2 298 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Views Live 4 2 It is possible to view and edit all moving device parameters in the Live Attribute Editor ATTRIBUTE This tab
244. ile node Right arrow Opens a subtree of functions 4 Select New Down arrow New is marked in orange 5 Load a new play Opens a popup asking if you are sure 6 Confirm Press MODIFY to confirm You will get a popup with patch options for the new play Confirmation popup 5 if the current play has unsaved changes 4 2 E eh A Clear play Clear Play Play in memory contains unsaved changes New Play patch options 6 27 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 ey Play data has been cleared Select Patch options Set Patch 1 1 Open Patch Wizard See Patch Open A Play 4 2 When you want to open a play you use the Open command Browser gt Files gt Open Function Key Feedback 1 Select the Browser The Browser is selected on the left side of screen 1 Browser About Congo Files Setup Network Master Playbacks Master Pages 2 Go to Files at the top Arrow keys Files is marked in orange 3 Open the File node Right arrow Opens a subtree of functions 4 Select Open Down arrow Open is highlighted 5 Open this node Right arrow Opens a subtree of media choices 6 Select Media Down arrow Selected media Floppy Play Archive HD or USB is highlighted 7 Open media archive Right arrow A subtree is opened with all plays in the selected Media 8 Load the selected play Opens a popup If there are changes in your curr
245. ime between two steps between Wait Alert and Followon See Sequence Times Alert Times and Sequence Times WAF Wait amp Followon Times Part 2 Column Input Function GoOnGo MODIFY Toggle between GoOnGo and GolnB Controls if moving devices will move on GO or when the step is loaded in B next ChTime MODIFY Shows the number of channel times in this step Opens the channel time editor MastLink MODIFY Shows the number of master links in this step Opens the master link editor MastPage MODIFY Shows or edits which Master Page is linked ER Fade Curve Cl wopiFy Shows or edits which Fade Curve is linked GJ LinkToStep MODIFY Shows or edits which step this step is linked to TimeCode wopiFy View Edit Tiem Code for this step 4 2 Note MODIFY Opens the editor for a Note 4 2 Block MODIFY Blocks tracking through this step 4 2 Tracking 236 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Crossfade Movefade amp Lockfade When you record a new Preset to a Sequence you will get the option to store it as a Crossfade a Movefade or a Lockfade Each of these modes affects how channels in that Preset will be played back when a the next crossfade is started Function Shortcut Feedback Record a crossfade RECORD Normally a crossfade x is recorded This means that all channel values are replaced when a new crossfade is started
246. in Display See Facepanel Console Main Display 530 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Key SEQ S Function Open the Sequences List See Sequences List More Enter a number and press SEQ to open a Sequence List See Sequences Sequence List More Enter a number hold and press a Playback key to load Sequence See Sequences Load Location top right corner under the Grand Master See Quick Tour Console Facepanel Console Key SEQ X DownArrow Function Next step of the sequence in the Main Playback See Main Playback Transport Keys Location In the Main Playback See Main Playback Introduction Console Key gt gt SEQ In Master Playback N A Function Next step of the sequence in the Master Playback See Master Playback Playback Keys Location See Master Playback Playback Keys Console Key SEQ X UpArrow Function Previous step of the sequence in the Main Playback See Main Playback Transport Keys Location In the Main Playback See Main Playback Introduction Console Key lt lt SEQ In Master Playback N A Function Previous step of the sequence in the Master Playback See Master Playback Playback Keys Location See Master Playback Playback Keys Console Keys Softkeys N A Function The three keys on either side of the Main Display are softkeys with menus and functions The four keys under the Main Display are parameter keys for
247. in a sequence step Times are set from 0 1seconds to 49 59 minutes 0 1 4959 When no time is set to a sequence step the default time 5seconds will be used Change this setting by holding SETUP and pressing A The easiest way to set times to ANY step of the sequence in the main playback is to use the TIME EDITOR Enter the number of the step hold MODIFY and press TIME See The Time Editor Popup 4 3 NOTE Fade times of a Sequence Step are related to that step not to the Preset occupying the Step This makes it possible to use the same Preset with different fade times in other Steps or in the Masters To edit the times for a step open the Sequence List Sequence Times Set To A or B 4 3 Times are set to A or B depending on what situation you are working in The current setting is indicated with an arrow next to the times Out 5 In 5 It is possible to toggle if times are set to A or B by holding TIME and pressing A or B Sequence Times Main Times in out delay wait Times are set to the step in A Active or B Next depending on the setting for times SETUP amp TIME Function Key Feedback Set an In time ON A time is set for the incoming channels Set an Out time sl Tour A time is set for the outgoing channels Set In and Out time sl TIME A time is set for the in and outgoing channels Set a Delay In time DELAY amp iN A delay time is
248. in the Channel the Channel Control Control are selected Add channels in Master amp Master Key All channels in Master are added to the selection in the Channel Control Subtract channels in amp Master Key All channels in Master Master are subtracted from the selection in the Channel Control 102 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Channels You can load and play back single channels Function Keys Feedback Load channel s to PRESET amp The selected channel s Master Master Key with a level are loaded with that level as a Grp to the Master Playback Load channels one by one from Master CH amp Master Key The selected channels are loaded one by one to the Master Playbacks starting at the first one pressed 103 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Presets A Preset is played back with intensities attributes and dynamic effects Press the Master Key to select all channels in the Preset as a group Function Keys Feedback Load Preset to a Master Playback Master Key PRESET amp Preset is loaded to the Master Playback The number and name are shown in the master display Load all recorded Presets from Preset to the Master Playbacks Master Keys PRESET amp Hold Preset and keep pressing new Master keys
249. ined in the file CURVES DEF 3 Dimmer Curve List Dimmer Curve Name off Square Law Slow Bottom Fast Top Full at 1 Preheat 5 sat 10 Hotpatch Patch Dimmer Curve Editor 4 1 It is possible to create any kind of curve in the Dimmer Curve Editor Action Key Feedback 1 Open the Dimmer Curve List Browser gt Patching gt Dimmer Curve List The Dimmer Curve List is opened 2 Insert a New Curve A new curve is inserted You can name it in the Text cell 3 Open the Dimmer Curve Editor Press MODIFY in the Dimmer Curve cell to open the editor 155 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dimmer Curve Editor example Off On Curve 4 Dimmer Curve Editor Percent Output Interpolation Action Key Feedback 4 Insert a position A position is inserted You can set percent Output and if this step should use interpolation to the next step INTERPOLATION When Interpolation is ON the values to this point will be calculated smoothly from the previous point When Interpolation is OFF the value will be jumped to at this level NOTE If a curve does not have a 0 and 100 rows it will default to 0 0 output and 100 100 output 156 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Patch Output Editor 4 2 6 Output Editor View Only Channel selection mode 1 2 3 153 153 17 18 18 33 The Output Edi
250. ing lt until you have this page Congo Select zech Congo Jr SEITE LLL ae ech ee ed 320 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 2 Press DEVICE to select the Device Soft Key page Congo Live Dynamic Effects Congo Jr Flip Update Focus Set Clear ui U2 U3 Palett Mode Chnged Chnged Zen C T C TTO 3 Press UPDATE PALETTE to update all changed Palettes for the selected channel s You will get a popup confirming which ones are involved Device Palettes UPDATE direct key 4 1 If a Palette is loaded to a Direct Select section or to a Master Playback it is possible to update it by selecting the involved channels holding UPDATE and pressing the corresponding Direct Select or Master key NOTE This shortcut is currently not possible when an Editor is focused that uses UPDATE for something else For example the Preset List 321 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Re record A Palette Merge Or Replace When you re record a preset or palette where attribute information already exists you will get a choice of merging or replacing the existing attributes i i P e o gt Re record existing Palette z Type Existing Palette 1 Palette Name Tr Home Merge with existing Merge with existing will add the changes for the selected channel s Replace existing will replace all values in this Palette with those of the selected channel s 322 Congo and Congo Jr Versi
251. ion manufacturer mode data cable type Other components in your system Unison other consoles etc ETC Technical Services United Kingdom ETC Europe Ltd Technical Services Department 5 Victoria Industrial Estate Victoria Road London W3 6UU England 44 0 20 8896 1000 service etceurope com ETC Technical Services Americas Electronic Theatre Controls Inc Technical Services Department 3031 Pleasant View Road Middleton WI 53562 800 775 4382 USA toll free 1 608 831 4116 service etcconnect com ETC Technical Services Asia Theatre Controls Asia Ltd Technical Services Department Room 605 606 Tower Ill Enterprise Square 9 Sheung Yuet Road Kowloon Bay Kowloon Hong Kong 852 2799 1220 service etcasia com ETC Technical Services Germany Electronic Theatre Controls GmbH Technical Services Department Ohmstrasse 3 83607 Holzkirchen Germany 49 80 24 47 00 0 techserv hoki etcconnect com 133 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Troubleshooting Network Problems 4 2 If you are experiencing network problems using a Congo together with a laptop computer client visualisation etc make sure there is only one network active the one used for Congo Using a wireless LAN at the same time can create the following problems e Improper functionality of send fetch play e Improper interaction with media server SOLUTION Turn off all networks except the one used by Congo in the lap
252. ion Functions ccccccccssscessceesseceeececssecseececssecseeeecaecseseecsaeseseecsseseeneees 287 Select Change SOftk EE 287 Device Control Alen reci i aia a 288 DEVICE Control EE 289 Banten EE ee ENEE ebe eege 289 Device Conmol Pete EE 290 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Control Next amp Last Mode 291 Device Control Highlight Mode 431 292 Device Control Fp 4 jci na aaa a eee 293 Device Control Moving Light Dock Area 2 295 Device Control Color Mix Modes 71 296 DEVICES EE 297 Device Views Introduction 71 298 Deyic Views Live 4 2 EE 299 Live Attributes Columns 21 300 Deyice Views HUST 2 34 2s vcd EE 301 Live Attributes Channel Formats 721 301 Deyice Views MIND Go 2 05x caren v esas A A E A EE E 302 Device Views Presets GL 303 Preset Attribute Editor Columns GL 21 304 Preset Attribute Editor Times 304 Devices KEE 305 Device Times Introduction GL 21 306 Device Times Percent or Seconds GL 21 307 Device Times FOB Time tgegehe ege e ege ege 308 Device Times Attribute Time seseseseserererererererererererererererererererrrrrrererrreee 309 Device Times Attribute Editor Times 31 310 Attribute Times 4 52 WEE 310 Attribute Delay Times 4 2 reani Seet ere Deeg EE EES EA 311 Device Times Default Attribute Time 0 0 0 0 cccccccccccccesceseseseseeeeeeess 312 Device Times Fan Times 21 313 Re HE EE 314 Device Palettes In
253. ional sia eet heed ee a hase Steed genes 418 Login Settings Software Update 0 0 00 ceessceessecesncecesececeeneeceeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeaas 419 Login Settings Software Upgrade 420 Login Settings Networking 4 3 WEE 421 NETWORK A WEE 423 Network Introduction 21 424 Network E ee E i oc5 es so aae dacs ens seoacansanes tec ausacteae ess aeuanaeers 425 Network Fetch amp Send Play 21 426 Network Convert To Server Backup 427 Network Backup Synce 4 2 ccsisicscsscccescccnsssdoeieiavssucsisasendoanpavedsasedendtesnaceedanes 428 Network aC ee 429 Network Client CN 430 Network Multiple Users 4 3 s cccccccccessicccssscsscescsssscciennsvecsaseieataspessecansnecete tes 431 Multiple Users Global Functions 21 431 Multiple Users Local Functions 31 431 Network Unison Macros 321 432 Network EDMX and sACN Universe Map 31 433 MEDIA AD es alfa EE 434 Media Images From USB Camera IA 435 Media Images Delete 4 aeni an fos Secu ele ee Ee 436 Media Training Freunde 437 Training Projects Open Project 431 437 Training Projects The Camera GI 438 Training Projects Hints 1 439 ING EE E EE 440 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Notes Introduction 41 enges et ee 441 Notes Crete 41 ER 442 Notes BditOri 4s EE 443 Not Editot Columns 4 Irse isi cies hoki E eases bees E E Rh eats Re 443 Not Bditor Delete 41 usec cobs edd ces eege ere Ela ed Ai Rees RSS 444 TRACK 42 ET 445 Track Intr
254. irst row in Export options Otherwise it will export all of the attribute channels as separate channels for moving lights LIMITATIONS If there are multiple items units with the same channel number Only the item unit data for the last item unit will be imported This is of course because the multiple units use the same channel number and one channel cannot contain several different data s In this case each unit has its own row in the exported file so several rows have the same channel number If the Lightwright show includes several units patched to one channel there is no point in trying to import the Unit to Congo since only the last Unit will be imported Import Text File Excel 4 1 It is easy to import Channel Database texts from an Excel file Here are some good things to know If you have a nicely formatted list check example below and want to import this to the Channel Database you need to make sure the table only has headers at the top since these are recognized by the import tool Save as a Tab delimited txt file Example Data in Excel easy to import A B C Channel Purpose Position 1 truss 1 truss SL floor 2 truss 154 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Patch Dimmer Curves 4 1 A set of default Curves can be assigned to dimmers in the Output Setup It is also possible to create user specific dimmer curves When you open a new show 4 1 some default curves are loaded at start up conta
255. is can be done in any Playback or directly in the Preset List In the Preset List it can be done with the COPY function as well See Preset List and Copy Cut amp Paste Action Key Feedback Copy the Preset in the sl RECORD You will get a popup See channel view connected The Recording Popup to the channel controls to a new number 219 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Presets Select Channels 4 1 You can add and subtract channels that are stored in Presets to from the current channel selection Function Key Feedback Select all channels in a PRESET All channels with a level in Preset 4 1 the specified Preset are selected Add all channels in a PRESET amp All channels with a level in Preset to the current the specified Preset are channel selection added to the current channel selection Subtract all channels ina PRESET amp All channels with a level in Preset from the current the specified Preset are channel selection subtracted from the current channel selection Select all channels from a amp All channels with a level in Preset that have a level in arr the channel control that the channel control also have a level in the specified Preset are selected Select all channels in a sl PRESET All channels stored in range of Presets E FA every Preset from to THRU are sel
256. k List 4 1 All tracking features have been moved to the chapter TRACK See TRACK 255 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 CHASE A chase is a sequence set to chase mode which means it will constant loop during playback See Sequences This chapter contains the following sections Chase Introduction Chase Playback View Chase Playback Modes Chase Set Rate Chase BPM amp Tap Tempo Chase Wizard 256 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Chase Introduction A Sequence can be set to run in Chase mode This means the Sequence will chase endlessly through all Steps on the predefined times There are several parameters that can affect how it will run in Chase mode General Facts Chases are edited in the same way as Sequences In addition to Sequences they have Rate and BPM BPM can be set with TAP from the Master Playback A Chase has playback modes such as Reverse Bounce Single Shot You can link any chase to a sequence step You can play back a chase from any playback including the Main Playback 257 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Chase Playback View The Chase playback view is the same as the Sequence Playback view with some added functionality PL Main Playback Single Shot The added chase functionality appears under the sequence name display in the top of the Playback view The functions are described in The Sequences List Columns as well as the re
257. k levels of the selected PARK amp LEVEL Levels are parked channel s Park attributes of the PARK amp ATTRIB Attributes are parked selected channel s Park Focus parameters of PARK amp FOCUS Focus parameters are the selected channel s parked Park Color parameters of PARK amp Color parameters are the selected channel s parked Park Beam parameters of PARK amp BEAM Beam parameters are the selected channel s parked Park U1 U3 parameters of PARK amp U1 U3 U1 U3 parameters are the selected channel s parked Park specific parameters PARK amp Single parameter is of the selected channel s Wheel key parked 473 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Park Edit Parked Values 4 2 Parked values can be edited in the PARK column of the Channel and Output lists Select the cell enter a value and press MODIFY or click Both lists can be opened from the Browser gt Setup See Patch Channel List Channel Dimmer Address Device Device Address ale Park Name 101 1 101 100 Kees 100 102 1 102 100 100 See Patch Output List Output Channel Scaling Curve Device Info No curve curve urve curve urve curve No curve No curve No curve No curve No curve 474 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Park Un parking Values 4 2 The Parked status is indicated in the Live channel view PARK and in the at
258. keypad when work with the offline editor in a notebook computer A In most notebooks when you hold down the Fn key you will get a temporary numeric keypad that is incorporated from numbers 7 8 9 and down over the text keys This keypad can be activated with num lock as well but it gets tedious to jump in and out of this mode since any function keys are shared with the normal keyboard U S 050601 563 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Appendix Console amp Sound Settings There are settings for console displays and worklights and for sound This chapter contains the following sections e Console Settings e Sound Settings Console Setup The Console Settings are set from the node Console Settings in the Setup node of the Browser Browser gt Settings gt Console Settings You can set the values from 0 100 They will take effect immediately and are NOT related to different play files n en Console Parameter settings Master displays Backlight 100 Upper Master displays Contrast 100 Lower Master displays Contrast 100 Moving Light display Backlight 100 Contrast sos LED display Backlight 100 Contrast 100 LEDs Intensity 100 Trackball Intensity Littlights Intensity Sound Settings The volume of the internal speaker is set by holding SETUP and moving the level Wheel You will see the result in the value next to the loudspeaker symbol in
259. l ask you to Master key 1 confirm that you are recording The next free Preset number is automatically used 3 Confirm recording RECORD You have now recorded this to the Master You can test it like this Function Console Feedback 1 Set the selected device Col Focus The zero palette will set to it s home position the device to the default values of the template straight down and open white 2 Move master 1 from 0 Master 1 When you do so the look you stored should be activated on stage the Device attributes will not follow the fader down 61 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Record A Moving Device In The Main Playback Normally only changed moving device parameters are recorded Therefore it is recommended to save all parameters when you record a preset for the first time in a sequence 1 Record all parameters of the selected devices to the next free preset you will get a popup RECORD amp Attributes eee Record Attributes Record to current preset 127 0 2 Choose Merge then confirm by selecting MODIFY and pressing MODIFY A message at the bottom of the screen will confirm that the attributes were recorded NOTE You can test by selecting the moving device and positioning in a new position then crossfading to the preset you just recorded 62 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Quick Start Dynamic Effects Dynamic Effects allow you to assign a
260. l record Alert times automatically as a show is played back in real time by an operator This mode is activated with the soft key LEARN ALERT in the Times Soft Key page See The Times Soft Key Page Time Limit There is both a visual and an audio warning set to alert 5 seconds before the next fade You can change this time limit in the Time Settings See Settings Crossfade Visual The top part of the playback view will be green as long as the alert time is over 5 seconds At 5 seconds it turns yellow and after completion it turns red Example of sequence 6 0 Cyclo step fade Example of sequence 6 0 Cyclo step fade Example of sequence 6 0 Cyclo step fade The Alert time is edited in the Sequence List WAF and WAF Time columns It can be toggled to be a Wait or Followon Time as well See Sequences List See also Sequence Times WAF Wait amp Followon Times Sequence Times WAF Wait amp Followon Times 4 3 It s possible to set a Wait or Followon time between each step of a Sequence Wait A Wait time will execute the step it is on seconds after the completion of the previous fade Followon A Followon time will execute the next step seconds after the start of the fade The Followon time is displayed in the same way as the Alert Times See Sequence Times WAF Alert Times The Wait and Followon times are edited in the Sequence List WAF and WAF Time columns They can be toggled to be an Alert Time as well
261. layed in the top left corner of the screens Save as popup e EE e Save to fil Saving to Play Archive Please specify a valid file name Filename It is possible to set up a file server by specifying the play patch in the Login Settings See Login Settings General Functions 29 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Demo Plays 4 3 Demo plays are included in the Congo installation They are located in a sub folder of the Play Archive Currently there is one more will be added Sub folders are indicated with brackets around the name of the node Demo Plays There is a training tab with a visualiser module that you can open together with the demo play and work ina virtual learning environment See Media Training Projects 30 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Exit and Shutdown Always shut down your system correctly with the Exit function BROWSER gt File gt Exit If your console has a softpower button you can use that as well Function Key Feedback 1 Open the Browser If it was already selected it will be closed Press again to open 2 Go to Files Down Arrow Files is highlighted 3 Open subnodes Right arrow Subnodes are opened 4 Select Exit Down Arrow Exit is highlighted Browser About Congo L CTT New Open Save Save 4s Import from 5 Confirm Exit You will get a popup asking you to confirm and exit to the login screen 6 Se
262. le Key PLAYBACK X Function Activates the Playback Tab and connects the A field to the channel controls See Main Playback Transport Keys Location In the Main Playback See Main Playback Introduction Console Key PLUS Ctrl gt Function Add a channel to a selection See Select Channels Xtra Step to the next channel Xtra Can be held together with Master Key to add channels from that Master to the current selection Location Programming Section middle See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key PLUS PERCENT N A Function Add Level 5 See Set Channel levels Xtra Hold C ALT and press PLUS PERCENT to set 100 Location Programming Section middle See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key PRESET P More Used in combination with other keys to load to Playbacks See Presets Load To Playbacks Location Top of Programming Section next to UPDATE See Facepanel Programming Section 529 Console Key Console Key Console Key Console Key Console Key Console Key Console Key Console Key Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 REM DIM N A Function Dim all channels except those selected See Channels Rem Dim More Can be set to BALANCE See Channels Balance Mode Location Programming Section next to SEQ See Facepanel Programming Section RECORD R Function Record Presets See Presets Record More Press REC
263. lect Shutdown Right Arrow Highlights the Shutdown symbol in the login screen 7 Confirm Shutdown The system is shut down You can power off now NOTE The current play will be saved to a temporary file called SAVED ASC This file is loaded automatically the next time the Congo is powered up Power Loss 4 1 In early models of Congo with an internal UPS supply when Congo is shut down because of power loss a status message is shown and the screen background turns red The internal battery of the power supply UPS will keep the console running approximately two minutes after which it makes a controlled shutdown saving the Play NOTE The current play will be saved to a temporary file called SAVED ASC This file is loaded automatically the next time the Congo is powered up Always make sure to save a backup to an external media like a USB device It is your only protection against an internal hardware failure 31 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 System Info This chapter describes what is included in a Congo system This chapter contains the following sections System Info Installation Guidelines System Info Software amp Update System Info Console Specification System Info Interface Specification 32 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 System Info Installation guidlines Equipment required to run this system Congo or Congo Jr console a
264. lection Set a level to the selected 4 LEVEL The Master levels are set Masters to Set a level to the selected Wheel The Master levels are set Masters to Using a mouse or trackball Function Keys Feedback Using a mouse click Click to select and hold right key and move to set levels Click to add more double click to deselect all but the last clicked Open the Master Editor MODIFY amp click The Master Editor is opened Master View Formats 4 2 You can toggle between these formats by pressing FORMAT All Masters Selected Masters Active Masters Masters with content The currently selected format is indicated in the top right corner of each Master View NOTE In the All format there is a header bar visible for each row of masters that shows information about the currently selected master page Master View Dock Areas 4 2 Master Views can be assigned to a dock area See Dock Areas Configure 116 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Independents In Congo there are six independent Congo potentiometers In Congo Jr there are three independent potentiometers These can be used for e Adding light HTP e Removing light Inhibit e Independent lights Exclusive Both consoles have three independent keys These can be used for e Houselights e Smoke machines e Relays Congo Jr 117 Using the Independents Congo and Co
265. lette list to select a new Palette 6 Exit Focus Mode FOCUS MODE Focusing mode is exited Softkey 331 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Devices Play Back When moving Devices are played back from the Main Playback and the Master Playbacks there are different modes for when and how attributes are trigged This chapter contains the following sections e Device Play back Introduction e Device Play back Attributes Follow Faders e Device Play back GoOnGo or GolnB 332 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Play back Introduction Attributes will be trigged during playback in the following situations A Preset is faded in a Sequence or Chase A Preset is faded in on a Master Playback fader A Preset is faded out on a Master Playback fader A Master is flashed A Dynamic effect is started In a Sequence Step attributes can be set to GoOnGo live or GolnB move while black preposition 333 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Play back Attributes Follow Faders Attributes will follow the manual movement of masters and the crossfaders of the Main Playback e They start moving at 1 e Snap parameters also trig at 1 Master Playbacks behave different from the crossfaders of the Main Playback Masters And Attributes General When a master leaves its 0 position the corresponding attribute parameters are trigged and follow the fader During a timed fade in a
266. level START amp Master Key Toggle individual flash mode on solo off FLASH MODE amp Master Key Connect a master playback to the Master CONNECT amp Master Key playback Tap tempo for sequence on a master hold tap TAP amp Master Key and tap Master key You can also click on the Master View node in the Browser Shortcuts Masters amp Channels Functions for selecting channels to and from Master Playbacks DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Select the channels of a Preset Group in a Master Master Key Playback Add channels of a Preset Group in a Master Playback to amp Master Key the channel selection Subtract channels of a Preset Group in a Master amp Master Key Playback from the channel selection Select channels of a Preset Group in a Master Playback ALL amp which are active on stage Master Key Load the selected channels one by one to Master CH amp Playbacks Master Key Load the selected channels as a group to a Master PRESET amp Playback Master Key 543 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Master Pages Main keys and shortcuts for handling Master Pages Master pages are recorded loaded separately for masters 1 20 and 21 40 DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Load a Master Page PAGE Clear masters amp PAGE Record changes to curre
267. lind Freeze Mode 4 3 When the Output Mode switch is set to FREEZE the output is frozen and will remain static until the switch is set back to ON The output or Freeze is loaded to the A field of the Main Playback The Sequence will also reposition to where it was when you activated Freeze Action Feedback Activate Freeze All outputs will be frozen including moving devices You can work with all functions without affecting the output Deactivate Freeze The frozen output of Freeze is loaded to the A field of the Main Playback The complete output including all Master Playbacks is loaded to Freeze If all Masters are down when you exit Freeze there is no change in the output on stage NOTE Held 4 1 If you set the Output mode switch to Freeze before you start the application the output will not be updated until you move the switch to on This makes it possible to start without output and prepare the correct light before activating it on stage 4 3 This is indicated at the top of the screens with the text Output 84 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Main Playback The Main Playback is a theatre style playback for sequences Congo Congo Jr This chapter contains the following sections Main Playback Introduction Main Playback Manual Crossfade Main Playback Transport Keys Main Playback Edit Keys Main Playback Time
268. ll press MODIFY enter a text and press MODIFY to exit Insert a new item Inserts a new item with the next free number If you enter a number first the inserted item will have that number Delete selected item s DELETE Deletes the selected items cannot be undone Select all items in a COLUMN Selects all cells in a column from column the current cell down Select multiple cells SELECT amp Hold Select and use Right and Arrow keys Down arrows to select multiple cells Select multiple cells in CTRL and Hold CTRL and use the cursor to any column or order Click select multiple cells Keyboard amp trackball When you enter a value and press MODIFY it is applied to all selected cells Sort By Column Function Key Feedback Sort from low to high COLUMN amp The list is sorted by this Up Arrow column from low to high Sort from high to low COLUMN amp The list is sorted by this Down Arrow column from high to low These changes are temporary they will be lost if the tab is closed and opened again Change The List View Function Key Feedback Move a column COLUMN amp The selected column is Side Arrows moved left right depending on which arrow you press Resize the list part TAB amp Wheel The list part is resized These changes are temporary they will be lost if t
269. ll get a Record Preset in the Main Popup asking you to Playback verify your recording 4 Confirm recording RECORD The Preset is recorded as the next free Preset in the Main Playback Press PLAYBACK to see the Playback Tab 56 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Crossfade With Default Times You can fade to any Preset with GOTO using the default fade times 5 seconds Function Key Feedback 1 Fade to Preset 0 ol GoTo The light in the Main blackout Playback is faded to zero in five seconds 2 Fade to Preset 2 2 Leoro The light in the Main Playback is faded to the levels of Preset 2 in five seconds 3 Fade to Preset 1 GOTO The light in the Main Playback is faded to the levels of Preset 1 in five seconds 57 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Quick Start Moving Devices Any kind of device that isn t a dimmer such as a scanner a moving head or a scroller has to be patched before you can use it This chapter contains the following sections Patch a Moving Device or scroller Test The Device Record a Moving Device To a Master Record a Moving Device in the Main Playback Patch A Moving Device Or Scroller 4 3 A moving device or scroller has to be patched if you want to access it from the console 1 Open the Patch Wizard BROWSER gt Patching gt Patch Wizard LLL e Ke Patch Wizard Patch Dimmer Patch Device S
270. llows improvising with Moving Devices directly after patching them This chapter contains the following sections Jam Mode Introduction 4 1 Jam Mode Activate amp Prepare 4 1 Jam Mode Working Method 4 1 Jam Mode Direct Selects Setup 4 1 457 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 am Mode Introduction 4 1 Jam Mode is designed to allow an operator to improvise with Moving Devices directly after patching them This is done by generating Play Data for the Master Playbacks See Jam Mode Activate amp Prepare e Master Playback operation is slightly different from normal operation See Jam Mode Working Method e The Direct Selects are set up in a special way See Jam Mode Direct Selects Setup e When Jam Mode is deactivated the data will stay generated and all Master Playbacks and Direct Selects will return to the status they had prior to activating Jam Mode See Jam Mode Leaving 458 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 am Mode Activate amp Prepare 4 1 Jam Mode is designed for improvising with Moving Devices and very little preparation Jam Mode can be activated directly after completing the patching of Moving Devices in an empty Play or at any other time The first time Jam Mode is activated Groups Color and Focus Palettes are generated NOTE Updating the Focus Palettes is the only thing required to do before starting to use Jam Mode If there
271. lue is used for the velocity Example Sending the Align key would look like this 144 125 98 key pressed followed by 128 125 98 key released 490 Console Keys MIDI Chart 4 2 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Key MIDI Code Hex MIDI Code Dec 3C 60 75 117 II 79 121 3D 61 lt 7D 21 125 33 lt lt 7E 5C 126 92 gt 73 115 gt gt ZE 5D 126 93 0 01 1 1 02 2 2 03 3 3 04 4 4 05 5 5 06 6 6 07 7 7 08 8 8 09 9 9 DA 10 A 0B 11 Align 7D 62 125 98 All DC 12 AtLevel 22 34 Attrib 7D 27 125 39 B 23 35 Bank 7E 41 126 65 Beam 7D 1C 125 28 Blind 7E 62 126 98 Browser 7E 71 126 113 C 24 36 Capture 7D 65 125 101 Ch 25 37 Ch 26 38 Ch 27 39 Color 7D 1B 125 27 Column 7E 53 126 83 Connect 7E 55 126 85 Copy Cut 7D 5A 125 90 DecimalPoint 3E 62 Delay 7D 22 125 34 Delete 51 81 Device 7D 26 125 38 Direct Select 1 7D 6D 125 109 Direct Select 40 7E 1C 126 28 491 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Direct Select page 1 7E 6B 126 107 Direct Select page 5 7E 6F 126 111 Down 4D 77 Esc 2C 44 Fan 7D 0A 125 10 Fetch 2F 47 Flash 1 7E 2D 126 45 Flash 2
272. ly Beam Palette page 1 1 10 is set for the lower right section of Direct Selects To create Beam Palettes see Jam Mode Option Create Beam Palettes 4 1 This is basic operation Function Key Feedback Snap to Palette Direct Select key The currently active Group will snap to the target of the Palette Move to Palette ina and Direct Select The currently active time of seconds key Group will move to the target of the Palette in seconds 463 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 J am Mode Parameters 4 1 The upper right section of the Direct Selects is set up for controlling one bank of Parameters 1 2 3 4 A D 8 9 10 Select Select Select Select Select Select Select Select Select Select Param Param Param Param Param Param Param Param Param Param 1 Select a type of Device first with the Groups on Masters 1 10 2 Select a parameter type FOCUS COLOR BEAM for the Main Display of the console 3 Press any parameter key in the Main Display section to choose a parameter for these keys The first ten positions of this parameter will unfold to the Direct Select keys Example Strobe parameters Param 1 2 3 4 A D 8 9 10 1 10 OPEN Strobe closed uo Pulse C Pulse Rnd Rnd Rnd Rnd Rnd Strobe Fast Medium Slow P Fast P Slow You can change parameter at anytime by holding TYPE and pressing PARAM for this section This will bring you
273. ly RECORD amp PAGE You will get a confirmation loaded Master Page in the message window at the bottom of the screens Record to Master Page G amp You will get a confirmation PAGE in the message window at the bottom of the screens 266 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Pages Functions 4 2 It is possible to load and change Master Pages separately to either row 1 20 or 21 40 of Master Playbacks When a new play is created Page 1 amp 2 are automatically loaded 4 1 Function Key Feedback Load Master Page el PAGE Master Page is loaded Step to next Master Page Loads the next Master Page Step to previous Master Loads the previous Page Master Page The corresponding Masters are cleared 4 2 If the Page does not exist it will be created 4 1 NOTE PENDING If a master fader is over 0 when new content is loaded it will load the new content after fading to 0 267 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Pages List 4 1 You can view edit and create Master Pages directly in the Master Page List BROWSER gt Master Pages 3 Master Pages Page Text Transparent Time BPM Front Groups Off 0 NOTE The system always creates 10 empty Master Pages when a new Play is opened 4 1 Master Pages List Columns Column Input Function Page No input The number of this Preset ca
274. m has Captured it it is owned by this client Server until released Group Wheel Mode Group Wheel mode is local for each client just like all other channel control functions 431 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Network Unison Macros 4 3 It is possible to synchronize Congo with Unison Systems A Unison Command triggers the corresponding Congo Macro Consult your Unison manual for more information about Unison Systems 432 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Network EDMX and sACN Universe Map 4 3 There is a Universe Map that enables you to map any of the the 12 universes of Congo to e Any universe of ETCNet2 EDMX e Amy sACN universe This is done in the Networking Node BROWSER gt Networking gt Universe Map 3 Universe Map List Universe EDMX Start At Streaming ACN Universe NOTE To use EDMX or streaming ACN these protocols have to be enabled in the Login Settings of the system See Login Settings Networking 433 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 MEDIA 4 1 The Media node of the Browser has four nodes Each of them represent a folder with the same name in the CONGO folder at the root of the system Information dropped in these folders can be viewed in the Tabs of Congo Function File Types Explanation Movies wmw Movies are played when a movie node is selected Images jpg Images are loaded in a Tab when an image node is selected Docume
275. manual fade e Set the crossfaders to fade in both directions in the Settings for the Playback Hold SETUP and press PLAYBACK e When you make a manual crossfade to a step with attributes the attribute values that are GoOnGo will follow the movement of the B fader 87 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Main Playback Transport Keys These are the transport keys of the Main Playback Function Key Start a crossfade GO Start a new crossfade during an ongoing crossfade Go Pause a crossfade PAUSE Crossfade to the previous step GO BACK Reverse an ongoing crossfade GO BACK Step without times to the next step eco Step without times to the previous step eco Open the GOTO list GOTO Crossfade to any recorded preset on the stored or GOTO default times Relocate the sequence from preset in B Next sl suMP TOB When a crossfade is completed there is a beep Turn this off in the System Settings System See The GOTO List NOTE Device parameters are executed as LTP independent of the playback that once started them This means that you cannot use for example PAUSE to stop attributes The GOTO List The GOTO List is a list of all Presets in the Sequence of the Main Playback Open by pressing GOTO Select any preset with the arrow keys and press GOTO to fade to that preset 3 Goto List 1 Step Preset Text 88 Con
276. master faders and under the upper row See Master Playbacks Introduction Console Key MASTER Alt M Function Opens the Master View tab Xtra Can be used to select Masters and set levels numerically Master View Select And Set Levels e Location Over the Master Playback key section See Master Playback Playback Keys Console Key MINUS Ctrl lt Function Subtract a channel from a selection See Select Channels Xtra Step to the previous channel Xtra Can be held together with Master Key to subtract those channels from the current selection Location Programming Section middle See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key MINUS PERCENT N A e Function Subtract Level 5 See Set Channel levels e Xtra Hold C ALT and press MINUS PERCENT to set 0 e Location Programming Section middle See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key MODIFY SEQ Softkey N A e Function Deactivates all auto times and links to all Sequences See Sequences Build amp Modify Modes e Location Softkey under the PLAYBACK page of the Main Display See Facepanel Console Main Display Console Key NEXT N e Function Select the next channel within the current selection See Device Control Next amp Last Mode e Location To the right of the Main Display section See Facepanel Console Main Display 527 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Key Numerical Keypad
277. mber will be used The last used Random selection is used Select Change softkey Function Soft Key Feedback Select changed channels Select Change Selects all device channels that have manually changed attributes other than intensity since the current Preset was loaded to the A field 287 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Control Align The Align key copies parameters from one Moving Device to others Action Key Feedback 1 Select the moving Channel select The selected channel is device you want to copy __ functions highlighted from 2 Add the channels of all Channel select The selected channels devices you want to copy functions are highlighted to Hold ALIGN and then press the key corresponding to the parameter or parameter group you want to copy Function Key Feedback Align FOCUS ALIGN amp All Focus parameters are copied Align COLOR ALIGN amp All Color parameters are copied Align BEAM ALIGN amp All Beam parameters are copied Align single parameters ALIGN amp The parameter assigned Wheel Ke to the wheel is copied If Palettes are used the palettes will be aligned not the values NOTE If you are using NEXT LAST the currently focused channel is the one you will copy from to the rest 288 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Cont
278. mic Effect to fade out Use the Keep Dynamics setting to allow the Dynamic Effect to play through Presets See Record Keep Dynamics If a pan tilt effect such as Circle is running for a moving Device you can change the Base Value by moving Pan and Tilt or by selecting a Focus Palette NOTE If the Base Value is too small some effects will not be visible for example color mix and intensity effects Set the Base Value to 50 for maximum effect 379 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Size amp Rate 4 2 Size Each Dynamic Effect has a Size amplitude and Rate frequency value It is possible to assign an intensity channel to each of them You can set Size and Rate for running Dynamic Effects with the wheels in the Dynamics Soft Key Page See Dynamics Control NOTE From 4 2 it is no longer possible to modulate the size or rate of a dynamic effect using another intensity dynamic effect on the size rate channel This may change the behaviour of existing plays if this rare feature has been programmed Si imposta una Ampiezza Size della curva dell effetto forma dal 0 1000 Questo si pu impostare con la prima ruota dei parametri nella pagina soft DYNAMICS dello schermo LCD della console DYNAMICS tasto soft Si pud impostare anche nelle finestre Dinamiche Live e Dinamiche del Preset Vedi Dinamiche Modifica Dinamiche Live e Dinamiche Editor Dinamiche del Preset Size
279. mode are not cleared Channels in Master Playbacks are restored by bringing the Master fader to zero and back up New Home Attribute functions in 4 3 Action Key Feedback Clear C At amp Homes all attributes and HOME ATTRIB clears all Dynamics Clear CAI amp Homes all attributes and HOME ATTRIB clears all Dynamics and HOME ATTRIB intensities 191 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels Check Mode There is a function for stepping through a series of channels at any selected level If a channel is already set to a level when checked it will cut back to the previous level when the next channel is checked Action Key Feedback 1 Select start channel Tel Level Wheel This level will be used by and set a level check mode 2 Activate temporary Ciait amp As long as C Alt is held the check mode in up or and keys will check the next down direction or previous channel 3 Exit temporary Let go of the C Alt key check mode 192 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels Balance Mode The Balance makes it possible to temporarily set all channels to 0 except a selection The original output of these channels is restored when Balance Mode is exited This key is in the Channels Soft Key Page Congo Congo Jr Com Bal pare ance T C eech ech O S Action Key Feedback 1 Select the channels to See Channel Command wo
280. moving devices Devices Palettes Store reference Palettes for Focus Color and Beam or All Select all active devices using a palette all blue or all centre stage Store palettes for all of the same type and reuse for color mixing Palettes are quickly accessible from the Direct Selects Load Palettes to Masters and fade selected channel s Devices Playing Back Play back Moving Devices from any playback Parameters can follow the fader Any device parameter can be assigned to a Master Playback There is a GoOnGo or GolnB function Move while dark Times can be set to follow In to groups FCB devices or single parameters Devices Focusing Mode Next amp Last Mode Highlight Mode Palette Focusing Mode Devices Effects Use Dynamic Effects to create patterns such as circles or fly outs Define your own Dynamic Effects Devices Templates Edit a template at any time Create your own templates Change a template device for another 276 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Devices Control The Main Display section of the console is optimized for working with functions in moving devices These are the sections in this chapter Device Control Introduction Device Control Lamp Strike amp Reset Device Control Home Positioning Device Control U1 U2 U3 Device Control Mask Device Control Select Device Control Align Device Control Fan Device Control Fetch Cop
281. mp The selected channels channels to a wheel Wheel Key are loaded as a channel group to the wheel Load channels of group to a wheel GROUP amp The channels of Group are loaded to the wheel Wheel Key Load the selected CH amp Wheel Key The selected channels channels to a wheel are loaded as a channel group to the wheel Load channel to a wheel amp The channel is loaded 4 2 Wheel Key to the wheel NOTE 4 2 The channels affected by a group wheel are updated when they are selected This means that if the level has changed by a crossfade or a manual change of some kind the group wheel will now always catch up The overflow underflow information will therefore be lost if you are taking multiple channels over 100 or under 0 199 CO Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels Rem Dim 4 2 Rem Dim will set all channels in the Channel Control to zero except the currently selected channel s Function Key Feedback Rem Dim All channels in the Channel Control are set to zero except the current selection NOTE It is possible to set the REM DIM key to function as BALANCE 4 2 This is done in the System Settings See System Settings Channel 200 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 GROUPS Groups are a way of recalling a channel selection with a single number They are often used to spe
282. mp power cable Monitor s amp power cable Monitor signal cable s DMX512 or Ethernet cable s to external equipment Connect the monitor signal cable s from the back of the console to the monitor s and then connect the power cables to a 230 110V outlet and start all units After approximately 30 seconds you should have this start screen on monitor 1 If not then check e Is each monitor is set for VGA IBM compatible mode e Is each monitor cable is properly connected e Is each monitor power on See Power up Procedure 33 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 System Info Software amp Update We constantly update the Congo software with new features bug fixes and changes Check www avabcontrol com periodically to see if there s a more recent version than the one you are currently working with Software versions come in two types Beta release and Official release Beta releases are test versions which are not meant for use on real Plays Once Beta releases are tested and proven reliable they become official releases The AVAB Congo software is owned and manufactured by ETC Version Information You can see which version you have in About Congo Browser gt About Congo About McCong Software Version V4 1 RC2 Dongle number Channels 3072 Outputs 6144 Demo version Name Congo Current role Server Net 0 IP 192 168 0 123 FileServer path USB path F 34 Upgrade Software
283. n Disable Master Attributes will not follow Master Off Rubberband faders 4 1 405 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Settings System Press SETUP and use the right left arrows to select the System Settings tab e Use the down arrow to select a cell e Use MODIFY to toggle a setting nl ee gt Settings Channels Crossfade Masters System Attributes Outputs MIDI Beep 7 Remote control v 4uto save on Record Auto stop dynamics in PB System Settings 4 2 The System Settings are general for the behaviour of the console Function Explanation Default value Beep An audio beep warning when On illegal commands are performed AND when a crossfade is completed 4 2 Remote Control Activate Radio remote focusing Off Auto Save Saves the Play after each time Off you press RECORD Auto stop Dynamics in PB Loading a new Sequence to Off Playback 1 stops all running Dynamics started from the current Sequence 406 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Settings Attribute Press SETUP and use the right left arrows to select the Attribute Settings tab e Use the down arrow to select a cell e Use MODIFY or MODIFY to change values Settings Channels Crossfade Masters System Attributes Outputs MIDI Record attributes as GoOnGo Press MODIFY to toggle Disable automatic GoInB logic Record Attribute mode Automatic Press MODIFY to toggle Attri
284. n output for temporary direct control OUTPUT opening the Output Editor Add an output to the current selection CouTPuT Subtract an output from the current selection CoutTPuT Add an Output range to the current selection OUTPUT THRU Open the Channel List MODIFY amp Open the Device List MODIFY amp DEVICE Open the Output Editor MODIFY amp OUTPUT Toggle level information the Output Editor FORMAT amp Up Down arrows Patching in the Output Editor It is possible to patch multiple outputs and channels directly in the Output Editor using a Command Syntax only in RPN mode DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Activate Patch Mode MODIFY MODIFY Patch output to channel sl output MODIFY Patch outputs to or from sl output THRU channel popup MODIFY Patch outputs consequtively to sl Cemo THRU Tel LwopDiry channels from output popup Shortcuts Main Display General These are the keys and shorcuts used to operate the functionality of the Main Display in the console DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Go back to the previous soft key page then top lt Clear the LCD display List C ALT amp DISPLAY LIST 549 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Track 4 1 Track is applied to the current channel selection See Select C
285. nder Network Devices in the Browser Double clicking on the ArKaos item will allow you to connect to it A popup will confirm the connection When you connect to an ArKaos system the names of the available media will be transferred into the ArKaos template and can be used in all situations where a range name normally occurs For this to work you need to use the Arkaos full fixture mode template When connecting to the ArKaos system all old media names in the ArKaos template will be cleared first Unused media names will be set to No name A media that is playing is indicated with a play symbol triangle in the media preview in the Channel Layout ArKaos Media extensions like jpg are stripped off the range names e When using Library and File parameters on Direct Selects File content is now updated when you change the Library NOTE When you connect to a media server the first time this is when it just says ArKaos in the Network Devices menu the names of the media elements types and their thumbnails are transferred from the media server to the Congo application After this the connection is only used for transferring runtime status like if a media is playing or not Updates to media on the ArKaos side after you connect wont be transferred to Congo In the future there will be an automatic update in this case Even if you try to connect again on the Congo side this will not trigger an update so make sure that all media eleme
286. nect a Master CONNECT amp The Chase or Sequence Playback Master Ke in this Master is conencted to the Playback keys Also the Master Playback tab is focused 4 3 Set a tap tempo toa Master Playback or Page TAP amp Master Key Hold TAP and press at least twice on a Master or Page key to set a BPM tempo 97 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Fader Mode Switch The Switch with three positions next to the masters sets the 40 Master playbacks into either of three modes Position Function Channels Only Masters 1 40 will control the first 40 intensities in the system Select range of channels with the Direct Selects Masters The normal position Masters 1 40 are Masters 1 40 Jam A special mode for busking a show with moving devices See Jam Mode 98 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Master Editor It is possible to insert and delete content in Masters and change Flash modes in the Master Editor MODIFY amp Master Key The Master Editor can be opened from the Browser as well Browser gt Master Editor 3 View Masters Salected and non zero channals Master Content type Content In War Out Flash mode Flash level Solo fade Page time troup su s i Kg SGN vn LUUR vir Group On Group d On 100 Group 2 On 10 Group 2 On 100 Master Editor Columns amp Functions
287. ng Section Console Key CURSOR N A e Function Sets the trackball to trackball mouse mode See Facepanel Trackball e Location See Facepanel Trackball Console Key DELAY Ctrl D e Function Set a delay time in the Sequence of the Main Playback See Sequences Times e Location Programming Section left See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key DELETE Del e Function Deletes selected item in Lists See Editing In Lists e Location In the Navigation Pad See Facepanel Programming Section Console key DEVICE D e Function Hold MODIFY and press to open the Device Settings See Patch Device Settings e Location Over the Master Playback key section See Master Playback Playback Keys Console Key Direct Select Pages N A e Function Each of these five round keys activate a page in which you can preselected content for all Direct Selects See Direct Select User Setups e Location See Direct Selects Introduction 523 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Key DISPLAY LIST J e Function Sets the trackball to Display List mode See Display Lists e Xtra Hold DISPLAY LIST to get all display list options in the Direct Selects e Location See Facepanel Trackball Console Key DYN EFFECT E Function Open the Live Effect List See Dynamics Edit Live Dynamic Effects Xtra Hold MODIFY and press to open the Effect Library List See Dynamics
288. ngo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Action Console Feedback 1 Open the Setup Hold Setup and move the potentiometer or press a key A popup will appear with a channel view 2 Set channels levels and attributes 3 Select Mode See Independent Modes 4 Select Execute Arrow key Execute is highlighted 5 Store The popup is closed The Setup can be opened from the Browser as well Browser gt Setup gt Independents Keys have the option to be toggling on off The Independent popup Independent Setup Non zero channels Step 1 Select the channeis levels to operate on in the Channel View Step 2 Select options and Execute Function Text Include attributes Y 118 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Independent Modes Mode Screen Feedback Exclusive Blue level Blackout GrandMaster Capture or any other channel function will not affect this channel s Inclusive No indication Works as an additional Master Playback Inhibit Red level Is an Inhibit Master works as a Grand Master for the selected channel s If you have several Independent Functions set to Inhibit and they have overlapping channels the highest Special Function will be in control The result on stage can be recorded NOTE When you are in exclusive mode the attributes will still be stolen back by any function calling them in the rest of the console even
289. ngo console NOTE 4 3 In Jr you can exit Direct Select Mode by pressing the same key again 121 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Direct Selects Content 4 2 Content is selected by type and then by bank in groups of ten Type of content hold TYPE Focus Color Beam Dyna Auto Group When TYPE is held the different types are displayed over each section Press the key corresponding to the Type you want without letting go of TYPE Congo Jr In Jr the four keys to the left of the display activate Direct Select section 1 4 AND act as TYPE key for each section when activated Bank hold BANK 1 11 75a 31 41 o1 61 TA 81 91 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 When BANK is held the different banks are displayed over each section Press the key corresponding to the Bank you want without letting go of BANK Congo Jr Activate Direct Select section 1 4 with the corresponding TYPE key as described above and select a type of content The key to the right of the ten Direct Select keys works like the BANK key described above NOTE A bank contains the content that has been stored to those numbers For example Focus Palette 11 is in bank 11 20 122 Content Types 4 1 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 These are the possible Types of content for the Direct Selects Focus Color Beam Dyna Auto Group Type Function Read More Foc
290. ngo has client server networking with multiple operators It is possible to send and fetch a play between Server and Backup There is backup sync for running shows This chapter contains the following sections Network Introduction Network Connecting Network Fetch amp Send Play Network Convert To Server Backup Network Backup Sync Network Client Network Multiple Users Network Unison Macros 423 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Network Introduction 4 2 A Congo network consists of a Server and a Backup and or Clients A Server can have any number of Clients NOTE Full consoles can be Servers or Backups Any PC running Windows XP with the requisite video ram 128MB minimum can act as a client providing it has the license to do so General Facts Each system can be setup to start as either Server Backup or auto detect 4 2 Only the Server transmits output data Plays can be transferred between Main and Backup system There is a backup sync that can be activated from the Server Convert any system to Server Backup See Login Settings Networking 424 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Network Connecting 4 3 A network with only two systems server backup can be connected with a crossed Ethernet cable or an ethernet Hub can be used They can be connected as Server Backup or Server Client The client can be used as a separate workstation in
291. ngs They can also be assigned when a scroller is patched from the Patch Wizard 1 Open the Device Settings Browser gt Patching gt Device Settings You can also hold MODIFY and press DEVICE 4 Device Settings Item Channel Template Inv Pan Inv Tilt Swap Pan Tilt E croller Roll Calibration Ec 31 Mac 300 M4 Mac 300 M4 Mac 300 M4 Mac 300 M4 240 1 Scroller 101 1 101 Scroller 102 1 102 Capture camera 401 1 416 No Scroller Roll 2 Use arrow keys to select the Scroller Roll Cell for a channel 3 Press MODIFY to get a dropdown with all defined Rolls 4 Select a roll with arrow keys 5 Press MODIFY to confirm The currently selected color will be shown in the black box under the level in the Channel Views 359 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Calibrate Individual Scroller Rolls Each scroller roll can be calibrated individually This is done in the Scroller Calibration Editor that is opened from the Device Settings 1 Open the Device Settings Browser gt Patching gt Device Settings 2 Use arrow keys to select the Calibration Editor cell to the far right 3 Press MODIFY to open the Calibration Editor for the selected channel 4 Scroller Calibration Editor Index Adjusted Position Text 4 Select Adjusted Position enter a new value confirm with MODIFY It is updated live 5 Press ESC to exit Changes are stored automatically Scroller Fan override In the Attribute s
292. ning a List e Hold DISPLAY LIST and press a function key e Hold DISPLAY LIST and select from the Direct Selects 4 1 Example Display List for Groups CF HEx StudioBeam Led Front of ho Mac 250 MH Specials Select Mac 500 MH Fixed rig gt StageScan G 31 Focus Spe Tracking 1 411 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 These are the lists Select an item with the trackball and right or left click to activate it List Shortcut Description Preset List DISPLAY LIST amp All presets PRESET Group List DISPLAY LIST amp All groups Click to select GROUP Channel List DISPLAY LIST amp All selected channels and CH names Auto Group List DISPLAY LIST amp All auto groups from the CH CH channel database Click to select Playback List DISPLAY LIST amp Shows the sequence PLAYBACK steps and times in the Main Playback Parameter List DISPLAY LIST amp Shows all ranges of the WHEEL KEY selected parameter Dynamic Effect List DISPLAY LIST amp All dynamic effects Click DYN EFFECT to activate PlayList DISPLAY LIST amp The Playlist See Playlist PLAYLIST All Palette List DISPLAY LIST amp All Paletes Click to PALETTE activate Focus Palette List DISPLAY LIST amp All Focus Palettes Click FOCUS to activate Color Palette List
293. nnel 22 in the project A Demo Play When the channel controlling the camera is selected all functions are mapped to the device controls around the Main Display FOCUS functions e Pan Pan stage e Tilt Tilt stage e Pitch Pitch the angle of the stage Beam functions page 1 Zoom Zoom X lt gt Move stage right left along the X axis Y lt gt Move stage up down along the Y axis Z lt gt Move stage in out along the Z axis Beam functions page 2 e Ambient L Houselights e Fixture L Fixture lights e Atmospher Atmosphere smoke 438 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Training Projects Hints 4 1 The Training Project is a simple way of getting to know some of the moving light functionality of Congo and to understand Dynamics In the corresponding Congo Play A Demo Play there is a sample of a Channel Layout that can be used together with the Plug in If you are running one monitor and split the screens you will have a view like this Pr Main Playback Layout 1 Small Theater Feampin af a impia pit with synda Prams Ma SLITT Mrery gt gt 30 39 3 capture a demo play c2p Training plugin powered by apture 439 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 NOTES 4 1 Notes allow a comment and a color code to be attached to any Sequence Step Group Preset or Palette All Notes are summarized in a list with a time and user stamp and a direct link to the object the Note is a
294. nnot be edited Text ABCDE Press MODIFY to activate and end text input Transparent When ON this Master Page will only load the stored masters Time This time can be set to affect all percent times in this Master Page See Master Page Times BPM This value can be set to affect all chase rates in this Master Page See Master Page Times 268 Master Pages List Functions 4 1 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 These are the functions in the Master Pages List Master Page Function Key or column Feedback Insert a Master Page 4 1 INSERT Inserts a new Master Page with the next free number Insert Master Page el INSERT Inserts a new Master Page Delete the selected DELETE Deletes the selected Master Page Cannot be undone 269 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Pages Editor The Master Page Editor is where you can view and edit the content and times of Master Pages Open in BROWSER3 gt Master Pages gt Master Page 3 Master Page 1 Front Groups Selected and non zero channels el A Master Content Type Conte In Dynam BEN Prs J 4 Group Group Master Page Columns Column Input Function Master No input The number of this Master cannot be edited Content Type MODIFY Opens a dropdown where you can choose content Content MODIFY Sets the number ID of th
295. ns references to Palettes Sequences or Presets that don t exist they will still be assigned to the Page Sequences amp Main Sequence You can currently only chases import the main sequence 1 Palettes Yes All Color Focus Beam Import the Templates and Device List settings these are referring to first Dynamic Yes They will be added to the end of Make sure you have Templates your Dynamic Templates List the same tables for wave forms or this might not work Import Wizard Limitations Patch To import the complete Patch you need to import first Templates then the Channel List then Device Settings Item Description Limitation Templates Yes To import a complete Patch import Templates Channel List and Device Settings Channel List Yes Import the Templates first To import a complete Patch import Templates Channel List and Device Settings Device Yes To import a complete Patch import Settings Templates Channel List and Device Settings Import Wizard Limitations Setup Your Pronto Congo Settings from a different Play can be imported with all your settings for the Input Outputs record functions etc 397 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Import Wizard Strand 4 2 The following applies when importing data from a Strand System Strand ASCII Light Cues files that ends with alq can be opened directly Patch Patch 1 is always used
296. nt Master Page RECORD amp PAGE Record master content to Master Page RECORD amp PAGE Load next Master Page Load previous Master Page f Tap tempo for a Master Page amp PAGE Set a Master Page time G IME amp PAGE Activate the Master Page List in the Main DISPLAY LIST amp PAGE Display Depends on the Master Page Settings See System Settings Master It is also possible to hold DISPLAY LIST and press the Direct Select key Mast Page Shortcuts Devices To Home Position Functions for recording amp setting Home postitions to the selected Devices DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Set Home All HOME ATTRIB HOME ATTRIB Set Home All shortcut C ALT amp ATTRIBUTE Set Home Focus HOME ATTRIB amp FOCUS Set Home Color HOME ATTRIB amp COLOR Set Home Beam HOME ATTRIB amp BEAM Set Home Focus ol Focus Set Home Color 0 COLOR Set Home Beam 0 BEAM Set Home All 0 PALETTE Set Home to a Parameter RECORD amp Wheel Key Record current attribute values as the home position RECORD amp for the selected channels HOME ATTRIB J Make sure this is done including ALL devices the Home Position will be fetched for all from Palette 0 instead of the template default values 544 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Device Attribute Editors 4 1 Keys and shortcuts for o
297. ntation htm Documentation is loaded in a Tab when a documentation node is selected Training Projects c2p Training projects created in Capture and supplied with the software can be opened here NOTE If you insert a USB device which contains Image or Movie files you get a question about auto importing them to the Images and Movies folders 434 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Media Images From USB Camera 4 1 If you connect a digital camera to the console via USB a dialog will open to allow you to import the photos into the Images folder in Congo You have a possibility to select if all images found should be imported or just ones with a newer timestamp than last import NOTE This works for cameras that show up as a new Drive in Windows not as a camera device 435 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Media Images Delete 4 1 You can delete images directly from the Browser by pressing DELETE Sr Are you sure Delete file Images 2 CD D D Joy Arctic jpg 436 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Media Training Projects 4 3 This is visualisation plug in for training purposes The projects are created in a third party software called Capture and supplied by ETC The idea is not to run large shows with processor heavy visualisation inside Congo It is meant as a training tool that allows you to understand functions like Dynamic Effects without having a rig Training
298. nts are loaded on the ArKaos side before you connect 4 3 Effect types and names are transferred and appear under Effect Type and Effect Index ArKaos MSEX Beta 2 or later must be used 362 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 DYNAMICS The effect generator assigns wave forms tables to intensities or attribute parameters The result is called Dynamic Effects and can be effects like a circle or a ballyhoo This chapter contains the following sections Dynamics Introduction Dynamics Start Dynamics Control Dynamics Edit Live Dynamic Effects Dynamics Stop Dynamics Record Dynamics Effect Library Dynamics Preset Dynamic Effects Dynamics Base Value Dynamics Size amp Rate Dynamics Relations amp Distance Dynamics Loop Count Dynamics Fade Dynamics Form Dynamics Fetch From A Preset Dynamics Playing Back Dynamics Store Running To Library Dynamics Tables 363 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Introduction Dynamics are a way of creating effects by assigning waveforms sinus saw etc to intensity color movement or any other parameter See Dynamics Tables The waveform will run the parameter it is assigned to but you can still move the base value of the parameter that the Dynamic is working with Dynamics are stored in Presets and channels can be added or subtracted at a later point General Facts
299. o create as many steps as the Moving Device has control channels 6 Edit the columns for each step to fit the specification of the Moving Device 346 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Templates Parameter Parameter types are defined in the first cell or the Template Editor Each parameter is used differently For example Pan and Tilt automatically belong to Focus Palettes and are mapped to the trackball in Parameter mode Press modify in the Parameter cell to open the dropdown Select with arrow keys and press MODIFY to confirm Amber White Red The Parameters are picked from the Parameter Definition Editor Parameters can be added to this list if necessary See Parameter Definition Editor 347 Parameter Definition Editor The complete Parameter Definition Editor contains all to this point known parameters Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 5 Parameter Definition Editor Parameter Name Palette Intensity Pan Tilt Focus Speed Focus Time Cyan Magenta Yellow Amber Function Description Parameter Parameter ID cannot be changed Name The name is used for controlling the parameter WARNING Changing an existing name could alter the complete functionality of all Templates Palette The Group defines which Palette and parameter group a parameter will belong to Palette and parameter Groups Group Description INT All intensities belon
300. ode for entering commands in the system is the AVAB RPN mode It is simple to learn requires few keystrokes and applies to all functions in the system Since RPN applies to everything in the system we recommend you spend the necessary 30 minutes to convert There s one single rule enter the number first and press the function key after At Mode also called Direct Entry is different in the way that ch numbers are entered directly followed by a function LEVEL for example and the value of that function You can select syntax in the Settings Channel Select Channels 4 1 The fastest way to select a channel and set a level regardless of syntax is to enter the number of that channel and move the level wheel This is a table with the key entries for most channel commands Channel command RPN AT MODE Clear selected channels amp C ALT amp C ALT 4 1 Select channel 1 CJ Ten 7 Add channel 2 IER 2 Add through 7 EA THRU Subtract ch 3 B EJ ID Select all channels with ALL a level in the channel control Select all channels with ALL ALL CALL a level 4 1 Invert the current INV GROUP channel selection of all channels with a level Step to the next ch E ES Step to the previous ch J EJ NOTE In At Mode you can press LEVEL after selecting channels to see the channel selection See Channels Clear
301. oductr0i A2 einn nnana cca degen ee 446 Track Te1Sts ET Kee hociean hese coco tetas dahon hse asst es ees 447 Track List Functions In 447 Track List Show Levels amp Attributes GI 448 Track Channels 4 1 58 5 Seis Sec ik EE Se BERS 449 Track Channels In Sequences OI 449 Track To Wizard RE 450 Track Channels In Presets GI 450 Track Channels Groups OI 450 Track Channels Palettes LI 451 Track Channels In The Play 4 2 0 eeseesccesscecsseceseeecescceeeeecaeceeeecsaeseneeceeeeseneeceaeeeeneees 452 Track Presets 451 cisions th cveasieseesek oh bo sided eege de eege 453 Tracks Palettes 4A EE 454 Track Track Editing 4 2 reesen etiniai 455 Track Editing Intensities 21 455 Track Editing Attributes 21 456 Track Editing Unblock Attributes 21 456 JAM MODE 4 EE 457 Jam Mode Introduction 1 458 Jam Mode Activate amp Prepare LI 459 Jam Mode Step 1 Activate Jam Mode OI 459 Jam Mode Step 2 Check Groups GI 460 Jam Mode Step 3 Update Focus Palettes 4 1 ooo ceseeeeceseceseceseceecaeecaeeeeeeeeeees 460 Jam Mode Step 4 Check Color Palettes OI 461 Jam Mode Option Create Beam Palettes 1 461 Jam Mode Leaving 4 1 cescccscscccavecscdcsccacsecaucescezetesciscavesdeeisasaceedeseatuaecsdeveedee cat ceecdentendiess 461 Jam Mode Working Method LI 462 Jam Mode Selecting Devices GI 462 Jam Mode Set Positions and Colors GI 463 Jam Mode Beam Palettes In 463 Jam
302. of other settings Don t loop Sequence At the end of a Sequence it will not restart Off at step 1 4 2 Don t advance Playback Crossfades will not advance any Off sequence steps automatically 4 2 Show sequence Display of Sequence Steps On numbers 4 2 Alert Alarm Time The time at which the warning yellow and 5 4 3 beep will be issued before the Alert time is finished Beep on Alert Audio Alert warning On 4 3 An arrow in the Main Playback view next to the times of A B indicates where times are set to 404 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Settings Master Press SETUP and use the right left arrows to select the Master Settings tab e Use the down arrow to select a cell e Use MODIFY to toggle a setting ee AN Settings Channels Crossfade Masters System Attributes Outputs MIDI Flash on time Times on masters Auto update master page Y Rubberband Return on fade down v Disable Master Rubberband Master Settings 4 1 The Master Settings are general for the Master Playbacks Function Explanation Default value Flash on time Press FLASH will activate a fade Off following the fade times assigned to a Master Times on Masters Manual fading will follow fade Off times assigned to a Master Auto Update master page Changes to a Master Page On are stored automatically Rubberband Return on Attributes follow Master fader also Off fade down when fading dow
303. olumn Input Function Channel No input The number of this Channel cannot be edited here see Output List Dimmer Address Enter the address followed by decimal point and then DMX universe You can change the universe by entering Dimmer Address MODIFY Opens an Output Editor for adding multiple outputs or editing Device No input Shows the device template cannot be edited here see Device Settings Device Address No Input Shows the device address cannot be edited here see Device Settings Scale 0 200 Sets the scaling factor for the intensity of this channel Park 0 100 Shows the level a channel is parked at Set a level with MODIFY and remove with C amp MODIFY See Park Name 0 6144 Enter the number and press MODIFY to change a channel name see Renaming Channels 141 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel List Select amp Patch Channels 4 2 It is possible to select and patch channels to outputs directly with a Command Syntax in this list only in RPN mode Function Key Feedback Select a channel The channel is selected in the list and in the top view Add a channel to The channel is added to the this selection current selection Add a range of GJ Ru The channel range is added to the channels to this current selection selection Patch a range of Tel MODIFY The output range is patched to outputs
304. on 4 3 070328 Device Palettes Edit Device Palettes can be edited and filtered in the same way as the Live Attributes and Preset Attribute views See Device Views Editing and Device Views Filtering 323 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Palettes Lists 4 3 The Palette Lists are opened from the Browser Browser gt Palettes gt Focus Palettes You can open them directly by holding MODIFY and pressing FOCUS COLOR BEAM or PALETTE 3 Focus Palettes Palette Text Attribute Tr Home rak home TR upp rak upp NOTE 4 3 Palettes that have been recorded per type of device are shown first in these lists Most often these are Color Palettes See Each Device or Each Device Type Palette List Columns amp Functions Function Key Feedback Palette The ID of each Palette Cannot be changed Text Press MODIFY to activate and end text input Attribute Opens the Palette Attribute Editor The number indicates how many Devices are stored in this Palette 324 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Palettes Activate By Number Activate a Palette for the selected channel s by number affected Function Key Feedback Focus Palette Focus Values are set from Palette Color Palette sl COLOR Values are set from Palette Beam Palette BEAM Values are set from Pal
305. on Key Feedback 4 Insert a position A position is inserted You can set percent Output and if this step should use interpolation to the next step Sequence Assign Fade Curves 4 1 Assign curves to a sequence step in the Sequence Editor Action Key Feedback 1 Open the Sequence amp The Sequence Editor is Editor opened 2 Move to the column Arrow Keys The cell is highlighted Fade Curve 3 Open the Fade Curve The popup is opened If popup no curves are defined it will only have No curve Fade Curve No curve 4 Select a Curve Arrow keys The selected curve is highlighted 5 Confirm The popup is closed and the selected curve is assigned to this step 253 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Block Values 4 2 It is possible to set an intensity block for the tracking functions for a step This is done in the Sequences List See Sequences Sequence List See also Track Track Editing 4 2 A block is indicated in the Playback List with a B after the Preset and a line over the step In this image step 7 is blocked 5 0 P Bluem Wait 5 6 0 P Focus ChT 1 Dev 4 Dyn 8 0 BP Stopall Out 0 1 Dev 4 Dyn 1 9 0 P Chaser Out 0 1 ML 1 NOTE Currently all intensities are blocked To block the intensity for an individual channel set the value in the Preset to 1 254 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Trac
306. on a Highest Takes Precedence basis Device attributes are controlled by Last Takes Precedence The Main Playback consists of two faders one for the active channels and one for the channels in the next step These also interact on a Highest Takes Precedence basis with the addition that channels that exist in both faders exist in a third invisible fader that ensures all crossfades to be dipless As a result you cannot get a blackout in the Main Playback with both faders at 0 See Main Playbacks 50 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Control Hierarchy Highest Takes Precedence You can output light from all Masters and the Main Playback at the same time But what happens if you have faded in Preset 1 on the Main Playback and it s up on a Master too The answer is that the highest intensity level of a channel takes precedence whenever it s output from more than one place in the system If the Highest level for a channel is generated from one of the Masters it is displayed in yellow if it is generated from the Main Playback it is white 51 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Quick Start to Programming This is a jump start if you want to get some lights on stage store them and play them back from the Main and Master Playbacks If this is your first session with this product we recommend you to browse this chapter we guarantee it will save you more time than it takes to read This chapter contains
307. on any ETCNet2 Power switches You should be able to control Nodes and accessories the outputs now such as Remote Focus units The user login contains separate settings for the Direct Select tabs and Screen Layouts Play data and all other settings are the same for all users See Quick Start To Programming NOTE In a network with multiple Congo Systems online allow the main system to fully start up before starting the other systems This will ensure that your network configures correctly When you power up your Congo System the system will default to opening the show last saved in a proper shutdown ESC can be used in the welcome screen to abort starting locally or connecting as a client 4 1 2 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Save And Load Information 4 3 Make sure you save your information at all times If the current Play has been altered since it was last saved the name is displayed in yellow instead of white All file handling is done from the File node BROWSER gt File It is possible to create subdirectories by pressing INSERT Info about the selected file is shown in the Info box at the bottom of the Browser 4 2 Info Small Theatre CLEN ize 231 kB Created 2006 06 13 21 54 11 Changed 2006 06 22 12 22 28 This system has a hard drive as the primary storage You can also use a USB memory stick an external USB drive Floppy or a File Server on the network For
308. ongo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Palettes Record Palettes are stored to the currently selected channel s To re record a Palette store it with the same number again In the recording popup for Palettes there is a Text field to label each Palette This is displayed every time the Palette is used NOTE 4 3 When you record a Palette it is also activated and will be recorded into the next Preset Each Device or Each Device Type In the Palette recording popup there is a choice to store the values individually for Each Device or for Each Device Type e Positions FOCUS are best stored for Each Device since they always are Unique for each Device channel e Color and Beam values are best stored for a Each Device Type since color and beam parameter levels are the same for each Device channel and can be reused NOTE If several Device Types are selected the highest selected channel of each type will be recorded An Each Device Palette individual will override an Each Device Type Palette General Record A Focus Palette 1 Select channel s 2 Initiate recording of next free Palette or Palette Function Key Feedback Record next free Focus amp You will get a popup Palette Record Focus Palette G amp You will get a popup Popup yeman o Record new Palette Type First free Palette 42 Palette Name Stage Right Record attributes for Each De
309. ongo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Settings Channel Press SETUP and use the right left arrows to select the Channel Settings tab e Use the down arrow to select a cell e Use MODIFY or MODIFY to change values WEE O Settings Channels Crossfade Masters System Attributes Outputs MIDI ID Level 100 Step Level Step Value At mode Release Time Slower level wheel response Use REM DIM as Balance Channel Settings 4 2 The Channel Settings are general for all Channel Views Function Explanation Default value ID Level The level used by the ID function 100 hold CH and press LEVEL Step Level The Level applied when pressing 70 LEVEL without any value Step Value The Level applied when pressing 5 the keys At Mode Activate the Channel Command 1 Off Syntax of At Mode Direct Mode Release Time 4 1 Default release time for Captured 3 channels Slower level wheel Reduces the response speed of Off response 4 1 the level wheel Use REM DIM as Balance Sets the function of the REM DIM Off 4 2 key to BALANCE See Channels Command Syntax See Channels Capture Mode See Channels Balance Mode 402 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Settings Crossfade Press SETUP and use the right left arrows to select the Crossfade Settings tab e Use the down arrow to select a cell e Use MODIFY or MODIFY to change valu
310. ons annel Database The Patch functions are found in the following lists Description List Functions The easiest way to patch or remove dimmers amp devices Patch Wizard Patch Clear and Reset single or multiple devices or dimmers Channel settings Also a patch summary Channel List Edit output address ch scale factor constant level rename Individual device settings Patch clear or edit single moving devices Device Settings Invert or swap pan tilt Scroller roll amp calibration Change template channel or address Outputs and the assigned desk channels and output settings Output List Edit channel scale factor curve Assign up to four texts to each channel creates auto groups NOTE Channel Database Edit text ABCD As soon as a moving device is patched the channel symbol in the channel views will get an extra field for moving device information 137 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Patch Patch Wizard The Patch Wizard is opened from the Browser Browser gt Patching gt Patch Wizard See Navigating Browser There are three sections e Patch Dimmer patch one or a range of dimmers e Patch Device patch one or a range of devices e Set Clear clear or reset a range all outputs devices or renaming Patch Dimmer s Enter the number of dimmers the desk channel DMX address and universe If you check Replace exi
311. ons r A a a E E n E Ea E a EEE 263 MASTER PAGES nocens eean aa Een geg 264 Master e e 265 Master Pages Record 4 1 cisicccisseccaatecasdcaiassccacscassiazasasiaevasssdeacasashaaes sntedetanes 266 Master Pages Functions e EE 267 M ster Pages BE e E 268 Master Pages List COMMIS oe nanea a E E AR R ES 268 MASTER Pas EE 270 Master Page Columns 3 scout cose Sege r bev NEES 270 Master Pages Er 272 Master Page Times In Out Wat 272 Master Page Times Page Time 272 Master Page Times BPM cecccecccsseesseeseesseeescesecesceecesecesecseceecaecaecnaecaeecaeeeaeeeneeeneees 272 Master Pages Auto update Mode LI 273 Master Pages Display RE EE 274 KEE 275 RT COMO al E 276 DG yiCess NEE 277 Device Control Introduction sssesseseesseesseesseesseeesseeesstessresserssersssressseesssees 278 Moving Device Controls Explanation 20 0 0 eccesesecssessseecesecseesecseesecaseeceaecaeesecneseeenaeeeeegs 279 Device Control Lamp Strike amp Reser 280 Control Soft Key Page Functions 200 ccc escseeeecneesecsseeeessecaeesecneesecnaeeeceaecaeesecnesseenaeseeeas 281 Device Control Home Foster Sege veer deeden eer tege end egeege 282 Device Control U1 U2 U3 4 1 coe cccccccccccccccecsesssseceeeseceeeesenseaeeeeeeeens 283 U1 U3 Setting Up Parameters LI 283 Device Control Mask 3 284 Mask FUn Ct Onis usetze noes eee SES a ENEE edd 284 Mask Rtg Seet aseene O deeg eege EE 285 Device EE 286 Select Sub select
312. ord the selected amp You will get a popup channels to Preset where you confirm recording this Preset and can write a text label 214 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Presets Update Updates the preset in the playback connected to the channel control This can be Live Blind any Master Playback or a step in the Preset List Action Key Feedback Update changed levels You will get a simpler and attributes to the version of the Recording currently loaded Preset popup See The Recording Popup NOTE If you are in the Live field the Preset loaded to the A field of the Main Playback will be updated 215 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Presets List You can view edit and create new Presets blind in the Preset List PRESET or Browser gt Presets See Introduction to Presets See also Preset List Functions 3 Preset list St main Playback Preset List Non zero channels 47 49 50 F ken E es kennd ee Preset Text Channels Attributes Dynamics Mask F Time C Time B Time F Delay First step t rg sert Changes GET GET G T ET Start effect kan Preset List Columns 4 2 Column Input Function Preset No input The number of this Preset cannot be edited Text ABCDE Press MODIFY to activate and end text input This text is shown also in the Playback views Channels No input S
313. ortcuts Master Pages Shortcuts Devices To Home Position Shortcuts Device Attribute Editors Shortcuts Device Masking Shortcuts Device Palette Recording Shortcuts Device Palette Activating Shortcuts Device Palette Specials Shortcuts Device Palette Views Shortcuts Device Palettes In Masters Shortcuts Device Align amp Fetch Shortcuts Patch amp Outputs Shortcuts Main Display General Shortcuts Times Shortcuts Track Shortcuts Presets Shortcuts Groups Shortcuts Live amp blind Shortcuts Record Functions Shortcuts Update Functions Shortcuts Channel Text Wizard Shortcuts Main Playback Shortcuts Sequence Editor Shortcuts Direct Selects Shortcuts Notes 536 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Select Channels These are the keys and shortcuts for selecting channels Some of them assume the Command Syntax is set to RPN see Channels Command Syntax DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Select a channel IEN Add channel to the channel selection IEN Subtract channel from the channel selection EJ G Select a range of channels G Step to the next channel ES Step to the previous channel E Select all channels with a level in the Main Playback ALL Select all channels with a level in any Playback CALL Deselect all channels 4 1 Invert the channel selection Invert the channel selection ll
314. ot be edited here Channel 0 6144 The number of the desk channel this device is assigned to Template Dropdown Shows the device template dropdown to menu change Device Address Shows the device address change by address universe You can change universe by universe Inv Pan Off On Invert pan for this device Inv Tilt Off On Invert tilt for this device Swap Pan Tilt Off On Swap pan tilt for this device Scroller Roll Dropdown Shows the assigned scroller roll menu dropdown to change See Scroller Rolls Calibration Editor MODIFY Press MODIFY to open the Calibration Editor for a specific scroller roll See Calibrate Individual Scroller Rolls 145 No No No No oller Roll Scroller Roll Scroller Roll Scroller Roll Scroller Roll Scroller Roll Calibration Ec Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Settings Patching 4 2 It is possible to Patch devices directly into the Device Settings tab You can use any channel selection to patch fast Function Key Feedback Insert a new 4 INSERT A new Device is inserted Device Delete the The selected Device is deleted selected Device You can only delete one device at a time Insert the current INSERT The current channel selection is channel selection inserted as Devices as devices 146 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Patch Rename Channels You can change the number used to a
315. ou can set a Keep Dynamics flag for a parameter group Focus Color Beam by holding KEEP DYNAM and pressing either of these keys 375 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Effect Library 4 1 The Effect Library is a library of predefined Dynamic Templates that are used to start Dynamic Effects Open by holding MODIFY pressing DYN EFFECT 4 1 or Browser gt Effect Library 3 Effect Library Parameters Int Pan Til Foc Foe Cya Mag Yel Amb Whi Col Fan Til Str Int Pan Mag bort Mag fours CTO Magyell bort Mag Yel Int blin Int h Dynamic Effect Library Columns amp Functions Column Input Function Effect MODIFY Starts the selected Effect for the currently selected channel s Text Press MODIFY to activate and end text input Parameters Opens the Dynamic Template editor See Dynamic Template Editor Create OffsRel See Relations amp Distance DelayRel See Relations amp Distance Distance See Relations amp Distance 376 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamic Template Editor Create 4 1 1 Open the Effect Library by holding MODIFY and pressing DYN EFFECT 4 1 2 Go to the last step using the arrow keys 3 Press INSERT to create a new Template 4 Go to TEXT and press MODIFY to enter a name Press MODIFY again to confirm 5 Go to Parameters and press MODIFY to open the Template Editor 6 Press INSERT to c
316. ow Color Color Sp Strobe On Go sO Tracking 27 29 3 Welt Tracking OPEN Tracking 79 elt Tracking OPEN NOTE Select format by pressing FORMAT Hold FORMAT and press Down Arrow to open up Time and Delay rows See Device Times Attribute Time Editor 303 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Preset Attribute Editor Columns 4 2 These are the different Moving Device parameters that are displayed for each with their current values For editing see Device Views Editing Function group Parameters Explanation Channel amp Level No input The number of the device is highlighted when selected and red when focused with NEXT LAST The level is indicated to the right Device 4 2 Delete Device Press DELETE to delete this device completely GoOnGo GoOnGo or GolnB Sets the flag if this Device shall per Device move on GO or when the Device is loaded to the B field The value is toggled No value will follow this flag for the Sequence Step FOCUS Pan Tilt Focus The parameters that exist for the parameters Speed selected device are shown with their values COLOR Cyan Magenta The parameters that exist for the parameters Yellow Color selected device are shown with Color2 CTO Color their values speed etc BEAM parameters Focus Iris Zoom The parameters that exist for the Strobe Gobo Gobo selected device are shown with lt gt Gobo rot etc their valu
317. p The Group list is opened and focused at group GROUP focused at the specified group Update changes to UPDATE Updates all changes in the the selected Group T current group There is a channels over zero RECORD RECORD POPUP after the first key 4 3 are stored Insert a new Group INSERT Inserts a new group with the next free number with the channels that are selected Insert a new Group Ce INSERT Inserts a new group with this with number number with the channels that are selected Delete selected Group DELETE Deletes the selected group Cannot be undone Set text to a Group MODIFY Press MODIFY in the text cell enter the text and press MODIFY to exit 206 Selected and non zero channels Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Groups Display List You can use this list to view select add and subtract groups to the current channel selection Function Console Action Open the Group list in the DISPLAY LIST amp Opens the Group List main display of the GROUP Use the trackball in console Display List mode to scroll Select a group Trackball in Display Select with the trackball List Mode and right or left click Add a group to the Trackball in Display Hold right or left click and current selection List Mode press Subtract a group from the Trackball in Display Hold right or left click and current selection List Mode press
318. panel Console Main Display 524 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Key FORMAT F4 Function Change Format in Channel and Attribute views See Navigating Channel Views Additional Functions Hold FORMAT and use the level wheel to zoom in Channel and Attribute Views e Additional Functions Hold FORMAT and press arrow keys up down to change detail level in views e Location Navigation Pad right See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key GO Ctrl G e Function Start a crossfade in the Main Playback See Main Playback Transport Keys e Location In the Main Playback See Main Playback Introduction Console Key GO in Master Playback N A e Function Start a crossfade in the Master Playback See Master Playback Playback Keys e Location Next to the Master Playbacks See Master Playback Playback Keys Console Key GO BACK Ctrl B e Function Crossfade to the previous step in the Main Playback See Main Playback Transport Keys e Additional Functions Reverse the ongoing crossfade in the Main Playback e Location In the Main Playback See Main Playback Introduction Console Key GO BACK in Master Playback N A e Function Crossfade to the previous step in the Master Playback See Master Playback Playback Keys Additional Functions Reverse the ongoing crossfade in the Master Playback Location Next to the Master Playbacks See Master Playback
319. paring channels DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Compare the light in the Channel Control with its recorded version Compare the light in the Channel Control with preset Toggle Balance mode on off BALANCE Step with Check mode to the next channel amp Step with Check mode to the previous channel SI COMPARE and BALANCE are soft keys in the Channels Soft Key Page of the Main Display of the console BALANCE can be set instead of REM DIM in the console settings See Channels Compare Mode and Channels Balance Mode 538 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Select Nth Functions Functions for selecting every Nth channels from the current channel selection All these functions are Soft Keys in the Channels Random Select Soft Key Page of the Main Display in the console DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Select the SELECT Soft Key Page in the Main SELECT Display Select every nth channel sl Select Nth Select every 2nd channel Select 2nd Select every 3rd channel Select 3rd Select every 2nd channel randomly RANDOM amp Select 2nd Select every 3rd channel randomly RANDOM amp Select 3rd J Select every Nth channel randomly RANDOM amp Select Nth Select devices that have changed SELECT CHANGE J Shortcuts Channel Views These shortcuts control the
320. patch mode 2 You are currently in View mode Do you want to switch to Patch mode Once in patch mode it is possible to patch by output or by channel 159 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Output Editor Patch By Channel 4 2 As soon as a channel is selected the Output Editor is automatically in channel mode Select a single channel or a range of channels to patch to Outputs Use 0 MODIFY to unpatch First activate Patching Mode See Patching Mode Patch a single channel Action Key Feedback 1 Select channel Channel is selected 2 Patch to ouput GJ A popup will ask if you want to replace existing output s 3 Confirm Patch is complete Patch confirmation Do you want to patch channel 11 to output 512 Replace existing Patch a channel range Action Key Feedback 1 Select channel range Channel functions Channels are selected 2 Patch to output s A popup will ask if you want to patch a range of outputs starting at 3 Confirm Patch is complete Output Editor Patch By Output 4 2 As soon as an output is selected the Output Editor is automatically in outputmode Select a single output or a range of outputs to patch to channels Use 0 MODIFY to unpatch First activate Patching Mode See Patching Mode 160 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Patch a single ouput Action Key Feedback 1 Select
321. pen 2 Use the down and right arrow keys to open the NETWORK node Browser Independents Printer Wizard v Network Send Play Fetch Play Convert to Server Convert to Backup Backup Syne 3 Select Backup Sync You will get a confirmation message in the bottom of the screens Also the background color of the screens in the Backup System will change to a brighter color 428 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Network Backup Setup 4 2 A system can be set up to start as Backup or Server regardless of the order in which the systems are powered or by detecting this order There is also a setting for Auto transferring the current play to the Backup when both systems are powered up These settings are in the System Settings of the Login Screen before launching the Congo application 1 Exit to the login screen if Congo is running Exit in the Browser gt File node 2 Open System Settings 3 Select Backup Setup at the bottom e Sy eat 7 Backup settings Server Backup Always Server Always Backup e Server Backup depends on startup order A4uto transfer play to Backup NOTE If you are using Always Server or Backup make sure it s set up the same way in both systems When the Auto transfer setting is checked the following actions will be performed each time you make a New Open Save or Save As command on the Server e Transfer play to the Backup e Save play on the Backup e A
322. pen the corresponding editor by pressing MODIFY equences hannel Times 1 dynamics 1 Master Links 1 69 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Navigating Tabs All data and editors are opened in a tab e There are direct keys for most tabs PRESET PLAYBACK etc e Tabs can also be opened from the Browser e Two tabs are never closed LIVE and MAIN PLAYBACK 2 Live 1 Main Playback 3 Preset List 4 Group List 5 Sequences Navigating The Tabs Function Key Feedback Toggle open tabs Trap Steps through all open tabs in all screens Select Tab Selects the tab with that number Split view TAB amp Down Arrow First press creates a vertical second press a horizontal split Reset view TAB amp Exits a split view Move a Tab CTAB amp Right Arrow Moves the selected tab to the right or left screen Close Tab ESC Closes any selected tab except Live and Playback Reset all Tabs amp TAB Closes all tabs except Live and Playback Reset all Tabs amp ap Closes all tabs including locked including locked ag ones except Live and Playback Tab Setup and Lock 4 2 It is possible to lock a tab from closing when you press ESC This is done in the Tab Setup Hold SETUP and press TAB to open T CA Tab Parameter Setup Include Channel View in Pool Lock tab from closing Include Channel View in Pool refers only to Live Vie
323. pen the NETWORK node Browser Independents Printer Wizard v Network Send Play Fetch Play Convert to Server Convert to Backup Backup Sync 3 Select the appropriate action Send Fetch Play You will get a confirmation message in the bottom of the screens Once the Play is transferred you have the same Play information in both consoles The Play file name is transferred and the playbacks in the receiving system will position to the same steps as in the main system If you make changes in either console you have to transfer the Play to update the other console This guarantees that a programming crash in one system won t bring down the other system NOTE The Play is transferred but not saved You have to save it manually There is an Auto transfer Play option in the Backup Settings See Network Backup Setup 4 2 426 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Network Convert To Server Backup The Server system is the system that transmits output The Backup system will start doing so when it is converted to Server This will happen automatically in case of a crash it can be done manually at anytime too but only from the Backup itself The top of each screen indicates if a system is running as Server or Backup Congo Server Default Changing manually 1 Select the Browser by pressing BROWSER if it was selected it will be closed press again to open 2 Use the down and right arrow keys to o
324. pen the NETWORK node Browser Independents Printer Wizard v Network Send Play Fetch Play Convert to Server Convert to Backup Backup S 3 Select the appropriate action You will get a confirmation message in the bottom of the screens e Convert to Server can only be done from a backup for security reasons e Convert to Backup is only used if there are two servers in a network due to network dropouts 427 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Network Backup Sync 4 2 The link between the two consoles is activated from the Network node of the Browser This can only be done from the Server The following things are synchronized Loading new content into a Master Activating content from a Master with the Master key Changing the level of a Master fader Loading new content into playback 1 or 2 Starting a playback with the GO GOTO GO BACK and PAUSE keys GO commands include the current Sequence and position to make sure that the playbacks are at the same position Jumping in the Sequence with SEQ or GOTO Activating a new Master Page e Manual Crossfades when starting a manual crossfade a GO command is sent to the backup system to make sure that crossfade related things are started NOTE There is an Auto transfer Play option in the Backup Settings See Network Backup Setup 4 2 1 Select the Browser by pressing BROWSER if it was selected it will be closed press again to o
325. pening Attribute Editors for Devices DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Open Live Attribute Editor for selected Devices Open Attribute Editor for the Preset in field A ATTRIB amp Lal Open Attribute Editor for the Preset in field A PRESET amp ATTRIB Open Attribute Editor for the Preset in field B ATTRIB amp 8 Open Attribute Editor for a Preset on a Master ATTRIB amp Master Key Open Attribute Editor for Preset E PRESET amp ATTRIB Formats Keys and shortcuts for toggling information on off in the Attribute Editors DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Toggle Focus information FORMAT amp FOCUS Toggle Color information FORMAT amp COLOR Toggle Beam information FORMAT amp BEAM Toggle Time information FORMAT amp up down arrows Shortcuts Device Masking Keys and shortcuts for masking Device Attributes from recording DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Clear global Mask amp MASK Toggle global Mask on off MASK Toggle Focus parameters in global Mask mask amp FOCUS Toggle Color parameters in global Mask mask amp COLOR Toggle Beam parameters in global Mask MASK amp BEAM Toggle single parameter in global Mask MASK amp Wheel Key Open the Mask Editor window MODIFY amp MASK
326. permanent Capture mode Capture intensity and attributes for the selected Wheel channel in Capture mode Capture intensity and attributes for the selected amp channel s Capture the intensity of selected channel s amp Capture the attributes of selected channel s CAPTURE amp Capture a parameter of selected channel s amp Capture Focus Parameters of selected channel s amp Capture Color Parameters of selected channel s amp Capture Beam Parameters of selected channel s amp Release functions DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Releases the selected ch from Capture Mode RELEASE Release all Captured channels RELEASE RELEASE Release all Captured in seconds sl RELEASE amp Wheel key Release intensity and attributes for the selected RELEASE a CH ID channel s Release the intensity of selected channel s RELEASE amp LEVEL Release the attributes of selected channel s RELEASE amp ATTRIB Capture a parameter of selected channel s RELEASE amp Wheel key Release Focus Parameters of selected RELEASE amp FOCUS channel s Release Color Parameters of selected channel s RELEASE amp COLOR Release Beam Parameters of selected RELEASE amp BEAM channel s 556 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Dynamics These Dynamics functions can be used to start stop and control Dynamic Effects Many of them are soft keys in the Dynamics Soft
327. popup the next free number GROUP where you confirm recording this group and can write a text label Record a new Group with Ce amp You will get a popup a specific number GROUP where you confirm recording this group and can write a text label NOTE The order in which the channels were selected is stored with the group 900 groups 4 3 900 groups is a remnant from the eighties when consoles often never had more than 900 channels To be able to access user definable channel groups from a remote control for focusing an exception was made for these presets In Congo groups 1 999 are available instead If an play with 900 groups is imported they will be converted to Congo Groups 203 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Groups Select Channels 4 1 You can add and subtract channels that are stored in Groups to from the current channel selection Function Key Feedback Select all channels in a GROUP All channels with a level in Group 4 1 the specified Group are selected and can be controlled by wheel or with level functions Add all channels in a Tel arRouP amp 4 All channels with a level in Group to the current the specified Group are channel selection added to the current channel selection Subtract all channels ina RouP amp CT All channels with a level in Group from the current the specified Group
328. ps Tepoupl amp THRU Levels from Group are fetched sl CGROUP a LEVEL Load selection to master GROUP amp Master Key Bring Group in proportionately on the wheel GROUP amp Wheel Add Group to LIVE sl GROUP amp LIVE Add Group to BLIND GROUP amp BLIND Load a Group to a Master Playback sl GROUP amp Master Key Open the Group List GROUP Temporary Direct Select mode GROUP held down Open Group List focused at Group sl MODIFY amp GROUP Shortcuts Live amp Blind 4 1 These are keys and shortcuts for loading and clearing the content of Live and Blind DESCRIPTION SYNTAX Sets the Channel Control to the A field of the Main Playback and focuses the Live tab Sets the Channel Control to the Blind field and focuses the Blind Tab Clear all channels and levels in Live amp CHID Clear all channels and levels in Live amp LIVE Clear all channels and levels in Blind amp Copy Live to Blind amp BLIND Copy Blind to Live amp Load Preset in Live PRESET amp Add Preset to Blind PRESET amp Add Group to Live GROUP amp LIVE Add Group to Blind GROUP amp Adds the content of the Blind field to the total output amp Wheel 552 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Shortcuts Record Functions 4 1 These are shortcuts for recording Preset Groups and master pages
329. r from a Master or Crossfade Playback A Sequence can be played back in Chase mode See Sequences Dynamic Effects terminology Dynamic Effects are wave forms that are applied to intensity or attribute parameters for a selection of channels to provide a Dynamic Effect for example a circular movement or a ballyhoo See Dynamics N A N A 49 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Quick Tour Control Hierarchy Dimmer channels are treated as HTP all other moving device parameters are treated as LTP There is a Grand Master and Inhibit Masters that can subtract from the output Playbacks Introduction Intensities and parameters can be played back from the following playbacks The main playback and Live field The 40 master playbacks The Direct Selects The Independents The Blind field The Freeze field The following functions can affect the playback of an intensity or parameter Capture Mode Exclusive Mode Inhibit Mode Balance Mode Park Scale Mute 4 2 Solo 4 2 Control Hierarchy Master Playbacks Light output from the Masters is added to the output on a Highest Takes Precedence basis Device attributes are controlled by Last Takes Precedence An Independents Master set to Inhibit Mode will subtract the assigned channels from the output similar to the function of the Grand Master See Master Playbacks Control Hierarchy Main Playback Light output from the Main Playback is added to the output
330. r going up and green for down Park status is showed as a dimmed Output symbol 214 in image Next and Last can be used to step around within a selection of channels or outputs 197 199 in image Hold FORMAT and press down up arrow to open close detailed view showing parameter names Patch Mode Output selection mode Al outputs 202 203 204 WOR 227 227 208 209 128 158 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Hold FORMAT and move the level Wheel to zoom out in Patch Mode Output selection mode 1 KS LORSE RSC ET EH TR EE ERT EC RER TR EE ET EE CN ICT EECH B A a Se 8 SR TT PT een Output Editor Dimmer Check Mode 4 2 Dimmer Check mode is a fast way to check the outputs consecutively 1 Select first output with OUTPUT 2 Set a Level for checking 1 255 3 Press or to use this level and step to the next previous Output Levels that are higher than zero are restored automatically as they are passed by 4 Select Output zero to release the last Output from check mode Output Editor Patching Mode 4 2 There is a View Mode and a Patching Mode for the Output Editor indicated in the top status bar of the tab View Only Channel selection mode All outputs Patch Mode Channel selection mode All outputs In Patching mode single channels outputs and ranges of these can be patched really fast Enter patch mode by pressing MODIFY There will be a confirmation popup r TTo Activate
331. r normal operation of the console Freeze The current output to stage is frozen A blue FREEZE Indication will appear on the top of all screens See Freeze Mode Facepanel Grand Master The Grand Master is located in the top right corner of the console facepanel Grand Master Console Feedback Grand Master Will scale the total output of all intensities only when below 100 except channels controlled by the Independents in Exclusive mode A red Level Indication will appear on the top of all screens fz y E D NOTE Attributes are not affected by the Grand Master 45 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Facepanel Trackball NOTE Congo JR has no integrated mouse or trackball It is delivered with an external mouse that is connected via USB The trackball has three different modes that are activated with the keys around it Selects and scrolls in Display Lists 7 D Control any two ws D parameters Display List Parameter Screen cursor mouse Key Feedback Cursor The trackball controls the cursor in the software This is mainly used for creating channel layouts Parameter Controls Pan and Tilt of the selected Device s Display List Is used to select and scroll Display Lists See Display Lists NOTE It is possible to connect any USB mouse or trackball See External Mouse Or Trackball 46 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Qui
332. r upper 21 40 row of Master Playback faders This chapter contains the following sections Master Pages Introduction Master Pages Record Master Pages Functions Master Pages List Master Pages Editor Master Pages Times Master Pages Auto update Mode Master Pages Display List 264 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Pages Introduction You can store all content of 20 Master Playbacks into a Master Page Master Pages can be stepped through or loaded General Functionality Master Pages are stored for 20 Master Playbacks Page 1 amp 2 are automatically loaded when creating a new Play 4 1 You can store up to 999 Master Pages Each Page can have a text label A Page can be Transparent meaning empty Master Playbacks are not cleared when this page is loaded Each Page can have a Time and BPM affecting all chasers presets and palettes NOTE Loading a new Master Page puts the new content in a pending state if the master is above 0 When the Master is faded to 0 the new information is loaded 265 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Pages Record 4 1 All content changes in the affected Master Range 1 20 or 21 40 are automatically recorded 4 1 when Auto Update is On default They can be recorded manually to the same Page or to another Page as well Function Key Feedback Record to the current
333. ranged in a list called a Sequence with predefined fade times Presets can be modified blind or live Presets can be copied Presets can be added together to create new Presets You can retrieve individual channel levels from recorded Presets with Fetch When a Preset is recorded in the A playback it is automatically placed in numerical order in a step of the Sequence in that playback NOTE A Preset is a memory that can be reused in several Sequences or Playbacks at the same time To delete it completely you have to go to the source of all Presets the Preset List This does NOT mean that the Preset number will disappear from the Sequence or from Master Pages but it means that it will be an empty Preset with no channels or levels stored It also means that the number of the Preset will be regarded as an unused Preset in the system 4 1 When deleting a Preset in the Preset List you will get a checkbox option of deleting all related Sequence Steps 210 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Presets Record You can record the output on stage or part of it to a Preset What you see in the active Channel View is what is recorded Normally only changed moving device parameters are recorded Function Key Feedback Record the content of the You will get a popup See selected Channel View to The Recording Popup a new Preset with the next free number Record a new Preset with You will get a popup Se
334. rary file that will be overwritten if anything happens later BOTH files are needed to solve the problem Thank you for your help What to do after a crash In most cases your play will have been saved recover asc In this case you got a popup explaining this and returned to the login screen e Login again If you don t return to the login screen which is extremely unlikely you need to restart the console e Press Esc if the front panel seems frozen e Try resetting the console using the reset button on the back in the middle e f none of these efforts work contact your local ETC Support 130 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Making a crash or bug report If you have the possibility try to reproduce the problem by repeating your actions If you can send us a description of how to repeat the problem reliably we are much very likely to solve it rapidly Crash or bug report Date Your Name Phone fax mail Congo Software version 4 1 bottom left corner of the main screen or About Congo in the Browser Description example 1 was trying to edit a Preset on stage 2 started a crossfade 3 got a crash with a message FILE main cpp LINE 37 or Offset 12345678 4 It is repeatable following 1 amp 2 Please fax the bugs reports to Congo BUG REPORT at 49 8024 990 300 or preferably e mail them to congo etcconnect com 131 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Troubleshooting
335. re opened from the Login Screen which automatically is shown after powering up the console Selecting this option using the arrow keys and press MODIFY This popup is opened Use TAB to move around and click to activate enter information ESC will close The settings are explained in the following pages bee ae System settings General System name Congo Preferred language english Preferred help language japanese File Server path Inverse LCD Channel downgrade Swap 0 and C buttons Time settings International settings Software upgrade code Networking Preferred IP address Anslutning till lokalt naty 192 168 0 199 ETCNet2 ETCNet2 System priority ETCNet2 EDM amp Start Avab IPX ArtNet Streaming 4CN Logical network Advanced settings Backup setup 415 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Login Settings General Functions 4 3 These are the general functions System settings General System name Congo Preferred language english Preferred help language japanese File Server path Inverse LCD Channel downgrade Swap 0 and C buttons Time t International settings Software upgrade code Function Feedback System Name Any system name main backup foh can be used It is displayed at the top of each screen Preffered Language Select a language with MODIFY and confirm with MODIFY The application will re launch automatically 4 3 Preferred h
336. reate a step Each step contains the settings for a single parameter for example a pan tilt effect would have two steps 4 Dynamic Template Editor New Ch Index Parameter Table Delay Offset Siz Rate Wait gt 100 See Dynamic Template Editor Functions Dynamic Template Editor Functions Column Input Function Ch Index G 0 means all selected channels are affected by this Mon Step For numbers gt 0 only channels that match this index number will be activated For example 2 means that only every second channel will be affected of the selected channels Parameter MODIFY Opens a dropdown Select which parameter this step shall affect Table MODIFY Opens a dropdown Select which table this step should apply See Dynamics Tables Delay MODIFY A delay in before the step starts to move Offset MODIFY An Offset in where in the table this step starts Size EN See Size amp Rate MODIFY Rate G See Size amp Rate MODIFY Wait EB A wait time in percent 1 1000 for this step before MODIFY it is repeated The Wait time is relative to all other steps 377 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Preset Dynamics Editor 4 2 The Preset Dynamics Editor is identical to the Live Dynamics Editor All editing functions are the same See Dynamics Edit Live Dynamic Effects 4 Preset Dynamics 29 0 ID II
337. ress BLIND when you are in Live the channels in Live are automatically copied to Blind Hold BLIND and use the level wheel to pile the content of Blind HTP to the output Load the content of any playback to Blind and load the content of Blind to any playback Record the content of Blind 82 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Blind Blind Tab The Blind Tab BLIND allows you to edit any information without affecting the output 4 Blind All channals The Blind Tab Functions 4 1 Action Key Feedback Activate the Blind tab BLIND The Blind tab is opened All Channel controls are mapped to Blind Fade in Blind BLIND amp Wheel The content of Blind is piled on top of the rest of the output Move Blind to A BLIND amp A The content of Blind is moved to the A field It is immediately output Move Blind to B BLIND amp EJ The content of Blind is moved to the B field Press GO to fade in Move Live to Blind LIVE amp The content of Live is moved to the Blind field Load Blind to A 4 1 BLIND amp LIVE The content of Blind is loaded to the A field Load Blind to a Master BLIND amp Selected channel s of Master Key Blind are loaded to that Master Playback Record Blind RECORD A popup will ask you to confirm that the content of Blind is recorded to the next free preset 83 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 B
338. ribute Views there is a wizard for fanning parameter times This Wizard will only open when a Time or Delay cell is selected The selected cells are fanned between the devices 1 Open an Attribute view See Device Views Live and Device Views Presets 2 Open the Time and Delay rows by holding FORMAT and pressing the Down Arrow See Device Times Attribute Time Editor 3 Select the Time or Delay cells for the parameters and devices intended Mac 300M4 Pan Tilt Focus Sp Ka 32 Tracking 5 5 5 50 32 Tracking 4 Press WIZARD The Fan Time Wizard popup will open o a WE e Fan Time Wizard Fanning wil be performed on the selected celis Select the min and max times and the distribution Minimum time Maximum time Distribution Low gt High Low gt High High gt Low Centered High Centered Low 5 Select values and confirm 313 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Devices Palettes Moving Device values can be stored in Palettes that are used to recall these values Palettes can be stored in Presets as references to the stored values Palettes are organized in parameter groups Focus Color Beam All This chapter contains the following sections Device Palettes Introduction Device Palettes Record Device Palettes Update Device Palettes Edit Device Palettes Lists Device Palettes Activate By Number Device Palettes Direct Mode Device Palettes In Maste
339. rk in a permanent Capture mode and there are functions for Capturing any part of a ch Permanent Capture Mode 4 2 When Capture mode is activated all channels that are changed are automatically captured Action Key Feedback Activate Capture Capture will light up All Mode channels that are selected and changed will remain at that level until released Deactivate Capture Capture light goes off Mode Captured channels remain captured until released Captured channels will have a red background for the channel number 189 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Capturing levels or parameters 4 2 Regardless if Capture mode is active or not it is always possible to capture channels or part of channels Action Key Feedback Capture everything CAPTURE amp Captured channels will have a red background for the channel number Capture level amp Level is captured until released Capture attributes amp Attributes are captured until released Capture parameters amp Parameters are captured until released Capture Focus amp Parameters are captured until parameters FOCUS released Capture Color amp Parameters are captured until parameters released Capture Beam CAPTURE amp BEAM Parameters are captured until parameters released Capture Beam CAPTURE amp U1 Parameters are captured until parameters U3 released Releasing Captured
340. rk with Syntax 2 Activate Balance All other channels in the Mode channel view will be set to 0 temporarily You can now work with the selected channels 3 Exit Balance Mode The channel levels that were muted are restored NOTE It is not possible to use RECORD when Balance mode is active Balance Mode Key 4 2 It is possible to set the REM DIM key to function as BALANCE instead This is done in the System Settings See System Settings Channel 193 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels Random Select It is possible to randomize the order of the channels within the current selection This can be used to get a random order in a chase or with a Dynamic Effect These functions are keys in the Selects Soft Key Page Congo Select Select 2nd Change Select 3rd Random Select Nth F Wi Congo Jr Select Select Select Random 3rd Nth Change lt Les LJ IL TI O Action Soft Key Feedback 1 Select the channels See Channel you want to work with Command Syntax 2 Select the Selects Soft This changes soft Key Page menu to the Select functions 3 Make a random A random order is selection applied it can be used by the Chase Wizard You can use the numbering functions that allow you to select every 2nd 3rd or Nth together with the random function Function Soft Key Feedback Select every random 2nd
341. ro Out ces mics Link Page Note To the right is a graphical representation of this fade with IN time 5 seconds and OUT tima S seconds Bed front You can toggle this view on off by holding FORMAT and pressing the RIGHT or LEFT arrow 233 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences List You can insert and delete sequences and change playback modes chase in the Sequences list SEQ or BROWSER gt Sequence 3 Sequences Sequence Text Mode tate Bounce Reverse Single shot BPM Main Normal 100 off of Off Normal gt Of Off Off Chase 1 7 Chase Off Off Off Chase 11 Chase 0 off off off Chase 2 Chase D gt Of Off Of Seq 31 37 Normal Off Off Off Song Sweden ormal 100 Off Off Song Uk Normal Song Germany Normal Song Finland Normal Sequences List Insert Delete Load Function Key Feedback Insert a new sequence Sequence is inserted into the list Delete a sequence The selected sequence is deleted Load a sequence The selected sequence is loaded to this Master Playback The Sequence is deleted and all timing and text information The Preset still exists in the Preset list and can be used again Sequences List Columns Column Input Function Sequence MODIFY The number of this Step cannot be edited Press MODIFY to open the Sequence List Text MODIFY Press MODIFY to activate and end text input This text is shown in the
342. rol Fan FAN is used to distribute values of a parameter evenly around a centre point There are four different shapes of fan Linear S S shaped V V shaped U U shaped Function Key Feedback 1 Select channels Channel Select Selected channels are functions highlighted in the Channel View 2 Select base channel The focused channel is highlighted in red 3 Fan parameter amp Parameter is fanned according to the shape in the Settings around the channel focused by NEXT LAST If no base channel is selected the centre channel of the selection is used Fan Settings Hold SETUP and press FAN to open the Fan Settings Fan Shape Setup Fan Shape Select with arrow keys and press MODIFY to confirm 289 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Control Fetch Copy Use FETCH to copy parameter values for moving devices from any Preset First select the devices you wish to copy values to Function Key Feedback Fetch FOCUS values FETCH Focus values from Preset from Preset FOCUS are copied to the selected channel s Fetch COLOR values sl FETCH Color values from Preset from Preset COLOR are copied to the selected channel s Fetch BEAM values from FETCH Beam values from Preset Preset BEAM are copied to the selected channel s Fetch single parameter FETCH Parameter
343. rolling parameters in Moving Devices Pressing FOCUS COLOR or BEAM will activate this and leave the Dynamics settings for the wheels To return to Dynamic Controls press the soft key DYNAMICS 465 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 am Mode Direct Selects Setup 4 1 In the Direct Select area the following content is set up Use the BANK key together with the Direct Select keys to toggle a bank within a selection One bank of Dynamic controls upper left plus one bank of Dynamic Effects lower left i Offset Offset Offset Offset Delay Delay Delay Delay Dynan Evenly 1 2 1 3 1 4 All T2 EL 1 4 ctrl 1 10 10 Dynan fly One bank of Parameter range upper right 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 Select Select Select Select Select Select Select Select Select Select Param Param Param Param Param Param Param Param Param Param Select a type of Device first with the Groups on Masters 1 10 Then select a parameter type FOCUS COLOR BEAM for the Main Display of the console Then press any parameter key in the Main Display section to choose a parameter for these keys Example Strobe parameters Param 1 2 3 4 A D 7 8 9 10 1 10 OPEN Strobe Closed Pulse C Pulse Rnd Rnd Rnd Rnd Rnd Strobe Fast Medium Slow P Fast P Slow One bank of Beam Palettes lower right w LL LLL 466 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 MUTE amp SOLO 4 2 Mute amp
344. roup Parameters Explanation Channel amp Level No input The number of the device is highlighted when selected and red when focused with NEXT LAST The level is indicated to the right FOCUS parameters Pan Tilt Focus Speed Current parameter values are shown COLOR parameters Cyan Magenta Yellow Current parameter values Color Color2 CTO are shown Color speed etc BEAM parameters Focus Iris Zoom Current parameter values Strobe Gobo Gobo are shown lt gt Gobo rot etc CONTROL parameters Aux 1 Control Dummy Current parameter values ch s etc are shown Control parameters labeled control can be edited but will not be stored Aux values are stored NOTE Hold COLUMN and move wheel to change column sizes 4 2 300 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Views Filtering Hold the FORMAT key and press FOCUS COLOR or BEAM to select which parameter group to hide show in a Moving Device View 3 Live Attributes ColorWashM Pan Control ZS SE ZS 88 SO so s xs Gi SO Gi S Si 8 eo oooeogogegee es gt E S Selected and changed devices Live Attributes Channel Formats 4 2 You can toggle between these formats by pressing FORMAT Selected devices Non zero devices Selected and changed devices All devices The currently selected format is indicated in the top right corner of each Channel View 4 2 4
345. rs Device Palettes Select Active Channels Device Palettes Select Stored Channels Device Palettes Display List Device Palettes Focusing Mode 314 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Palettes Introduction A Palette is a memory for all or some parameters of a Moving Device A Palette is used to load these parameters quickly and stored as a reference in Presets for playback Direct selects are important for accessing Palettes See Direct Selects There are four kinds of Palettes Type Parameters Key Focus Palettes FOCUS Position parameters like pan tilt Color Palettes COLOR Color parameters like cyan magenta yellow color wheel Beam Palettes BEAM Beam parameters like gobo shape shutter focus iris All Palettes PALETTE All parameters All of same type or All Devices Palettes usually store individual values for all devices Color and Beam Palettes can be stored for one device and reused for all devices of the same type This choice is available in the recording popup Palettes in Presets When a Palette is used to position a Device before recording a Preset the Palette is referenced not the individual values for each Device This means that changing the Palette will update this reference in the whole Play Palettes in Direct Selects Palettes can be accessed from the Direct Selects 315 Congo and C
346. rs 4 1 SHIFT amp Hold keyboard SHIFT and press 1 9 to get special characters DELETE DELETE Console key is part of keyboard functions INSERT INSERT Console key is part of keyboard functions BACKSPACE C ALT Console key is part of keyboard functions Numbers Numerical keypad Console keys are part of keyboard functions See Accessories Ext Keyboard 395 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 IMPORT WIZARD You can import part of another play and plays from Strand Safari Expert Pronto or any other system providing they are in ASCII play format x asc on a USB memory stick connected to the Congo You can also import lists from Excel LightWright or WYSIWYG See Channel Database Import Text File Wizard This is done in the Import Wizard BROWSER gt File gt Import from gt Floppy Play Archive HD USB File Server ll Import Wizard Importing from C Congo Plays Rev 21 asc Importing parts of a play may produce unexpected results because some items depends on the presence of others Press the key to view online help Import What Nothing Start at Nothing Prs in main seq top at Stopa Prs in other seq CAUTION We strongly advice you to save your Play before using the Import Wizard since it can alter your Play greatly NOTE File ending has to be asc Import Wizard Functions Function Console screen Feedback 1 Open the Import The Import wizard
347. rs like Shutters are remapped to new Congo parameter numbers to preserve the corresponding data Palette references in sequences are handled Scroller Roll references in Palettes are handled NOTE Due to some difference in play structure some play data may not be transferred for example Safari Chase effects 399 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 SETTINGS The Settings define default times and values the behaviour of recording functions and attribute behaviour in faders during playback This chapter contains the following sections Settings Introduction Settings Channel Settings Crossfade Settings Master Settings System Settings Attribute Settings Output Settings MIDI 4 2 400 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Settings Introduction The system settings are opened with SETUP You can also open a local settings popup for any key by holding SETUP and pressing that key for example GO or RECORD The system settings popup contains the following sections OUTPUT gt Configure the DMX outputs of the console and visualisation ATTRIBUTE Configure default times and recording modes SYSTEM gt Configure Auto save rubberband beep remote etc MASTER gt Configure Flash and fade on time and Auto save master pages CROSSFADE gt Configure default times fader modes and fade direction CHANNEL gt Configure default values and select Command Syntax 401 Congo and C
348. rsion Info for any new update of software New functions may be added and old ones may have been changed There are three headers Bugs These are bugs that have been discovered and fixed Changes Features that have changed from previous software Features New features that have been added in this software 36 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 System Info Console Specification Console data Explanation Control channels Maximum 3072 channels numbering from 1 to 4999 Outputs Maximum 6144 outputs Output protocols DMX512 ETCNET2 AVABIPX and ArtNet over Ethernet Dimmers Free proportional patch unlimited per channel number Displays Up to three Monitors graphical LCD Display LED Displays Channel selection RPN and At Mode Direct Mode Dynamics 999 Channel groups 999 Presets 9999 Sequences amp Chases 999 Main Theatrical Style Playback 1 Master Playbacks 40 Backup media Harddisk USB Memory Power 110 V 230 V 47 63 Hz ca 270 VA Dimensions H x W x D Congo 165mm x 1135mm x 634mm Weight approx Congo 37kg 81 5 b 37 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 System Info Interface Specification Interfaces Explanation Monitor Three VGA interface standard Mouse or trackball USB Interface integrated in Congo Keyboard Integrated plus USB Interface DMX512 Output 1 amp
349. s highlighted Insert a link to Sequence Ce Sequence Step is Step linked When this step is faded in the next step will be Step In the Sequence List 248 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Load A Sequence can be loaded to the Main Playback or any Master Playback For information on how to control a Sequence once it is loaded see Main Playback and Master Playbacks Function Keys Feedback Load Sequence tothe SEQ amp Sequence is loaded to Main Playback PLAYBACK the Main Playback The light in A Active and B Next is not affected Load Sequence to a sl SEQ amp Sequence is loaded to Master Playback Master Ke the Master Playback NOTE Loading a non existent Sequence to Playback will open a window asking if you wish to create that Sequence You can load a sequence directly from the Browser as well Function Keys Feedback Load the selected LOAD amp Sequence is loaded to sequence to the Main PLAYBACK the Main Playback The Playback light in A Active and B Next is not affected Load the selected LOAD amp Sequence is loaded to sequence to a Master Master Ke the Master Playback Playback 249 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequences Playlist You can arrange the order in which sequences are played back in a Playlist The Playlist is opened from th
350. s set to Automatic attributes will also be recorded The time is default set to 100 See Presets Times Action Key Feedback Record the selected You will get a popup with channels to a Master amp Master Key the next free preset Playback suggested Record the selected You get the message channels with a specific Master Key Preset Recorded in the Preset number to a status bar Master Playback If no channels are selected all channels in A are recorded 4 1 To separate the number series of Presets in Masters and in the Main Playback the suggested Preset number if no number is entered will be starting at Preset 801 After this the last used number when recording to a Master will be incremented NOTE For a Master with a Sequence or Chase a new preset is recorded to that Sequence or Chase For a Preset all attributes are recorded except those Masked by the Global Mask For a Sequence step only changed attributes are recorded just like in the sequence of the Main Playback 4 2 Record Selected Channels To Any Preset Record the selected channels with attributes and dynamics to a specified Preset All moving device attributes for the selected channels will be recorded not only changed attributes Setting Key Feedback Record the selected amp You will get a popup channels to a new Preset where you confirm recording this Preset and can write a text label Rec
351. s to this format e Group keywords are now treated as real Groups and not as presets not in the sequence e Parameter Definitions are imported e Templates are imported e Devices are imported e Support for translation of parameter values from channel levels the Emphasis style to attribute parameters the Congo style 398 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Import Wizard Avab Expert 4 2 Expert plays can be read directly from a floppy drive or as ASCII plays from a USB See local manual for export instructions to this format The way Expert plays are read has changed completely to be able to read more data Using an external utility the Expert binary file format is translated into ASCII Light Cues and opened just like any other file Loading an Expert play is done from Browser gt File gt Open When a diskette with an Expert pla file is detected you get the option of converting it when you double click on it e An Export to Expert diskette command in the Browser allow you to export a Congo play to Expert format NOTE There are still some parts of the play that aren t imported More will come There are five parts in an expert play pla eff ren gl amp set All five are needed Import Wizard Avab VLC Safari 4 2 Most data from a Safari VLC play 3 5 or higher in ASCII format can be imported into Congo See local manual for export instructions to this format e Indexed parameter numbe
352. se E cos Ee 181 Toggle Channel viewing format 21 181 Channel Information basic GL 21 182 Channel Information detailed 21 183 Channel Information Running Fades AAA 184 Channel Information Info Box GI 185 Channels COMMAS EE 186 Select Channels A T e eedegeebesdesr egegg dee a aa Sees e o eR e deu 186 Set Channel Deye E a e a S ESAERA r Eege 187 Channels 8 bit 256 Step ele ergeet Ee e 188 Channels Capture Mode 4 2 ssesssssssssesssesssessseseesssessseesseessersseessseessseesseese 189 Permanent Capture Mode 21 189 Capturing levels or parameters GL 21 190 Releasing Captured Channels O 21 190 Channels Clear Functions 321 191 Chatinels Check e EE 192 Cha nnels Balance ME eege ee IER Balance Mode Keelt es cgissr de egerd ie tts EVdE deed dE dE Ed Zeie dd eee 193 Channels Random S lect cc3 sces gets cocssbeaghas tei sa et ties teavadeected dacs eiis 194 Channels Constant Level iis cccssseacsatidevsievssecceiatenssacasantine sa degeguea dd ENEE te 195 Ch nne ls ET EEN 196 Channels Used amp Unused aco o sak Sale Vacs ra a EE e L Aa S 197 Channels Group Wheel Mode 31 198 Chantnels Rem Dim 4 2 oan e RT A NN 200 GROUPS hah a a eet Ee 201 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Groups Tnproduetpen zeuN amt dead ENEE EENS 202 Group functionality iesse eo entearen cs peste SE det SEENEN eves epee bape es tere 202 Groups Recordi isrtri artet e aa oea es aeee hi 203 900 proupS 4 3 E 203
353. seceseceaecsaecssecsaecaeesneseneeeeens 245 Insert A Sequence Step In The List 245 Sequences NEE 246 Seguences E EE 247 Sequence Step Links Master Pl vbacks A 247 Sequence Step Links Shortcut OI 248 Sequence Step Links Master Pages AAA 248 Sequence Step Links Another Step 248 SEQUENCES EE 249 Sequences E dE 250 The Playlist Mel eegne enee e nee dees abate ee Eeer 251 The Playlist Console Display sorcnciio nesnice ne a n R e 251 Sequences Build amp Modify EE 252 Sequence Build Seq mode 4 2 ce escssscsssseceseceeesecseeecseesecsaeeeessecaeeeesaecaeeseenereeeaeeees 252 Sequence Modify Sequence Mode cc ceeecsssscsseeecesecseesecseesccneeeecsaeeeesaecaeeseenesessaeenes 252 Sequences Fade Curves 4 1 E 253 Sequence Assign Fade Curves 4 1 ecsisiesieneiiicisn ies erie iare eies eiiie rrik erie eese 253 sequences Block Values EE 254 Sequences Track Re A DEE 255 CHASE heeten eegen Een eebe 256 Chase ee EE 257 Chase Playback TEE 258 Chase Playback Mod s EE 259 NEE EE 260 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Chase BPM amp Tap Tempo wisccisiscces iiivevscevssnteatiadvataceibasensiaseavaanasousnetesenezivates 261 Set BPM Numerically 20 sek Mea pita stele eepeah Sat Assad adie ee aes 261 Set BPM using Tap emmer e cs sucscs soguessy deen d i ds NE EE E ES gie deed ie ented 261 CURA WV E sans Tinira eo to nade cngn sy guns a a baa abos e sees ie a oTe 262 Chase Wizard FUncti
354. sed for sequences in Chase mode When the BPM parameter is set it will override all programmed times The In and Out times will be 0 s and the Wait time will be set according to the BPM parameter Set BPM using Tap Tempo Action Keys Feedback 1 Assign the chaser toa sl SEQ amp The Chase is assigned to Master Master Key the Master Playback 2 Tap the Tempo TAP amp Master Key Hold TAP and tap the Master Key at least twice You have to tap at least 2 times in a row before the new tempo is activated The tapping speed is translated to and stored as the BPM parameter in the Sequence List You can easily change it afterwards 261 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Chase Wizard The Chase Wizard can create a chase sequence from a channel selection It is activated from within the Sequences List Action Keys Feedback 1 Open the Sequences SEQ The Sequences List is list opened 2 Open the Chase The Chase Wizard is Wizard opened The next free Sequence number is suggested 3 Select channels and Channel functions The current channel set levels selection from Live is automatically loaded Change if wanted to 4 Fill in the Chase Wizard Arrow Keys See Chase Wizard Functions 5 Execute the Chase The Wizard is closed and Wizard the new Chase is added to the Sequences List This is the Chase Wizard rer Chase Wi
355. set Times See Sequence Times See Moving Device Times 212 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Record Presets Live Tab When the channel control is set to the Live Tab you will record the complete stage output The Preset is automatically added to the sequence in the Main Playback Action Key Feedback 1 Activate the Live tab The Channel Controls are mapped to the A field 1a Record the complete RECORD You will get a popup with the next stage output to a new free preset suggested You can write Preset with the next free a text label The Preset is added to number the sequence in the Main Playback 1b Record a new Preset You will get a popup where you also with a specific number RECORD Can write a text label The Preset is added to the sequence in the Main Playback This depends on the BUILD SEQ mode softkey in the Playback soft key page of the Main Display Record Presets Field A Only There are a lot of options for recording presets some are set in the Record Settings hold SETUP and press RECORD This is a summary of the rest Action Key Feedback Record channels and RECORD No output from the Master changed moving device z Playbacks will be recorded The parameters in the A field to Preset is added to the sequence in the next free preset the Main Playback See The Recording Popup Record channels and GJ No output from the Master
356. soles Record a Macro 1 Select the Misc Soft Key page 2 Enter a number and press LEARN MACRO As long as recording is going on the text Recording macro is displayed in the top right corner of the screens 3 Click on Recording Macro in the top right corner of the screens to end recording Playback a Macro Enter the number and press MACRO As long as the Macro is being played back the text Playing macro is displayed in the top right corner of the screens 9 81 m 26 6 17 30 483 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Macros List 4 2 The Macro List is opened by holding MODIFY and pressing MACRO In the list it is possible to toggle between real time and fast playback and set a text label 3 Macro List Macro Real Time mode Text vw Flash Mast 1 3 ect channels 1 10 Rem Dim amp Mast View 484 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 MIDI 4 2 MIDI allows you to interface with Time Code and other MIDI equipment This chapter contains the following sections MIDI Introduction MIDI Standard MIDI MIDI MIDI Show Control MIDI Time Code MIDI Implementation Chart 485 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 MIDI Introduction 4 2 MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface The reason you can find it in a lighting console is that MIDI today is being used for a lot more than having synthesizers to speak to each other as was intended originally
357. ssigned time the time will take control to make a smooth movement 334 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Play back GoOnGo or GolnB 4 3 This parameter sets if Attributes will be executed when the step is faded in live GoOnGo or when the Step is loaded to be faded in GolnB You can set this to be stored automatically as always GoOnGo or GolnB depending on the style of your show and then change individually for any step or device Automatic GolnB Logic 4 3 If you are working in a theatrical sequential style of programming you can allow the system to decide this for you based on the intensity of the device in the preceeding step The correct setting for this to work is GolnB and unchecking the box for Disable automatic GoOnGo logic See System Settings Attribute The GoOnGo function can be edited individually for each step and device in the Sequence List NOTE GolnB attributes follow the default attribute time not the times recorded in the preset See Settings Attribute NOTE Dynamics are slightly different Either they follow the same logic as attributes or they can be set to start on GO always See Settings Crossfade 335 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Recording Attributes are stored in Presets just like intensities There are different recording modes This chapter contains the following sections Device Recording Introduction Device Recordin
358. st are the same as in the View Masters list The only differing one is Target which is the level the Master will fade to To load a Master for manual operation set the target level to 0 For the other functions see Master View List 247 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequence Step Links Shortcut 4 1 There is a shortcut for inserting a Master Link directly to the current Sequence Step in the Main Playback Function Key Feedback Insert a link to Master INSERT amp Master is inserted as a Master Ke link to the Step in A Insert a link to Master INSERT amp Master is linked with its with target Master Ke current content and a target level of 100 Sequence Step Links Master Pages Function Key Feedback Select the MastPage Arrow keys The column is highlighted column Insert a link to Master ER Master Page is linked It Page will be loaded to Masters 1 20 when this step is loaded to the B Next playback In the Sequence List Sequence Step Links Another Step NOTE Links to another sequence step are used mainly to create playback loops Links are NOT used to change a playback order in Congo this is done by cutting and pasting a step in a different location See Copy Cut amp Paste Function Column Feedback Select the LinkTo column Arrow keys The column i
359. st of this chapter 258 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Chase Playback Modes There are three modes that affect the playback of a chase Mode Where Function Reverse Set in The Sequences Reverses the chase direction List Columns Bounce Set in The Sequences Makes the chase reverse direction List Columns every second time Single Shot Set in The Sequences The chase will run one time and List Columns stop 259 Chase Set Rate Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 You can set a rate 1 1000 for a Chase It will scale all times proportionally Action Keys Feedback 1 Open the Sequences SEQ The Sequences List is list opened 2 Step to the Rate cell for Arrow Keys The cell is highlighted a chase 3 Enter a new Rate G The Rate is assigned to this Chase All fade times are proportionally scaled 260 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Chase BPM amp Tap Tempo You can set the tempo speed to a chaser in BPM This can be set numerically in the Sequences window Browser gt Sequences or using the Tap Tempo function Set BPM Numerically Action Keys Feedback 1 Open the Sequences SEQ The Sequences List is list opened 2 Step to the BPM cell for Arrow Keys The cell is highlighted a chase 3 Enter a new BPM sl MODIFY The BPM is assigned to this Chase The BPM parameter is only u
360. sting dimmers these will be unpatched automatically ell te Patch Wizard Patch Dimmer Patch Device Set Clear Number of dimmers Starting at desk channel DMX Address DMX Universe Replace existing dimmers Patch Moving Device s 4 2 Select a template from the list or open the Import Template Wizard See Import Template Wizard Importing a template will add it to the list in this dropdown Enter the number of devices desk channel DMX address and universe When the device type and number of devices are specified the required block of outputs is indicated in italic over the DMX Address se image The first free DMX address and output is suggested too 4 2 If you check Replace existing dimmers default they will be unpatched automatically If you are patching scrollers you can select a scroller roll You can assign a scroller roll later as well from the device settings list Output Offset 4 1 allows you to set an offset from the first attribute of each moving device to achieve a specific numbering for the start addresses 138 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 e et 7 Patch Wizard Patch Dimmer Patch Device Set Clear Type of device macsom e 1 Number of devices Starting at desk channel 0 Block of 13 outputs needed DMX Address DMX Universe Output offset Replace existing dimmers Scroller roll No Scroller Roll NOTE Patched devices are automatically set to default values
361. stopped in the following ways Stop Dynamics manually Activate A Dynamic Stop Table Delete the Dynamic from Live Dynamic Effects Delete the Dynamic using the Dynamics display Fade in a Preset in the Main Playback Load a new Sequence to the Main Playback Providing the Auto Stop parameter in the System Settings is set to ON See System Settings Moving Device attributes are stopped automatically when a new value is played back from any Playback or Master Intensity Dynamics can only be stopped with the Stop Dynamics table of the manual stop functions NOTE Dynamics act like Attributes they are executed in A or B depending on the GoOnGo or GolnB flag of the step See Device Play back GoOnGo or GolnB Stop Dynamics Manually Action Key Feedback 1 Select channels Channel functions The selected channels are highlighted in the Channel View 2 Stop Dynamics ear amp All Dynamics are cleared DYN EFFECT for the selected channel s This is a shortcut to select all channels with Dynamics assigned to them Function Key Feedback Select all channels with CH amp All selected channels are dynamics DYN EFFECT highlighted in the Channel View Activate A Dynamic Stop Table Intensity Dynamics can only be stopped by assigning a Stop Intensity Table There is a STOP Dynamic in the Effect Library for this 1 Select the channels 2 Assign th
362. t palette and Presets with In times set in Function Keys Feedback Set Master Page Time COME A Master Page Time is PAGE set to the currently loaded Master Page 20 The Master Page Time can be set from the Master Page List as well Master Page Times BPM The Master Page BPM will affect all chasers running in that Master Page Function Keys Feedback Set Master Page BPM TAP amp Tap at least two times to set a BPM You can edit it in the Master Page List If chases have a rate it will be scaled by the BPM 272 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Pages Auto update Mode 4 1 This is the default mode for Master Pages in which all changes automatically are stored to the current Master Page 4 1 Function Keys Feedback 1 Open the Master Page SETUP amp PAGE The Master Page Settings Settings popup is opened 2 Toggle Auto update MODIFY MODIFY will toggle this parameter on off NOTE Without this mode Master Pages have to be recorded manually See Record Master Pages 273 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Pages Display List The Display lists are shown in the main display of the console The trackball has to be in DISP LIST mode Function Keys Feedback 1 Open the Master Page DISP amp PAGE The Master Page
363. t max level Sets a maximum level to the current levels Channel Editor Wizard Value Depending on the type of change the number here is the Value used It can be a level or a channel number Channel Editor Wizard Include If 0 This parameter will allow the change to affect the channels with no level 0 in the target Presets 224 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Presets Auto Save Each time you record a preset or a group all changes to the play since the last RECORD or Save are stored ina play called AUTOSAVE ASC This play is stored in the Play Archive Browser gt File gt Open gt Play Archive and can be opened like any play Function Console Feedback Open the Auto Save SETUP amp RECORD Opens a popup where setting you can set Auto Save to ON NOTE This is a feature that we recommend you to use with caution Saving a large show can slow down the system temporarily 225 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Presets Times FCB times for moving device parameters are stored with the Preset e The default setting for FCB times is 100 of the main In time e The default setting for FCB delay times is 100 of the Delay main In time These times are executed when played back from a Sequence or from a Master Playback You can set them in or as absolute times in seconds You can select what to default to in the Time Settings SETUP amp TIME Hold C
364. t ten dynamics are displayed in the section immediately 2 Activate a Dynamic Section keys 1 10 The selected Effect is activated for the currently selected channel s See Direct Selects Start Dynamics With Direct Mode 1 Hold DYN EFFECT don t let go until the Dynamics are started When this is held the first 40 Dynamic Effects in the Effect Library are displayed on the Direct Select keys 2 Activate a Dynamic by pressing the corresponding key 3 Let go of DYN EFFECT 366 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamics Control 4 1 The Dynamics Soft Key Page in the Main Display of the console facepanel is opened by pressing DYNAMICS in the top menu soft key page Congo Live Dynamic Effects Delete Dynam Congo Jr Select Clear Delete Delete Keep All Select All Dynam Dynam lt ed ot It has the following functions for controlling live Dynamics Clear Dynamics Soft Keys 4 1 Clear Dynamics Soft Keys Dynamic Wheels Delete Selected Dynamics in Display List soft key Keep Dynamics in next Preset soft key Set Distance in soft key The Clear Dynamics soft keys left column are used to clear and or stop running Dynamics e Select All active Dynamics SELECT ALL e Clear all Selected Dynamics CLEAR SELECT e Delete All running Dynamics DELETE ALL See Dynamics Stop 367 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Dynamic Wheels Size Rate Offset amp
365. tab or comma separated txt files We recommend tab separated files since comma separated files can cause problems with data that includes commas This is found under File gt Export gt Data In this popup you can also select which data to export Uncheck Items We suggest you select which items to export in the export popup mentioned above or you will have an enormous amount of data to select from Typical categories to include would probably be Channel Dimmer Wattage Purpose Position Instrument Type Color Type amp Wattage A suggestion for columns to import besides Channels into the Channel Database would be Text A Purpose Text B Position Text C Color amp Template Text D Type amp Wattage Color amp Template 153 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Uncheck Parentheses Lightwright seems to by default use parentheses on channel numbers So channel 1 in Lightwright is 1 So when you export the data from LightWright in Export options check the option Strip channel parentheses If you do not check this option the channel will be exported with the parentheses and Congo will not understand that it is a channel number There is also a setting in Edit gt Preferences Use parentheses around channel numbers By checking that box it s also possible to get rid of the parentheses in the lists Export Devices as Channels Check the option For lights with attributes export only the f
366. tallation eudlmnes eee eeseceeneeeeeececeeeeeceeeeecseeeecsteeeeeaeees 33 System Info Software amp Update s siccisassesssecsecsaavccacdesnasacentensactesdestetebenesoaenses 34 Version formation seed ie bau tiie aoa toed 34 Upgrade Software ees ee ee EES evens 35 New Software Version information ccsecssecssesecsessecsseeecesecseesecseeecsaeeeeaecaeeseeneveeenaeeees 36 System Info Console Specification cece eeeseecsseceeesececeeececeeeeeceeeeecsteeeeeaaees 37 System Info Interface Specification sacs si scacsaivaccavcgseaaessleancstsameeuaiseccatesenaats 38 QUICK LOUL see EE T N O E E E ON 39 Quick Tour Console Facepanel ivi cc sscetasescaasvaeseacsesutead onde sogattsvsscdevardceeteneees 40 Console Facepanel Congo 0 cece eeeesceseeeseeeeceesceeeceseensecesecsaecsaecaaecaeeeseseaeseeeeeeeeaeseneeeees 40 Console Facepanel Congo Jr 41 Facepanel Programming Section ccscesesssssscseesecsseeecsaecseesecaeeseeneeeeceaeceessecaeeseeneseeeeaees 41 Facepanel Console Main Display c cesssssscseeseceseeeceseceeesecseesecsaeeecsaeceessecaeeseeneeeeeaees 42 Main Display Functio Seena E EE E A REE e TR 44 Facepanel Output Mode Switch 45 Facepanel Grand Master 45 Facepanel Trackbalt eege EES Sas de NEGER Eege AEN 46 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Quick Tour Key SyMtaxes seet ZENNER 47 Quick Tour Software Terminology eecceceescecssnceeeeececeeceeceeeeeceeeeecstee
367. tart stop cannot be set with the wheel unless they are specified as subranges 353 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Template Range Wizard Press WIZARD in the Template Range Editor This Wizard simplifies entering a number of evenly spread ranges for example frames between 0 255 This is useful to create positions for a scroller or a gobo color wheel 1 Open the Template Range Editor See Device Template Ranges 2 Press WIZARD Template Range Wizard Number of Ranges pg Centered Snap Positions 3 Enter the number of ranges you wish to create and press MODIFY 4 Step to Centered and Snap Positions with arrow keys Use MODIFY to toggle e Centered The middle value of a range is always output when selected e Snap Positions Fixed positions Start Stop 6 Select EXECUTE and press MODIFY previously existing ranges will be overwritten 354 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Templates Mode Tables Range Tables make it possible to control multiple mode devices such as for example the High End x Spot e A set of ranges are defined for a parameter e The Table defines which range is used for one parameter based upon the Range setting of another parameter In the High End x Spot there are Mode parameters color mode that affect the function of another parameter color wheel When a mode is set by selecting a Range on one function the corresponding Table Range will be assigned to t
368. tch Dimmer Curves GI 155 Patch Dimmer Curve Editor 1 155 Patch Fetten ee 157 Output Editor Formats 71 157 Output Editor Dimmer Check Mode 21 159 Output Editor Patching Mode LN 159 Output Editor Patch By Channel GO 21 160 Output Editor Patch By Output 21 160 Patch Direct Patch In Lists OI 162 CHANNEE GAY OUTS ege deletions tonto esta ees 163 Channel Layouts rte ee Eed 164 E ane E E 165 Channel Layout List Columns amp Functions 21 165 Channel Layouts Editor 4 2 sicsicscessteccscvsssseecsaarevscassebeaesasccedsanvcnaatesebateteaens 166 Channel Layout Editor General Functions 21 166 Channel Layout Editor Wheels 21 167 6 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Layout Editor Colors 21 168 Channel Layout Editor Align GL 21 168 Channel Layout Editor Wizard 7 169 Channel Layout Editor Text GO 21 170 Channel Layouts Create 4 2 isccceasiwcckedssnceecaaavevaiacsepeaciadeasaanasecsaceannaeceesta 171 Channel Layouts Channels 4 2 3 5 dee 172 Channel Layouts Channel Numbers 21 172 Channel Layouts Channel Features 21 173 Channel Layouts Lines 4 2 E 174 Channel Layouts Boxes 4 2 ssessssssssseesseessersseessesesssressseessressessseeesseeessees 175 Channel Layouts Content 4 2 EE 176 Channel Layo ts gt Gad EE 177 E EE E 178 Channels Introduction i 33cadasceiaasi dreet niensis eriari 179 Channels Ch Only Mode geegent enee eg 180 CATS SS WNC Wy S
369. ternational Settings They are displayed in the language of the installation WE o gt System settings General System name Congo Preferred language english Preferred help Language japanese File Server path Inverse LCD Channel downgrade Time settings International settings Software upgrade code Regional and Language Options sl x Regional Options Languages Advanced Standards and formats This option affects how some programs format numbers currencies dates and time Select an item to match its preferences or click Customize to choose your own formats English United States Customize Samples Hate 123 456 78300 Cwency zwee zem o Time eum oo Short date baam lt lt C CC S Longdate Monday Augutl4 2006 Location To help services provide you with local information such as news and weather select your present location United States x Cancel Apply 418 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Login Settings Software Update Selecting SOFTWARE UPDATE and clicking opens the software update dialog A USB memory stick with the latest congo exe file from www etcconnect com in a folder called SOFTWARE should be inserted in a USB port before activating this EEN ve 7 System settings General System name Congo Preferred language english Preferred help language japanese File Server path Inverse LCD
370. the following sections Quick Start Reset The System Quick Start Conventional Lights Quick Start Moving Devices Quick Start Dynamic Effects 52 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Quick Start Reset The System When you open a new empty Play the patch is reset 1 1 This chapter is a checklist for resetting the frontpanel and checking the output This chapter contains the following sections e Reset The Console Facepanel e Check The Output Before you start make sure you have loaded a new empty Play See Load a New empty Play Reset The Console Facepanel To get light you have to make sure the console is reset properly There is an Output Mode switch in the top right corner of the console Action Console Feedback 1 Enable output Output Mode Switch to ON The crossfaders are in the bottom right corner of the console Action Console Feedback 2 Reset the crossfaders by moving the up and back down A B faders to bottom position 53 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 The Grand Master is in the top right corner It controls the total output of the console Action Console Feedback 3 Reset the Grand Grand Master to Master 100 The Playback Fade mode switch is normally in Masters mode Action Console Feedback 4 Reset the Playback Fader Mode to Fader mode MASTER
371. the functions of the wheels See Facepanel Console Main Display Location Around the Main Display area See Facepanel Console Main Display Console Key START N A Function Start a fade in a Master Playback See Master Playbacks Start Fades Location Over the Master Playback key section See Master Playback Playback Keys Console Key TAB Tab Function Activate next Tab or Tab See Navigating Tabs More Hold TAB and use the level wheel to resize the lower part of a List More Hold TAB and use arrow keys to split and move Tabs More Hold C ALT and press TAB to reset all Tabs to default Location Navigation Pad right See Facepanel Programming Section 531 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Key TAP N A e Function Hold TAP and set BPM tempo by tapping a master key with a chase loaded to that Playback See Master Playback Playback Keys Location See Master Playback Playback Keys Console Key TEXT ALT T e Function Activate text input from the QWERTY keyboard console display over Masters 11 20 for the step in the A field of the Main Playback See Entering Texts e More Hold TEXT and press a Master or Direct Select key to activate text input for a Group or Preset e Location Top right corner under the Independent section Console Key THRU Num Lock e Function Select a range of channels See Select Channels e Location Programming S
372. tion 505 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Accessories This Chapter is about accessories and options such as remote control networking printer fader wing panel keyboard etc This chapter contains the following sections Accessories Ext Keyboard Accessories Ext Mouse Or Trackball Accessories Printer Accessories Lynx Fader Wing Accessories Remote Control Accessories Dimmer Feedback Log Accessories Visualisation Software Accessories MIDI 506 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Accessories Ext Keyboard An external keyboard will simulate most keys of the console See the Console Functions Table below This is simple to work with since the keyboard works exactly like the console For example pressing R is the same as pressing RECORD and pressing 1 is the same as pressing Master key 1 WARNING Multi media keyboards may have special keys for example SLEEP which puts CONGO to sleep Avoid using these keyboards they will trigger functions that you most probably do NOT want Keyboard Level Wheel You can use a mouse wheel to emulate the level wheel for setting levels and navigating See Ext Mouse Or Trackball Keyboard CH Step You can hold CTRL and use the left right arrows to emulate CH and CH Keyboard Standard Functions Standard keyboard functions available in all situations are ESC Escape closes open
373. to keep them assigned to the Device channels MODIFY 10 fitis a scroller you need to define a scroller roll You can do this afterwards as well and assign it from the Device List see Assing A Scroller Roll just leave at No Roll for now 11 Press EXECUTE MODIFY The moving device is patched and shall now appear as a device in the channel view 60 Test the Device Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 100 Function Console Feedback 1 Select the desk CH This selects the device channel the moving and connects all device was assigned to parameters to the controls of the console 2 Set the device to full LEVEL LEVEL This should light the device If there is some kind of ignition procedure you have to sort this out with the manual of that Device If not go back and check the address DMX cable etc You should however always be able to control pan and tilt if it has been set up properly next step 3 Activate Parameter PARAMETER This connects pan and tilt mode for the trackball to the trackball 4 Move the device Trackball Moving the trackball should result in moving the device Record A Moving Device to a Master Function Key Feedback 1 Select the channel of sl Level Wheel The channel is marked in the moving device s orange as selected 2 Record to Master 1 RECORD amp A popup wil
374. to the selected cell s 4 Update Preset Only needed in Live Attributes Editor NOTE Times can be set to the selected devices also by holding TIME and pressing FOCUS COLOR or BEAM 4 2 310 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Set Time to Devices popup wm ene e 7 Set attribute times You can set times either to the parameter type FCB or to the individual parameters Preset FCB times Attribute Delay Times 4 2 These functions will work in the Live Attribute Editor and the Preset Attribute Editor Action Key Feedback 1 Open the Delay row FORMAT amp The Delay row is opened Down arrow under each cell Down arrow J 2 Select Attribute delay Arrow keys The cell s is highlighted cell s 3 Set delay time E The delay time is set to the selected cell s 4 Update Preset UPDATE Only needed in Live Attributes Editor NOTE Delay times can be set to the selected devices also by holding DELAY and pressing FOCUS COLOR or BEAM 4 2 311 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Times Default Attribute Time The Default Attribute Time 3 seconds is used when a Moving Device is positioned with a Palette with Home Attributes or with GolnB The main objective is to keep noise and unnecessary mechanical friction down To change this time see Attribute Settings 312 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Times Fan Times 4 2 In the Live and Preset Att
375. to this the current selection A popup will selection warn if outputs are in use already 142 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Patch Output List 4 2 You can view and edit desk channel scaling and curve for outputs in the Output List BROWSER gt Patching gt Output List gt Universe See Introduction To Patching 3 Output List Output Channel Scaling Curve Device Info 100 No curve 100 No curve 100 No curve 100 D curve 100 curve 100 curve 100 curve NOTE The Output List is divided into DMX universes Open each from the Browser gt Patching gt Output List gt Universe Output List Columns amp Functions 4 2 Column Input Function Output EDMX No input The number of this Output and EDMX cannot be edited here Channel 0 6144 Enter the number followed by MODIFY Scaling 0 200 Sets the scaling factor for the intensity of this output channels can be scaled in the Channel List Curve dropdown Shows the output curve See Dimmer Curves Device Info No Input Shows the moving device template and parameter assigned to this output Cannot be edited see Device Settings Park 0 100 Shows the level an output is parked at Set a level with MODIFY and remove with C amp MODIFY See Park Output Lists show EDMX numbers in after the offset port numbers in the first column This is a direct translation o
376. top 134 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 REFERENCE MANUAL This is the reference section of the manual where all functions are described in detail These are the chapters Patch Channel Layouts Channels Groups Presets Sequences Chase Master Pages Devices Dynamics Copy Cut amp Paste Entering Texts The Import Wizard System Settings Display Lists Login Settings Network Media Notes Track Jam Mode Mute amp Solo Park Dock Areas Macros MIDI User Login Partitions 135 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 PATCH You assign channels to dimmer and moving device outputs addresses in the Patch This chapter contains the following sections Patch Introduction Patch Patch Wizard Patch Channel List Patch Output List Patch Device Settings Patch Rename Channels Patch Edit Change A Moving Device Patch Channel Database amp Auto groups Patch Dimmer Curves 4 1 Patch Direct Patch In Lists 4 1 Patch Output Editor 4 2 136 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Patch Introduction 4 2 When opening a new play you can choose to set the Patch 1 1 or cleared you can also choose to open the Patch Wizard To patch devices or outputs look in this chapter All Patch functions are available under the Patching node of the Browser Browser gt Patching Browser Output List tput Editor mopla 5 oller Rolls ameter Definiti
377. tor gives access to the following actions View Outputs in different formats All patched unpatched selected Select by Output or by Channel Expand information to show Device Parameter names Levels are shown in 8 or 16 bits Changing Levels are shown with a blue background for going up and green for down Patch ranges or single channels outputs directly Park status is showed as a dimmed Output symbol Next and Last can be used to step around within a selection of channels or outputs Move around by holding CH ID and using arrows or wheel See Introduction To Patching The Output Editor is opened from the Browser or with keys e BROWSER gt Patching gt Output Editor e Hold MODIFY and press OUTPUT e Enter an output and press OUTPUT Output Editor Formats 4 2 You can toggle between these formats by pressing FORMAT The currently selected format is indicated in the top right corner 4 2 All outputs Patched Un patched Selected 157 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 There are color indications for most statuses Patch Mode Output selection mode All outputs 191 193 194 195 20 206 207 209 53 128 112 RK 21 232 ERIS 214 21 2 Se EN 32 Mae 300 216 247 48 219 220 ice FE Ee 2 SES 1M4 13 outputs ee Devices are marked in with a horizontal bar that show the involved outputs Levels are shown in 8 or 16 bits depending on template Changing Levels are shown with a blue background fo
378. tribute views dimmed There is a Parked items list that is opened with MODIFY amp PARK where it is possible to un park as well with DELETE You can hold the soft key UNPARK Misc and press several different values consequently Function Key Feedback Un park all values of the UNPARK amp Channel are un selected channel s parked Un park all values of the c amp Channel are un selected channel s parked Un park levels of the selected UNPARK amp Levels are un parked channel s LEVEL Un park attributes of the UNPARK amp ATTRIB Attributes are un selected channel s parked Un park Focus parameters of UNPARK amp FOCUS Focus parameters are the selected channel s un parked Un park Color parameters of UNPARK amp COLOR Color parameters are the selected channel s un parked Un park Beam parameters of UNPARK amp BEAM Beam parameters are the selected channel s un parked Un park U1 U3 parameters of UNPARK amp Ui1 U3 U1 U3 parameters the selected channel s are un parked Un park specific parameters UNPARK amp Single parameter is of the selected channel s Wheel key un parked 475 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Park Parked Items List 4 2 In the Parked Items List it is possible to unpark any item by pressing DELETE 4 Parked Items List Item type
379. troduction s eseseserererererererererererererererererererererrrrerereee 315 Device Palettes Record 316 Bach Deviceor Each Device Type seele Seegen 316 Record A Focus Palette xs a igk euugsgd ABEE EENS EE 316 Record A Color Palettes nirt a a a austin weasevaves 317 Record A Beam aleng chsctecccsi cock eegen ENEE ESA 318 Record An All Palette svscsicicsigsceusescoih cs a a ea a a i 319 Device Palettes RE 320 Device Palettes UPDATE direct key In 321 Re record A Palette Merge Or Replace 0 eee ecceecceescesecesecesecaecsaecaeecaeeeaeeeaeeaeeens 322 Device Palettes REI eet aes a 323 Device Palettes Eists 43 sitenin aa aoia ai estit 324 Palette List Columns amp Functions ccccccccccscssssscccccecsesssssessccecesseesssseesceessessesseesseeseeees 324 11 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Palettes Activate By NUMDbET siccsssccscicavevascisasencsaspedeanesevenctessncceanes 325 Device Palettes Direct Moden rosses iere Zeg eegen Eet aa Daceseeoyte 326 Device Palettes Kg EE 327 Device Palettes Select ZE arme deeg ite ee dee 328 Device Palettes Select Stored Channel 329 Device Palettes Display List s i 3 cnucidadncuadiinunanudaandushichane 330 Device Palettes Focusing Mode EE 331 Devices Play e E 332 Device Play back Introduction veier ege Eegenen 333 Device Play back Attributes Follow Faderg AAA 334 Masters And Attributes General 334 Masters And Attributes Rubber
380. ttached to This chapter contains the following sections e Notes Introduction 4 1 e Notes Create 4 1 e Notes Editor 4 1 440 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Notes Introduction 4 1 Notes are created in lists by pressing NOTE Alt N or by pressing MODIFY in the Note N column of the list All Notes are tagged with a time stamp and the user login of the operator Notes are shown in the Playback View with Flags The color of these flags can be set in the Notes Editor In the Notes Editor it is possible to edit delete and change color code for Notes 44 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Notes Create 4 1 Notes are created in the following lists by pressing NOTE Playback view Sequence List Preset List Group List Focus Palette List Color Palette List Beam Palette List All Palette List Pressing NOTE for example in the Preset List will produce the following popup P AN Enter note for Preset 1 0 A Text Focus this gobo Press MODIFY to save See Notes Editor 442 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Notes Editor 4 1 Open the Notes Editor by holding MODIFY and pressing NOTE or from the Browser Browser gt Setup gt Note Editor 3 Notes User Linked to Note Focus this gobo low Notify the sound man Yell e Note Editor Columns 4 1 These are the columns in the Note Editor Column Input Function
381. tte is activated 4 1 for the selected channel s NOTE The fader will fade the attributes of the selected channels to the palette values when moved up What happens when you move the fader down depends on the setting of Rubberband in the Master Setup See Master Playbacks Devices 113 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Times The fade time can be activated when you move the fader or when you start a Master fade with the Flash On Time or START function Function Keys Feedback Set an In Out time COME amp The time is assigned to Master Key the Master as an In and Out fade time NOTE How the time affects fading the Master manually depends on the settings of the Master See Master Time Settings Set In Wait Out times for a Master You can set a In Wait and Out time for each Master from the Master Editor Function Keys Feedback 1 Open the Master Editor MODIFY amp The Master Editor is Master Key opened focused at Master 2 Go to IN time Arrow Keys IN time is highlighted 3 Set an IN time of sl MODIFY An IN time of seconds is seconds set 4 Set WAIT and OUT in Step 2 and 3 WAIT and OUT times are the same way Set The In time is used by Flash On Time and Times For Masters in the Master Settings SETUP amp MASTER KEY The WAIT and OUT times ar
382. uage 4 2 Language is selected in the login screen system settings popup See LOGIN SETTINGS The system has to be rebooted to active a new language System settings General System name Conga Preferred Language english Preferred help language french japanese File Server path french Inverse LCD german 22 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 This Manual Terminology This manual is intended for use with the Avab Congo control system by ETC The on line manual and the paper manual are the exact same document In order to be specific about where features and commands are found the following naming and text conventions will be used Congo processor hardware the computer used to run the Congo applications Congo Facepanel hardware the control console hardware This is also referred to simply as the Facepanel e Congo software the application that gives you the functionality of the Congo system controlled from the Facepanel Commands in the Browser Tab are indicated like this Browser gt Files gt New Console keys in general are indicated in all CAPS For example RECORD Console keys in tables are have a button outline like this RECORD e When a key is held and another key is pressed at the same time is written like this RECORD amp MASTER e References to other parts of the manual are indicated as underlined hyperlinks When viewing this manual electronically click on the reference to jump
383. ubtract one bit step from the selected channels Ge EXPLANATION Levels for channels controlling dimmers are traditionally set from 0 100 The internal resolution of DMX 512 however is almost 2 5 times higher A DMX channel is output from 0 255 bit steps You may want to use this higher accuracy when you are setting values for mechanical dimming devices The board will display the value rounded off to the closest value 1 4 will be displayed as 1 and 1 6 will be displayed as 2 If you want to find out what 0 100 level corresponds to a 0 255 bit level you divide the level with 0 39 100 255 0 39 For example 50 0 39 128 bit steps actually 128 21 If you want to find out what 0 255 bit step level corresponds to a 0 100 level you multiply by the same factor of 0 39 Example 129 x 0 39 50 31 NOTE 256 bit step levels cannot be displayed on the channel screen but are stored with the show and exported in ASCII Light Cues 188 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channels Capture Mode 4 2 Capture Mode makes it possible to control and record any channel level or parameter regardless of where it is output from Captured levels are considered to be changed at all times and will be recorded into Presets accordingly The channel is kept until released The channel number background of a captured channel is red RECORD will store the captured level It is possible to wo
384. unctions available All times are set to the Main Playback Function Softkey Feedback Set a channel time CHTIME Sets a channel time to the selected channels Set a channel delay Sets a channel delay time to time the selected channels Set a wait time Sets a Wait time to the Preset in A or B Set an out time OUT Sets an out time to the Preset in A or B Set a delay out time Sets a Delay Out time to the Preset in A or B Set a delay in time Sets a Delay In time to the Preset in A or B Set an in time ON Sets an In time to the Preset in A or B Set an FCB time Sets FCB times to the Preset in A or B Set an FCB delay Sets FCB delay to the Preset in A or B Learn Alert Learn Alert Activates Learn Alert Time mode 4 3 See Sequence Times WAF Alert Times Sequence Times FCB Times FCB Times are set to the Preset of a Sequence Step See Moving Device Times FCB Time Sequence Times Parameter Times Individual Moving Device Parameter times are set to the preset of a Sequence Step See Moving Device Times Parameter Time 243 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Sequence Times WAF Alert Times 4 3 An Alert time will count down from the completion of the previous crossfade and alert the operator as to when the next fade should be manually executed There is a Learn Mode that wil
385. unctions of the Main Playback Setting Feedback Modify Sequence When active this mode will suppress all wait times and master links Build Sequence When active default all presets recorded in A Live will be added to the sequence Followon Wait times will be treated as Followon times counting from GO instead of from the completion of the last fade GOTO jumps to The default is PRESET you can set it to STEP Crossfade both ways The default setting for a manual crossfade is upwards You can set it both ways 91 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Main Playback Refresh Functions 4 3 The Refresh function can be used for any part of a channel and will refresh to the resulting state of the current Sequence Step in the Main Playback Function Key Refresh all channels and devices REFRESH Refresh attributes of all device s REFRESH amp ATTRIB Refresh the levels of all device s and REFRESH amp LEVEL channel s Refresh the Focus parameters of the REFRESH amp FOCUS selected device s Refresh the Color parameters of the REFRESH amp COLOR selected device s Refresh the Beam parameters of the REFRESH amp BEAM selected device s Refresh the wheel parameters of the REFRESH amp Wheel key selected device s Refresh the U1 U3 of the selected device s REFRESH a U1 U3
386. up is loaded to the Playback Master Key Master Playback The number and name are shown in the master display Load all recorded Groups Tel GROUP amp Hold Group and keep from Group to the Master Keys pressing Master keys to Master Playbacks load the next stored Group 107 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Master Playbacks Flash Keys Only the lower row of Master Playbacks 1 20 have flash keys the lower row of dark keys Function Keys Feedback Flash Master 1 20 The content of the Master is set to full 100 as long as the Flash key is held See Flash Modes NOTE Flashing a Master will activate the Attributes or Dynamic Effects of a Preset in that Master Flash Modes 4 1 Flash mode is toggled for individually for each Master 1 20 4 1 There are three different Flash modes Off Normal amp Solo In Normal mode a Flash level can be set Function Keys Feedback Toggle Flash mode amp Flash mode is toggled for this Master Set Flash level Tel FLASH MODE amp Flash level is set to this BEER Flash Level and Flash Mode are indicated in the Master View press MASTER when the FLASH MODE key is held Solo On Off 100 100 20 1 NOTE Flashing a Master will activate the Attributes or Dynamic Effects of a Preset in that Master 108 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Flash On Time When Flash
387. urrent selection See Select Channels e Location Programming Section next to PRESET See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key J UMP TO B N A e Function Positions Preset in the sequence to the B field of the Main Playback See Main Playback Transport Keys e Location In the Main Playback See Main Playback Introduction Console Key LAST L e Function Select the previous channel within the current selection See Device Control Next amp Last Mode e Location To the right of the Main Display section See Facepanel Console Main Display Console Key LIVE F2 e Function Activate the Live tab See Live e Location Navigation Pad right See Facepanel Programming Section Console Key LOAD F6 e Function Load items from the Browser See Browser Functions e Location Programming Section next to COPY CUT See Facepanel Programming Section 526 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Console Key MASK K e Function Used in combination with other keys to toggle the mask functions that mask device parameters from recording See Device Control Mask e Location Navigation Pad right See Facepanel Console Main Display Console Key MASTER KEYS 0 9 Function Load content to the Master Playbacks See Master Playbacks Load Clear Modify Xtra Can be pressed to select the channels in a Group or Preset to the Channel Control e Location Over the lower row of
388. us Activates a Focus Palette for Moving Device Palettes the selected channel s Color Activates a Color Palette for Moving Device Palettes the selected channel s Beam Activates a Beam Palette for Moving Device Palettes the selected channel s Pal Activates an all Palette for Moving Device Palettes the selected channel s Dynam Activates a Dynamic Effect Dynamics Group Selects the channels in a Groups Group Param Ranges for a First select Param then press parameter gobo wheel the wheel key for a moving 4 1 device parameter to connect that range to the Direct Select keys Auto Group Auto Groups generated from Channel Database amp Auto the Channel Database Groups 4 1 Screen Press to select the stored Direct Select Save Screens screens You can enter a time before pressing a key to activate the change in this time 4 1 Auto Groups are sorted by Text Column from the Channel Database 123 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Direct Selects User Setups There are five User Setup pages for all settings in the Direct Selects They are stored to the five round keys over the Direct Selects Congo Action Console Feedback 1 Select User Setup Setup key The LED of that key is lit 2 Select Types and The current types and Banks banks can be recalled with this Setup key Congo Jr Action Console Feedback 1 Activate A Direct Sel
389. values from values from Preset Wheel Ke Preset are copied to the selected channel s Fetch all parameter FETCH All parameter values from values from Preset ATTRIB J Preset are copied to the selected channel s HINT You can fetch intensity values as well See Presets Fetch Intensities 290 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Control Next amp Last Mode Next Last will step through the current channel selection in the order they were selected The focused channel is mapped to intensity and parameter controls Action Key Feedback Activate Next Last The first channel in the current channel selection is marked as red and mapped to the level and device controls LAST can be used as well Step forward Channels are focused in the order they were selected The focused channel is highlighted in red in the active Channel View Step backwards LAST Same as above but backwards Leave Next Last mode SELECT ALL All channels are selected again Focused channel is highlighted in red AB AB AB AB 1 2 3 4 13 13 13 13 R NOTE Next Last and Highlight Mode are often used in combination for focusing single channels within a channel selection See Highlight Mode When you focus a channel with NEXT LAST it will be shown with number and name in the Information area middle of the LCD Display 291 Congo and Congo Jr Version
390. vice 316 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 3 Enter a text optional 4 Select Recording mode For Focus Palettes this is usually Each Device See Each Device or Each Device Type 5 Press MODIFY to confirm recording NOTE The MASK function can be used to filter out unwanted parameters when recording a Palette See Device Control Mask Record A Color Palette 1 Select channel s 2 Initiate recording of next free Palette or Palette Function Key Feedback Record next free Color amp You will get a popup Palette Record Color Palette amp You will get a popup Popup EO Record new Palette Type First free Palette 34 Palette Name Red Record attributes for Each Device T 3 Enter a text optional 4 Select Recording mode For Color Palettes this is default set to Each Device Type See Each Device or Each Device Type 5 Press MODIFY to confirm recording NOTE The MASK function can be used to filter out unwanted parameters when recording a Palette See Device Control Mask 317 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Record A Beam Palette 1 Select channel s 2 Initiate recording of next free Palette or Palette Function Key Feedback Record next free Beam RECORD amp BEAM You will get a popup Palette Record Beam Palette amp You will get a popup Popup SS Record new Palette Typ
391. vidual channels in a step set the intensity to 1 higher or lower on those channels you wish to block 455 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Track Editing Attributes 4 2 Attribute changes in a Preset for all channels can be updated to the Preset where they were last changed 1 Make level changes in a Preset 2 Hold UPDATE and press ATTRIB A track popup will open em en gt Attribute tracking The changed attributes will be updated in the preset where they were fast programmed 3 Confirm Track Editing Unblock Attributes 4 2 An Unblock function can be accessed by pressing WIZARD in the Sequence List It will remove all duplicate parameter values for Devices in the sequence in the main playback You can select the start and stop step for this operation 1 Open the Sequence List for Sequence by entering SEQ 2 Press WIZARD to open the unblock Wizard a Unblock Attributes Wizard This operation will rernove all redundant parameter values from the sequence in the main playback Please use with caution Note if you are using the same preset several times in the same sequence this may cause strange results Start At 1 13 0 y Stop t oa 20 0 y 3 Make your selection and confirm All redundant parameters will be deleted 456 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 AM MODE 4 1 Jam Mode generates data automatically and enters a Playback Mode that a
392. ws See Live Live Tab 70 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Navigating Channel Views 4 2 The Channel Views are easy to navigate with the navigation keys Hold FORMAT and use the level wheel to zoom Hold C amp FORMAT to reset the zoom factor Press FORMAT to toggle channel formats Hold FORMAT and press ALL to select the All Channels format directly 4 2 e Enter a number and press FORMAT to select a Channel Layout e Hold CH and press Arrow keys to scroll f1 Main Playback All channels The status bar in the top shows the current Preset in the Main Playback to the left and the selected format to the right 4 2 Channel View Zoom Hold FORMAT and use the wheel to Zoom in out All channels All channels NOTE Hold C amp FORMAT to reset the zoom factor 71 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel View Formats Selected Only selected channels are shown Pressing FORMAT toggles through the formats Selected channals Channel View Format Selected and non zero 4 2 Selected and non zero channels are shown Pressing FORMAT toggles through the formats Selected and non zero channels Hold FORMAT and press CH to select this format directly 4 2 72 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel View Format Selected And Captured 4 2 Selected and captured channels are shown Pressing FORMAT toggles through the formats Selected and captured channels
393. y Device Control Next amp Last Mode Device Control Highlight Mode 277 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Device Control Introduction When you select the channel s of a moving device s all controls are automatically mapped to this section Congo Congo Jr RAN PALETTE 278 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Moving Device Controls Explanation Number Function Explanation 1 Parameter Groups Parameters are divided into three categories Focus Color and Beam Select category by pressing one of these keys All available Moving Device Parameters within this category are mapped to the Wheels and shown in the display above them 2 If there are more than four parameters press the category key again for the next set 2 Wheel Content Each wheel has a section of the display dedicated to it In this section the parameter type is displayed on top and the current value or Palette name under If there is a range number it is displayed 3 Parameter Wheel Move the parameter wheel to set a value For 16 bit control move slowly for 8 bit control move fast 4 Wheel key with value Press to toggle between zero and full Enter a number and press the key to set a value 5 Wheel key with list Hold wheel key to get the sublist in the display Use the wheel to select and let go to activate Enter a number and press the key to select a range 6 Parameter
394. y or vertically will align the center points of each object Align on a vertical line 4lign on a horizontal line Align rotation Align size Align colors Set equal vertical spacing Set equal horizontal spacing 3 Make selection and confirm with MODIFY 168 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Layout Editor Wizard 4 2 The wizard makes it possible to insert a matrix array or circle of objects of any type 1 Open the wizard by pressing or clicking WIZARD Lee N Insert multiple objects 4rray Matrix Circle Select the type of object and the number of rows columns Number of rows 1 Number of columns 1 Object type Select item type Start at Use selection 2 Select matrix array or circle e kemmert NN Insert multiple objects rray Matrix Circle Select the type number of objects and their geographic arrangement Number of objects 1 Object type Start at Use selection Counter clockwise 3 Fill in numbers type and behaviour 4 Confirm HINT Use the Strech H and V wheels to trim the insertion 169 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Examples of circle and matrix Channel Layout Editor Text 4 2 It is possible to set a text to a line or box 1 Select the object 2 Press TEXT Alt T from keyboard 3 Enter a text and confirm with MODIFY NOTE Use size to resize a text for an object 170 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Channel Layouts
395. ypad to control channels and levels directly Phone Remote Functions vei TS Once is point Twice is CLEAR 513 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Remote Control ETC cRRFU Radio All instructions for connecting and operating the ETC CRRFU Radio Remote control are packaged and delivered with this unit 514 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Accessories Dimmer Feedback Log 4 1 Browser gt Setup gt Dimmer Feedback Log The log shows dimmer errors reported by the IES Dimstat application News in 4 2 e Anew column Active has been added in the Dimmer Feedback Log It shows if the error is active or if it has been cleared You can also reset a known error to get rid of the indication on the channel by toggling the Active field Active errors are marked with a special color and style e It is possible to select one or more rows in the Dimmer Feedback Log and press DELETE to remove them from the list IES is now shown in the status bar when there is dimmer feedback data received from IES dimmers The dimmer fault indication in the channel view has been changed to the symbol used by dimstat e f general dimmer errors are active there is now a warning road sign in the title bar 515 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Accessories Visualisation Software 4 1 It is possible to connect a separate computer running a visualisation software such as WYSIWYG or CAPTURE directly to Congo with Ethernet
396. zard Selected channels Step 1 Select the channels levels to operate on in the Channel View Step 2 Select options and Execute Number of steps 3 Channels per step i Step time 0 1 Chase number 126 Start at preset Increment Build 262 Chase Wizard Functions Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 Column Function Number of steps DIFY The number of steps the Chase shall have Channels per step MO DIFY The number of channels you wish to have in each step Step time MO DIFY Default wait time for each step Can be edited after Chase number MO DIFY The number this Chase will have Next free is suggested Start at preset MO DIFY The Preset number this Chase will use for the steps It will start at Preset 800 by default Increment MO DIFY You can set the Chase to use Presets with an increment of 1 here Build NOTE MODIFY Check if you want the Sequence Steps to continue adding new channels in each step to the previous ones If you want to make changes in the Chase Sequence you just created use the Sequence and Preset editors It is a normal Sequence that has been created by the Chase Wizard 263 Congo and Congo Jr Version 4 3 070328 MASTER PAGES Master Pages store all content for 20 masters and can be used in the lower 1 20 o

User Manual - Ume Audio System AB

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents